Home

PARTNER® - MC Telecom

Contents

1. PARTNER 6 Phone o o o Qo D aLB o o o Qa Intercom Intercom Ext Message MLS 34D Overlay a ul fae S LOL PARTNER 18D 18 Phone Next Neat Next fe mi m Procedure m_ ltem m_ Data m_ Remove m U vV w j f X Il EE FF US U Lf US U U Prev Prev Prev M m Procedure m_ ltem m Data m Enter Mm LS U U U U U N 0 P AA k BB M Lr Ly Ly Ly Ly Ly GG HH ii LJJ m m m m m m 0M 1N TO OP l J K L Y Z E Z U LS LS U US LS p T p J z K a T mM m mM 5 im i E F Syst Central BLE BCF sLG BCA U U U U Progam Tel Program H 5 E Ae eae A RIE a sc eC eo a A B c D U f U U g 5 Ext Message Intercom Intercom Feature PARTNER 34D Phone Wid _ i ea M M J oF oU oY sW CX E lool aca ack CSI sC alec rB ICM BENG 007 IPO 2AA EZ Ee 80 gC sO O gc BCA E 200 eC E ce E B Ext Message Intercom Intercom Figure D 2 Programming from an MLS 34D Phone Glossary Glossary Numbers 200 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to two out side lines 206 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that contains jacks for connecting up to two out side lines and up to six extensions 308EC module The Lucent technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting three outside lines and up to eight extensions to the
2. Table C 1 PARTNER System Speed Dial Numbers for Advanced Communications System Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 656 678 657 679 658 680 659 681 660 682 661 683 662 684 663 685 664 686 665 687 666 688 667 689 668 690 669 691 670 692 671 693 672 694 673 695 674 696 675 697 676 698 677 699 Speed Dial Form Table C 2 PARTNER Personal Speed Dial Numbers for Advanced Communications System Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 80 90 81 91 82 92 83 93 84 94 85 95 86 96 87 97 88 98 89 99 C 4 Programming Mixed Telephone Types Overview This appendix provides information about programming from a PARTNER 34D phone to MLS model phones and from an MLS 34D phone to PARTNER model phones In these situations you should be aware that the button that you press at extension 10 or 11 the programming extension is likely to be in a different location than the button on the phone to which the programming applies the target phone If you are programming from a PARTNER 18D or MLS 18D phone the button locations are the same You can use the illustrations in this appendix to facilitate programming from one telephone type to the other Figure D 1 shows the buttons on the P
3. TransTalk R Wireless PARTNER MAIL Ereng Phones i i Voice Messaging Module syslem Machine Machine Co Fax Machine PARTNER 6 l Phone Z Alert Doorphone EE Remote PassageWay PARTNER 18 Administration Adapter Phone Unit Figure 1 1 Sample System Components Overview Configurations The system can have one of three basic configurations all of which must be wall mounted a Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module This configuration does not use a carrier a 2 Slot Carrier which can hold up to two modules The PARTNER ACS processor module resides in the leftmost slot a 5 Slot Carrier which can hold up to five modules The PARTNER ACS processor module resides in the center slot This carrier includes a cover In either carrier one and only one of the modules must be a PARTNER ACS processor module The modules slide into the carrier which channels power to the system System Modules The following system modules can be installed in your system PARTNER ACS Processor Module provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features It has jacks for three outside lines eight enhanced Tip Ring extensions a music on hold audio source a loudspeaker paging system a grounding screw a jack that supports an adjunct for two Contact Closures and a call reporting SMDR device such as a printer It also has two PC Card slots a bicolor red a
4. Figure 2 7 Example of PARTNER 6 Phone as a Pooled Extension Using Centralized Telephone Programming Use Centralized Telephone Programming to program features or store telephone numbers for individual extensions from extension 10 or 11 All features that can be programmed at an extension can also be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming Most features also can be programmed on a system phone at the user s extension Keep in mind the following exceptions a Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing and Call Screening F25 always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming a Ifa user has a standard phone all features for the extension must be programmed by using Centralized Telephone Programming a Ifa user has a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming As a matter of convenience users may want to program all features for these phones using Centralized Telephone Programming 2 31 Programming 2 32 During Centralized Telephone Programming the display phone at extension 10 or 11 takes on the characteristics of the telephone being programmed including any System Programming settings and lines assigned to the phone If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an 18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also i
5. Q Quick Reference cards for system phones Quick Reference charts End of book R RAU see Remote Administration Unit Recall programming feature on a button 5 225 programming function in phone number 5 250 using 5 225 Recall Button description 5 224 switchhook use instead of Remote Administration Unit RAU REN Ringer Equivalence Number Resetting the System 5 263 Restore Problems 6 18 ___ S O Restore Programming 125 calls in progress effect on description 2 20 5 232 0 gt o restore file choosing manual or automatic 5 232 lt lt Restriction line access 302 5 171 _ S outgoing call 401 5 204 _ o O Restrictions Index dialing fax machine for 4 19 S disallowed phone number 2 15 ___ Restrictions Dialing disallowed phone numbers 5 113 5 114 emergency phone numbers 5 114 line access 5 171 locking an extension 5 256 overriding 2 16 PBX Centrex services with pool access star codes summary of 2 42_ 0 Retrieving a Held Call 5 154 ___ S O Ring on Transfer 119 5 235 _ __ S Ring pattern 5 279 S O Ring Distinctive 308 5 120 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 1 17 8 13 ____ Ringer Volume Controls 3 3 Ringing Abbreviated 305 5 6 transfer 3 5 3 6 5 292 0 Ringing Patterns standard phones 3 9 __ S O system phones 3 6 Ringing Idle Line Preference seq Automatic Line Se
6. For an extension that has a system phone you can program plus the extension number on the Auto Dial button so you can announce the calls when you transfer them 5 277 Feature Reference 5 278 Standard Phone To pass a call to another extension 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 above press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with
7. To associate a line with an extension for the purpose of logging caller ID information 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 at extension 10 or 11 At the extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press At the Line prompt enter the line number to be associated with the extension For example to associate line 2 with the extension press To change the line association for this extension press until the appropriate value displays See Valid Entries At this point To associate another line with this extension press or until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To associate another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 71 Feature Reference Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display phones It is not available for the MLS MLC MDW or Tip Ring phones Once the system administrator assigns the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 and or the Caller ID Log All Calls 319 features to log Caller ID calls you use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 to view the log Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing is available
8. 2 Enter a setting 1 9 For example to set VMS Cover Rings to 4 press Next Data or Prev Data until a display similar to the following appears VMS Cover Rings 4 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 282 VMS Cover Rings 321 Release 3 0 or Later VMS Cover Rings 321 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for VMS Cover defines the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox For ACS Release 3 0 VMS Cover Rings is programmable on a per extension basis Related Features VMS Cover Rings also applies to extensions that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 f an extension has VMS Cover F15 or Automatic VMS Cover Rings 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Valid Entries 1 9 3v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press eature O System Program System Program H O A O at extension 10 or 11 2 At the extension prompt enter an extension
9. 1 The Disallowed List then must be assigned to the extension using Disallowed List Assignment 405 2 Ifa line or pool is not assigned to the extension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line or dial the pool access code to access a line in the pool Emergency numbers Marked System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line or pool to place the call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line or pool If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on that list With Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List Programming Overriding Dialing Restrictions The following programming procedures provide ways to override all dialing restrictions provided the user has access to an outside line or pool Emergency Phone Number List 406 defines a list of up to ten numbers that can be dialed from any extension A typical number is 911 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers are specially identified System Speed Dial num
10. Ext Intercom i Message Figure 5 7 Default Line Assignments Line Assignment 301 Considerations Valid Entries You cannot assign a line that belongs to a pool as an individual line on that pooled extension A line must be assigned to a button with lights If a line is assigned to a button without lights you cannot access that line nor can you program anything else on the button You can assign multiple lines up to 19 to a standard phone but a single line phone can handle only one call at a time To make a call a user lifts the handset and dials 9 at the intercom dial tone the system selects the first available line based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for the extension Alternatively the user can use Direct Line Pickup to access a specific line 1 Assigned v 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a line button to assign the line to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign lines to a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 5 The red light next to each button that has a line assigned is on steady the red light next to each button that h
11. Problems with Combination Extensions on page 6 15 Possible Cause 3 a lf the phone does not work and it is not part of a combination extension call the hotline see pag 6 5 Troubleshooting Display Shows Only 16 Characters per Line Possible Cause A power outage occurred What to do Unplug the modular telephone cord from the phone then plug it in again If the display is still incorrect see System Phone Does Not Work jon page 6 5 Display Is Incorrect Possible Cause Date day and time are not set properly What to do Re enter the date day and time using System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 m f the display is correct the problem is solved a If the display is still not correct see System Phone Does Not Work jon page 6 5 Display Shows ReplaceSysBat W Power On or ChgBat W PowerOn at Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause System battery power is low What to do Replace the system batteries see Partner Advanced Communications Installation guide Display Does Not Show Caller ID Name Number 6 6 Possible Cause 1 Not receiving Caller ID service from local phone company What to do Contact your local phone company to check on Caller ID service a If you are not receiving Caller ID service subscribe to it a f you are receiving Caller ID service go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Extension connected to a module that does not suppo
12. Programming procedures use line and extension numbers The line number represents the line jack on a 200 206 308EC or 400 module or an ACS processor module to which the outside line is connected Similarly the extension number represents the extension jack on a 206 or 308EC module or an ACS processor module to which the system phone or standard device is connected For the 200 module the system assigns two lines For each 206 module the system assigns two lines and six extensions for the 308EC or ACS processor module the system assigns three lines and eight extensions for each 400 module the system assigns four lines The system numbers lines and extensions consecutively from left to right in a 2 Slot carrier beginning with the ACS processor module in the leftmost slot in a 5 Slot carrier the numbering also begins with the ACS processor module in the center slot and then moves to the leftmost module and continues consecutively from left to right Figure 2 1 shows the numbering scheme for a PARTNER ACS stand alone configuration for a 2 Slot carrier and for a 5 Slot carrier each with the system configured for maximum lines Figure 2 2 shows the numbering scheme for a PARTNER ACS stand alone configuration for a 2 Slot carrier and for a 5 Slot carrier each with the system configured for maximum extensions However your system can have any number of lines or extensions up to the maximum 2 2 Additional PARTNER Remot
13. 206 400 ACS o o aoa o 2 2 4 3 gt NOTE Extension numbering is done dynamically That is when numbering extensions the 200 400 and PARTNER MAIL VS modules count as six extensions Overview System Batteries The system uses two user replaceable AAA size standard alkaline batteries in the PARTNER ACS processor module to ensure that system programming and telephone programming settings are not lost in case of a power failure See Troubleshooting for instructions on replacing the batteries PC Card Slots The PARTNER ACS processor module has two PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association interface slots hereafter referred to as PC Card slots You can buy PC Cards to use in these slots for the following purposes Use a Backup and Restore PC Card to backup or restore telephone and system programming Upgrade from PARTNER ACS Release 1 0 to Release 1 1 or Release 2 0 or later using a PC Upgrade card After powering down the system you insert the PC Upgrade Card and turn the power back on While the system upgrades the bicolor red green power LED on the processor flashes green and red alternately When the upgrade is finished in about 20 seconds the power LED becomes steady green All of your system and extension programming will be saved and ready to work with the new release gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card
14. This chapter shows various applications for the following types of equipment nswering Machines utomated Attendants all Reporting Devices ontact Closure Devices O redit Card Scanners 7A ax Machines Modems i oice Messaging Systems In addition you can connect the following devices to your system Doorphones allow visitors to signal extensions by pressing a button on the doorphone the person who answers a doorphone call can then speak with the visitor at the doorphone A doorphone is especially useful for providing access to offices or departments after hours For example you can install a doorphone outside your building entrance to allow visitors to ring telephones inside the building when the receptionist is not there and the front door is locked Universal Doorphones offer a door unlock feature and can be installed in addition to PARTNER Doorphones 4 1 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 2 Loudspeaker paging systems allow you to broadcast a message over a large area by connecting the paging system directly to the PAGE jack on the processor module The system supports all Lucent Technologies paging systems including the entire PagePac line The system also supports most paging systems from other manufacturers when the paging systems are connected using a paging interface device For information about how to use a loudspeaker paging system with the system see Chapter 5 PARTNER PassageWay Solution al
15. 2 27 Programming 2 28 The third option is not applicable as a backup answering feature however it is useful for making brief announcements such as temporary closings or hours of business Direct Extension Dial Useful for routing outside callers directly to a specific extension or Hunt Group When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension or hunt group Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Useful when a receptionist leaves the desk for any period of time Calls can be forwarded to a backup answering extension Call Coverage Useful when users are unable to answer their calls and want them answered by someone else Telephone Programming Options Alternatively you can install a voice messaging system to provide an automated backup answering position Useful when the receptionist is busy on calls away from the desk or at night the voice messaging system answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings plays a customized greeting requests callers to enter an extension number and transfers the caller to the appropriate extension If no one answers at the destination extension the caller can leave a personal message in that extension s mailbox Button Programming The PARTNER 34D phone shown in Figure 2 5jillustrates the following programmed buttons in addition to some other sy
16. Backup Programming Automatic 123 uses the System Time to schedule the automatic backups Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 do not backup the System Time Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Time Be sure that the System Time is set correctly before using backup or restore procedures Enter the time in 24 hour notation In this scheme the hours of the day are 0000 12 midnight to 2359 11 59 p m Since each time must have four digits use leading zeros when necessary For example to set the time to 9 00 a m enter For 4 45 p m enter O The time appears on system display phones as a m or p m not in 24 hour notation To change the System Time 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Program C OQ at extension 10 or 11 Enter a new time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press A display similar to the following appears System Time Data 1415 This time appears on system display phones as 2 15 p 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Toll Call Prefix 402 Toll Call Prefix 402 Description This System Programming procedure indicates whether users must dial a 0 or 1 before the area code to make a long distance call or just the area code and number This feature should be set to reflect the dialing patterns of your local telephone co
17. The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur possible causes for the difficulty and procedures you can follow to try to solve the problem Programming procedure names are shown in boldface type for more information about a specific procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Customer Self Service Center on the Internet If you can access the Internet you can use the Customer Self Service Center to get on line information such as Answers to frequently asked questions 800 number directory If you have a service agreement active lease or warranty you also can get on line information such as a Feature programming tips Notification of changes to products Product documentation a Chat service The Internet address for the Customer Self Service Center is http www lucent com BusinessWorks selfservice When You Need Help If you have a problem with your system you may be able to solve it by following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter If not you can call for help If you need assistance when installing programming or using your system contact your local Authorized Dealer or call Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer hotline 24 hours a day Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative
18. Using 5 122 To program a Do Not Disturb button 1 OF P amp I Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Do Not Disturb on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Do Not Disturb is on Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 Description This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that are signaled when a doorphone button is pressed When a person uses the doorphone it signals all alert extensions at the same time If the alert extension is a system phone the call signals with a unique ding dong sound to distinguish it from other calls Additionally if you have two doorphones they signal with different tones so you can distinguish between them Related Features Considerations You must use Doorphone Extensions 604 and 605 to identify the extensions to which doorphones are connected If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled If a Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct controls a door lock
19. 3 The first coverage call to ring at your extension is identified in the display If more than one coverage call rings at your extension you can press the Caller ID Inspect button Then press the line pool or button next to the flashing green light to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent Standard Phone If your standard phone has a button labeled Recall or Flash use this button whenever you are instructed to press the switchhook To answer a call When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 2 Press the switchhook The call you are on is placed on hold and you are connected to the new call To return to the first call press the switchhook again 3 You can continue to press the switchhook to move back and forth between the two calls You cannot transfer either party conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active Auto Dialing Auto Dialing Description Auto Dial buttons can be programmed only on system phones This Telephone Programming procedure lets system phone users dial outside numbers extension numbers feature codes or account codes with a single touch by pressing a programmed button If an extension number is stored on an Auto Dial button the user can dial signa
20. Adding Lines and Extensions 2 4 o o Allowed List Assignments 408 5 9 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 5 11 ss Amplified Handset 4 3_ 0 Answering a Call at your extension 5 14 identifying a call type by ringing pattern ringing at another extension 5 57 5 153 __ lt Answering Machines 4 4 4 8 ASA Attendants Automated Authorization Codes se 307 Hands Free Answer on Inter Auto Answer Intercom see Auto DialNumbers 5 18 __ o Autodialer Intercom description Autodialers Intercom 5 17 _ _ ooo description 1 16 2 30 0 o problems 6 7 Automated Attendants see Auto Attendant Automatic Daylight Standard Times5 20 lt Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 21 Automatic Line Selection 5 23__ o o O lt Automatic System Answer button 111 description delay 110 lines 204 mode 121 record playback 5 34 5 34 Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial PC Cand i 8 Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 37 Auxiliary Equipment example setups overview 1 17 programming forJ2 17 _ o O requirements 1 17 ___ o with Night Service 4 26 __ B Background Music description 5 39 Backlit Display MLS 18D only 5 118 BackupJ6 3 ee C Ci CSCSCSCid Backup Problems automatic 6 17 6 19 __ S manual 6 20 6 21 __ S O Backup Programming autom
21. DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button Vv CALL COVERAGE RINGS p 5 50 DIAL 116 20 only DIAL 1 9 2y AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER MODE DIAL 121 DIAL 1 Holdv Disconnect 3 Ring CALLER ID TYPE DIAL 122 DIAL 1 USA Y 2 Singapore p _ 5 83 TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Data or Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESS f Remove GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION DIAL 206 p _ 5 143 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 VMS Line Cover only for Hunt Group 7 PRESS Next item to program another line TrTTITTITTLTT Le POOL LINE ASSIGNMENT 20 DIAL 207 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 No Pool 2 Main Pool 880 3 Pool 881 4 Pool 882 5 Pool 883 PRESS Next item to program another line 1 BEEBE RRR ee v LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION DIAL 208 e5177 DIAL a system line number a system extension number No lines owned by an extension PRESS Next item to program another line PRESS Remove to unassign ownership UNIQUE LINE RINGING DIAL 209 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1v 2 8 BACKUP PROGRAMMING AUTOMATIC DIAL 123 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active 3 Backup Alarm Cleared BACKUP PROGRAMMING MANUAL DIAL 124 PRESS Enter to begin the backup RESTORE PROGRAMMIN DIAL 125 e 5232 5 232 DI
22. Line A CONTROL Figure 4 8 Single Fax Machine To Use The fax machine automatically answers all calls that come in on the fax line If a call comes in on another line you can transfer the call to the fax extension see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine jon page 4 17 If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Using the Fax Management Feature jon page 4 16 When you send a fax the system automatically selects the fax line 4 19 Using Auxiliary Equipment Fax Line Saver 4 20 To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select line A only Set Automatic Line Selection to select line A last on all other extensions or remove line A from all other extensions if they should not use it to make outgoing calls Set Line Ringing for line A on extension X to Immediate Ring On all other extensions set line A to Delayed Ring or No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pick
23. Pooled v all extensions except 10 2 Key v extension 10 only Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 169 Feature Reference 5 170 To change the Line Access Mode setting for a specific extension 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O O Enter the desired extension number For example to program extension 18 press 8 To change the Line Access Mode press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all extensions that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Access Restriction 302 Line Access Restriction 302 Description This System Programming procedure restricts an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on a specific line For example you may want a secretary to answer calls on a manager s line but not to make any outgoing calls on the line in this case you can assign the manager s line to the secretary s extension and restrict it to In Only Related Features This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension with a line set to In Only or No Access cannot select the line to
24. RECORD A CALL PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 2 4 p 5 228 3 0 SAVE NUMBER REDIAL p 5 237 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature o 41 Factory setting 2 Button with lights required Button with lights recommended 20 PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later 30 PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS system Program PRESS system Program SYSTEM DATE DIAL 101 DIAL the date in MMDDYY form Jip 5 259I SYSTEM DAY DIAL 102 DIAL 1 Sunday Y 5 Thursday 2 Monday 6 Friday 3 Tuesday 7 Saturday 4 Wednesday p 5 260 2 0 or earlier SYSTEM TIME DIAL 103 DIAL the time in HHMM 24 hour military format p 5 268 NUMBER OF LINES DIAL 104 DIAL two digits 01 24 for the number of outside lines to be assigned to every extension 3 per ACS processor module amp 308EC module 2 per 208 or 200 module 4 per 400 module WARNING Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup In Key mode the Number of Lines procedure will change Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 In Hybrid mode
25. Using System Programming 2 20 System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole or for individual lines pools or extensions You can also use System Programming to set up dialing restrictions define groups or set up auxiliary equipment Refer to the filled out System Planner when you are changing system settings and be sure that any changes in programming are recorded there Using System Programming Programming Overlays System Programming requires a Programming Overlay placed over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Overlays are provided with the system documentation Replacements can be ordered from the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center See Reference Materials under Product Ordering Information on page B 4 Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 illustrates the Programming Overlays for the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D phones During System Programming the normal functions of several buttons on the display phone at extension 10 or 11 change For example the left button becomes and the right button becomes Central Tel Program The Programming Overlay identifies these buttons You use the following special buttons while programming m and cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures You can use these buttons to select a procedure If a procedure instructs you to press Next Procedure Prev Procedure pressing these buttons one after the other enables you to
26. Vili About This Guide Purpose This guide is intended for the System Manager It explains what Releases 1 0 1 1 2 0 and 3 0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System ACS can do provides instructions for programming and using the system and tells how to get the most out of the system s many features and capabilities The descriptions apply to all releases unless specifically identified as features available with Release 1 1 Release 2 0 and Release 3 0 or with Release 3 0 only Terminology Throughout this guide the PARTNER Advanced Communications System is referred to simply as the system and Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system are called system phones You can also use industry standard telephones with the system which are referred to as standard phones in this guide Finally the PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System which you may have connected to the system is referred to as the voice messaging system How to Use This Guide For information about the following topics refer to the appropriate chapter a Getting Acquainted Chapter 1 provides an overview of system features and hardware components Programming the System You can change your system s settings easily to accommodate new or expanding needs Chapter 2 provides general programming information while Chapter 5 provides detailed instructions for programming specific system feat
27. You should not assign hotline phones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules which are reserved as power failure extensions The hotline phone can receive transferred calls but the user at that extension should not pick up the handset until the phone rings Valid Entries A hotline extension any extension except extension 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules An alert system extension any extension or 70 for the loudspeaker paging system No hotline or alert extension assigned v 5 159 Feature Reference Example A supermarket installs a hotline phone at its meat counter When a customer uses the hotline phone the butcher s phone rings Alternatively if the loudspeaker paging system is programmed as the alert extension a sales clerk could request a price check over the loudspeaker simply by lifting the handset of the hotline phone Programming Using 5 160 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify a hotline extension and its alert extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Extension prompt enter the hotline extension number see Valid Entries jon the previous page For example to program extension 33 as the hotline press 3 3
28. consider assigning the Doorphone Alert Extensions to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Only extensions assigned to that Contact Closure Group can activate the door lock You cannot bridge two doorphones together Valid Entries 1 Not an Alert Extension v 2 Doorphone 1 Alert Extension 3 Doorphone 2 Alert Extension 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 Alert Extension Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify doorphone alert extensions 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 6 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the first alert system extension number For example to identify extension 10 press To change the alert status press until the appropriate value displays To identify another alert extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 123 Feature Reference Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Description Each of these System Programming procedures identifies an extension to which a doorphone is connected A doorphone is usually placed near an entrance to screen visitors You can connect up to two doorphones to the system use Doorphone 1 Extension 604 to identify the extension to which t
29. 319 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display phones It is not available for the MLS MLC MDW or Tip Ring phones This programming procedure allows the system administrator to program a maximum of one extension to log a answered Caller ID calls and a unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines The system administrator must use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the extension that will log all calls then use the Caller ID Log All Calls 319 feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines Once the features are activated for an extension when the user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all caller ID calls that are answered or answered by any extension on the associated lines are logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered The Caller ID Log All Calls feature is useful when a centralized user needs information for all calls received in the system For example a supervisor could use the log for quality assurance by contacting callers and inquiring about the customer s satisfaction with the results of the call Related Features You must use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the
30. 410 Star Code Dial Delay 123 Backup Programming Automatic 501 Pickup Group Extensions 124 Backup Programming Manual 502 Calling Group Extensions 125 Restore Programming 503 Night Service Button 126 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 504 Night Service Group Extensions 201 Dial Mode 505 Hunt Group Extensions 203 Hold Disconnect Time 505 Group 8 Fax CNG Detection 204 Automatic System Answer Lines 506 VMS Hunt Delay 205 Direct Extension Dial Lines 507 VMS Hunt Schedule 206 Group Call Distribution 601 Fax Machine Extensions 207 Pool Line Assignment 602 Music on Hold 208 Line Coverage Extension 603 Hotline 209 Unique Line Ringing 604 Doorphone Extension 1 301 Line Assignment 605 Doorphone Extension 2 302 Line Access Restriction 606 Doorphone Alert Extensions 303 Display Language 607 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 608 SMDR Record Type 305 Abbreviated Ringing 609 SMDR Top of Page 306 Transfer Return Extension 610 SMDR Output Format 307 Forced Account Code Entry 611 SMDR Talk Time 308 Distinctive Ring 612 Contact Closure Group 309 Intercom Dial Tone 613 Contact Closure Operation Type 310 Automatic VMS Cover 614 Music on Hold Volume 311 External Hotline 728 System Reset Programming Saved 312 Voice Interrupt on Busy 730 Remote Administration Password 313 Line Access Mode Panes 5 2 PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or earlier PARTNER ACS Releas
31. Atthe Data prompt enter the alert extension number see Valid Entries on the previous page For example to program extension 32 as the alert extension press A display similar to the following appears Internal Hotline Ext 33 Data 32 4 At this point To change the hotline and alert extension numbers you just entered repeat Steps 2 and 3 To delete the existing hotline and alert extension numbers press Remova a To identify another hotline and alert extension pair press or until the new hotline extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To use the hotline phone 1 Lift the handset of the hotline phone The designated alert extension rings 2 When the call is answered speak into the handset Hunt Group Extensions 505 Hunt Group Extensions 505 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign any number of extensions to a Hunt Group The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for transferring and detecting fax calls Related Features for Hunt Groups 1 6 a For instructions on ringing or paging extensions in a Hunt Group or transferring calls to a Hunt Group see Group Hunting a f aringing call to the Hunt Group is not answered within three rings the call moves t
32. For example use this feature after dialing a bank by phone service that requires you to dial touch tone digits You can program a Touch Tone Enable button on a system phone to turn on Touch Tone Enable with one touch This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Touch Tone Enable button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Or sew ae ale Using From a system phone press the programmed button or press 0 8 when you need to enter touch tone digits Touch Tone Enable stays in effect until you hang up 5 270 Transfer Return Extension 306 Transfer Return Extension 306 Description By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered This System Programming procedure can be used to identify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call Related Features You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to define the number of times all system extensions should ring with transferred calls before they return to their transfe
33. Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to assign another list password To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps Dialing Restrictions and Permissions TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS Next Procedure or f Prev Procedure NOTE Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown below in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling EMERGENCY PHONE LISTS DIAL 406 DIAL a fist entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next item to program another list entry ALLOWED PHONE NUMBER DIAL 407 DIAL a fist number 1 6 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Item to program another list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps System Speed Dial Number p 5 265 To program a number To remove a number TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE SETTINGS PRESS Next Data or f Prev Data TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTING PRESS Remove ALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS p 5 10 DIAL 408 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number 1 6 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to assig
34. System Program System Program H G O at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 18 450 msec 2 Enter a different Recall Timer setting by pressing Next Data or Prev Data For example to increase the Recall Timer setting to 750 msec press until a display similar to the following appears Recall Timer Duration 30 750 msec Alternatively you can enter the setting number directly For example to set the Recall timer to 750 msec press G Recall Timer Duration 107 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 If you are using Recall to access PBX or Centrex features test the new Recall Timer setting m lf acall is disconnected shorten the time a lf the Recall signal has no effect lengthen the time 5 227 Feature Reference Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature applies only to systems that have PMVS Release 5 0 or later equipped with four ports and an MLS or PARTNER system phone This feature is not available on Tip Ring phones This feature allows the user to record an active conversation in the user s PMVS mailbox A WARNING If silence is detected on the line for 15 seconds call recording will terminate Before you can set up the Record a Call feature for an extension you must Install PMVS Go into PMVS programming and program Record a Call for that extension To instal
35. and Auto Dial numbers as follows Function Button Display Description Pause P Inserts a 1 5 second pause in the dialing sequence to wait for a response such as a dial tone or computer voice message Recall Sends a timed switchhook flash needed to alert the system on the other end such as a PBX or Centrex system and to use some local telephone company custom calling features such as Call Waiting Use Recall only as the first entry in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number Stop Stops the dialing sequence until the Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number is used again for example so the user can enter additional digits such as a credit card number or password To continue press the Auto Dial button or and the two or three digit Speed Dial code Stop cannot be programmed from an MLC 6 or a TransTalk 9000 series phone since it has no Wic HFA button Touch Tone Enable Sends touch tones over a rotary line to electronic equipment such as answering machines and bank computers Considerations Special characters cannot be used when dialing a number manually Examples Pause To call an answering machine at 555 0529 wait 4 5 seconds then dial to retrieve messages enter Gold Hold 5 250 Special Dialing Functions Recall Centrex Feature Button The following entry shows how to program an Auto Dial button with a Centrex fea
36. any incoming call rings only once The green light next to the line or pool button flashes until the call is answered or the caller hangs up or for a transferred call until it returns to the transfer return extension This feature prevents incoming calls from distracting users when they are busy on another call To allow calls to ring repeatedly set Abbreviated Ringing to Not Active Considerations a Abbreviated Ringing is typically set to Not Active for receptionists and others who handle many calls quickly so they have an audible reminder of incoming calls a Abbreviated Ringing applies to outside transferred and intercom calls m The volume of an abbreviated ring is lower than a normal ring Calls to a busy extension ring at a lower volume than normal even if Abbreviated Ring is set to Not Active Valid Entries 1 Active incoming calls ring once v 2 Not Active incoming calls ring repeatedly Programming 5 6 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Abbreviated Ringing setting for an extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H OQ 0 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press 3 To set Abbreviated Ringing press until the appropriate value displays 4 To set Abbreviated Ringing fo
37. installation of two RAUs one at your site and one at the location from which the programming is to be done Users of Partner ACS Release 3 0 can also perform Remote Programming using Partner ACS Remote Administration software which is available separately For more information about remote programming see the PARTNER Communications System Remote Administration Unit Installation and Use guide Upgrading the PARTNER ACS If you are upgrading to a later release of PARTNER ACS using a PC card please refer to the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Av WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade Telephone Programming Options System telephones are ready to use when they are installed but they can be customized to meet the needs of your business and individual users This customization is accomplished through Telephone Programming 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 2 25 Programming Automatic Line Selection When a user lifts the telephone s handset or presses Sekr the system chooses an idle line or pool Automatic Line Selection
38. or 14 ft Modular telephone extension cord 8 connector Extends the D4BU mounting cords Specify length 14 25 50 75 or 100ft 1 pages To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s yellow O T Speed Dial Form Speed Dial Form This appendix contains a Speed Dial Form to be photocopied and handed out to system users It provides space for System and Personal Speed Dial numbers For instructions on programming and using System and Personal Speed Dial numbers see Chapter 5 We suggest that you fill in a photocopy of the form leaving the blank original in the book in case you need to distribute revisions in the future To Dial m on a system phone press Code a on a standard phone press Code while receiving intercom dial tone C 1 Speed Dial Form Table C 1 PARTNER System Speed Dial Numbers for Advanced Communications System Code Name Company Telephone Number Code Name Company Telephone Number 600 628 601 629 602 630 603 631 604 632 605 633 606 634 607 635 608 636 609 637 610 638 611 639 612 640 613 641 614 642 615 643 616 644 617 645 618 646 619 647 620 648 621 649 622 650 623 651 624 652 625 653 626 654 627 655 C 2 Speed Dial Form
39. or manual signaling Note that each user can have only one Auto Dial button either on the system phone or on the autodialer for another extension in the system The Auto Dial buttons allow the user to dial signal or transfer calls to system extensions with one touch For more information about Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing on page 5 17 Standard Telephones You can also use industry standard single line rotary or touch tone telephones including feature phones with built in feature buttons and lights with the system This guide refers to such telephones as standard phones Lucent Technologies certified standard phones are recommended The following Lucent Technologies phones can make use of the system s message waiting capability a 2500 YMGL Single Line Analog Telephone Set 8101 Analog Telephone 8101M Analog Telephone This model is recommended 8102 Analog Telephone a 8110 Analog Telephone 7102 Plus Analog Voice Terminal Check with your local Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out whether other standard phones with message waiting lights will work gt NOTE For message waiting capability you must connect standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights to a PARTNER ACS processor module 308EC module or to Release 3 0 R3 0 or later 206 modules This message waiting capability does not work with standard phones with neon type message waiting light
40. press NDAD A Marked System Speed Dial Number can also begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the phone number For example press HWWOMOOODOOM Considerations a The Star Code Dial Delay is not inserted in manually dialed numbers m f your Central Office provides the second dial tone immediately you do not need the delay provided by Star Code Dial Delay In this case choose the 0 setting to enable restriction checking but avoid the delay Valid Entries 0 0 Seconds Delay v 4 4 Seconds Delay 1 1 Second Delay 5 5 Seconds Delay 2 2 Seconds Delay 6 Not Active 3 3 Seconds Delay 5 253 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Star Code Dial Delay setting 1 Press feature System Program System Program H 4 O at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed 2 Press the number on the dialpad for the setting you want see Valid Entries above or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting is displayed 3 To return to the default setting press Remove 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 254 Station Lock F21 Station Lock F21 Description This feature is available only on system and standard touch tone phones This fea
41. s Call Waiting feature The Call Waiting tone two beeps is not repeated a Use Call Waiting only for standard phone extensions Do not assign Call Waiting to extensions that have fax machines credit card scanners modems or auto attendants because the call waiting tone will interrupt the data connection You cannot transfer either party connected using Call Waiting conference in additional parties or use feature codes while both calls are active a Transfer return group call distribution hunt group and wake up calls are not considered incoming calls for this feature Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 61 Feature Reference 5 62 To change the Call Waiting setting for an extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 8 O at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to receive Call Waiting For example to program extension 11 press To assign or unassign Call Waiting press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Wext item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Caller ID Description Caller ID is available on
42. the error message should be cleared and you can remove the button assignment using 111 or 112 Calls on Automatic System Answer Lines Are Disconnected Possible Cause Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Disconnect What to do Change Automatic System Answer Mode 121 from Disconnect to either Hold or Ring a If calls on Automatic System Answer lines no longer disconnect the problem is solved a If calls on Automatic System Answer lines still get disconnected or the Automatic System Answer Mode already was set to Hold or Ring call the hotline e Call on Hold Hangs Up but Line Does Not Disconnect Possible Cause 1 Hold Disconnect Time setting is too long What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a shorter interval a f abandoned calls on hold are disconnected the problem is solved m f abandoned calls on hold still do not disconnect or if the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the shortest interval go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Local phone company does not send hold release signal What to do Call your local phone company and find out whether they send a hold release signal If the local phone company does not send a hold release signal or if they do but the problem still occurs call the hotline see pag 6 25 Troubleshooting All Calls Disconnected Possible Cause 1 You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do This is normal behavior after running R
43. 0 or Later Description This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure identifies individual extensions that are to operate as key extensions even though the system is configured for Hybrid mode If an extension s Line Access Mode is changed to Key individual lines can be assigned to specific buttons on that extension s phone regardless of whether they are part of a pool Related Features Considerations Valid Entries When an extension is changed from Pooled to Key any previously assigned pool buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing When an extension is changed from Key to Pooled any previously assigned line buttons are removed from the extension and Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction Additionally the extension is programmed with factory settings for Pool Line Assignment 314 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing Extension 10 operates as a key extension regardless of how the system is configured The Line Access Mode for extension 10 cannot be changed Extensions that are programmed as key extensions cannot access pools either by pressing pool buttons or by dialing pool access codes 1
44. 123 It remains either Active or Not Active Problems with System Phones System Phone Does Not Ring 6 4 Possible Cause 1 Ringer volume is set too low What to do Press the volume control button while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle m lf the phone rings increasingly louder the problem is solved m lf the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding feature is turned on What to do Check to see if Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off f Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension a f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions a f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Problems with System Phones Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know rings properly a Ifthe replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Call the ho
45. 28 digits exactly as you would dial it For example to program 555 2398 press Extension Number Press the left button and enter the two digit extension number Press before the extension number to program the Auto Dial button to voice signal an extension For example to program extension 20 for voice signaling press Intercom The display reads Intercom 20 Feature Code Enter the appropriate code For example to program a button to turn on the message light at extension 20 press og When you press the programmed button the Message Light at extension 20 turns on To program an Auto Dial button 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed 3 Press a programmable button 4 Enter an outside phone number feature code account code or PBX Centrex feature access code or press left and enter an extension number Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to program additional Auto Dial buttons or exit programming mode Auto Dialing Using From a system phone to dial an outside number or extension number you can lift the handset or press Sekr but you do not have to do so 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and dial the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and Wic HFA go on and you are active
46. 5 102 Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Release 2 0 or Later Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O 0O 2 To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 103 Feature Reference Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Release 2 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls are to be answered for Direct Extension Dial Related Features Considerations Valid Entries You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 You must use Direct Extension Dial Record Playback to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number after the system answers an outside call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports
47. 5 220 Pool Line Assignment 207 Release 2 0 or Later Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the assignment of lines to pools 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 2 0 2 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press 8 A display similar to the following appears Lines to Pools L08 2 Pool 880 3 Enter the desired value 1 5 see Valid Entries on the previous page 4 To program another line press Next item or Prev tem until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 221 Feature Reference Privacy F07 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn Privacy on and off preventing or allowing other users to join calls at the user s extension as needed Related Procedures Considerations 5 222 If Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned for an extension that extension normally is private However if a user sometimes needs to have co workers join conversations the user can program a Privacy button to turn Privacy on and off as needed Once a Privacy button is programmed the user must use the button to turn Privacy on and of
48. 8 For example to select the first list press 3 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the first entry press 4 At the Data prompt enter the first telephone number 5 To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 6 At this point To change the phone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove a To add other phone numbers to this list press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To create another list press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and go to Step 2 7 Select another procedure using Next Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode 5 13 Feature Reference Answering Calls Description This section describes how users can answer calls ringing at their own extensions Additional features enable users to pick up calls at other extensions see Related Features below Related Features Considerations 5 14 A user can join a call in progress at another extension as long as Privacy is not on for that extension see Joining Calls A user can answer a call ringing at another specific extension or at any extension in a group For more information see Call Pickup and Group A user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to answer calls on lines not assigned to the user
49. 80 through 99 The Personal Speed Dial numbers programmed for a particular extension are for use only at that extension Related Features Considerations 5 210 Personal speed dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing three buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause ina number see Special Dialing Functions You can use System Speed Dial Numbers to create a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers available to all system users You can store account codes as Personal Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature External Hotline 311 uses Personal Speed Dial code 80 for the external hotline telephone number A Personal Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 If the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system Personal Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed onto Auto Dial buttons You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 A combined total of 800 outside Au
50. 85 5 145 IN 3 Index Group Hunting 5 149 5 161 5 284 Group Paging 5 145 Group Pickup 5 153 Groups 5 145 calling hunt night service overview 2 16 pickup 5 153 5 213 sd setting up Hold Reminder Tone 5 128 5 155 Hold Exclusive 5 128 5 128 S Holding a Call 5 128 5 154 Hotel Motel Features description 2 20 outgoing call restriction button 114 wake up service button 115 Hotline 603 5 159 __ S Hotline External 5 132 S Hotline Inside Front Cover 6 1 Hunt Group VMS 5 284 5 286 Hunt Group Extensions 505 5 161 Hunt Groups description 216 programming using Hunt Groups see alsq Group Call Distribution Hybrid Mode 1 140 E I Idle Line Preference se Immediate Ring 5 180 __ _ Industry Standard Devices sed Standard Devices In Range Out of Building IROB Protectors 4 3 Inside Call making an 5 186 Intercom Auto Dial Button IN 4 Intercom Autodialer 1 16 2 30 5 17 Intercom Call making an Intercom Dial Tone 309 5 164 O Intercom Statusj2 14 0 Internal Hotline see Hotline 603 Internet Customer Self Service Center 6 1 lt lt IROB see lt default font In Range Out of Building Protec tors gt PC J Jacks typespermodule 2 200 Cd Joining a Call 5 165 i K Key Extensions 5 169 KeyMode 1 11 S O D L Labeling line and extension jacks Li
51. Auto Dial button either on the system phone oron the Autodialer for another extension in the system That button can be programmed for intercom ringing intercom voice signaling or manual signaling When programming emergency numbers for Auto Dialing and or making test calls to those numbers you should 1 Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 Perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Feature Reference Examples Auto Dial buttons do not override dialing restrictions for an extension PARTNER 6 phones have only four buttons available for lines pools and or Auto Dial numbers A combined total of 800 outside Auto Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed For PBX or Centrex systems that require a dial out code to make calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code followed by one or more pauses if available on an Auto Dial button for a number outside the PBX or Centrex system See Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services jon page 2 11 for more information The examples below show some possible entries for an Auto Dial number in Step 4 of Programming Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 18 Outside Phone Number Enter the phone number up to
52. Automatic Daylight Standard Time 1 Press eature O System Program System Program H C at extension 10 or 11 2 To activate or deactivate Automatic Daylight Standard Time for the system press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 20 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Description This System Programming procedure lets you prevent a user from joining an active call at an extension When Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned for an extension other users cannot join active calls at that extension This feature is typically used for standard phones and extensions connected to fax machines modems and credit card scanners which make and receive data calls that should not be interrupted This feature can provide the Privacy function for standard phones Related Features Considerations Users cannot join calls in progress on pool buttons regardless of the setting for this procedure or the state of the Privacy button See to add a party toa call in progress on a pool button To manually change an extension s Privacy state system phone users can program the Privacy feature on a button with lights Users can then press the Privacy button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off when they want someone to join a call at their extension If Automatic Extension Pri
53. Dialing Feature When Caller ID information is logged for your extension and you have programmed a Call Log button the word Calls is displayed as shown in Figure 5 1 e oO 2 26 Wed Calls O on w w 3 Figure 5 1 System Phone Display Showing Logged Calls 5 74 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Release 2 0 or Later To view the log 1 Press your preprogrammed Call Log button The green light flutters and the Call Log is activated One of several messages is displayed 2 Press the More button repeatedly until you see the Telephone Number Display shown in Figure 5 2 90 8 3J 5 5 1 4 Next Prev Di 1 More Figure 5 2 Caller ID Telephone Number Display At the Telephone Number Display shown in Figure 2 the newest call in the log is shown The log shows the calls in last in first out order An Out of Area message displays if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A Privacy message displays if the caller blocked transmission of Caller ID information A No Number message displays if no information was received You have several options at the Telephone Number Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed a Press the Prev button to view the Telephone Number Display of the previous log record a Press the Dial button to dial the teleph
54. EE EREE es mmm Ci Button with lights required 20 PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later 3 0 PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later System Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS f Feature fo j o TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature fo fol PRESS System Program PRESS system Program TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example 1 fal 1 for System Date OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION DIAL 401 p 5 204 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 No Restriction 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local Only PRESS Next Item to program another extension DISALLOWED PHONE NUMBER LISTS DIAL 404 DIAL a list number 1 8 DIAL a list entry 01 10 To add entry DIAL the telephone number up to 12 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Item to program another list entry To program another list PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new list number and repeat above steps TOLL CALL PREFIX DIAL 402 DIAL 1 0 1 plus Area Code and Number 2 Area Code and Number Only SYSTEM PASSWORD DIAL 403 DIAL four dig its to set the DISALLOWED LIST ASSIGNMENTS DIAL 405 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a list number 1 8 DIAL 1 Assigned 2
55. Extension Assignment programming the main pool is removed from the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of the system phone at that extension The buttons are then available for programming lines auxiliary pools or system features If the main pool is ever reassigned to that extension previous programming will be erased Auxiliary pool buttons will be located next to the main pool buttons unless you select Setting 3 to choose a button location when programming You can assign up to four pools to a standard phone but a single line phone can make only one call at a time To make a call the user lifts the handset and dials 9 the system selects the first available pool based on the Automatic Line Selection programmed for that extension Alternatively the user can dial a pool access code to make a call using a specific pool 1 Assigned v Main pool 2 Not Assigned v Auxiliary pool 3 Select Button auxiliary pools only then press a button to assign the auxiliary pool to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign pools to a pooled extension 1 2 5 218 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program O O Enter the system extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 15 press 5 There is a steady red light next to each button that has a l
56. For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed If the PC Card has not been installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Direct Extension Dial Record Playback feature to record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message All lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial should be assigned to extension 10 or its transfer return extension If a caller enters an invalid extension number or does not enter one at all the call is transferred to the receptionist at extension 10 or to the designated transfer return extension for extension 10 To intercept a call while the message is playing the red light next to the line button is on steady press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 5 104 Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Release 2 0 or Later Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered for Direct Extension Dial 1 Press eature 0 System Program System Program
57. Friday 7 Saturday Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the System Day 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 2 Change the day by entering a new setting number as listed in Valid Entries above For example to set the day to Tuesday press until the display reads System Day 3 Tuesday 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 260 System Password 403 System Password 403 Description This feature is available only on PARTNER and MLS model phones This System Programming procedure defines a four digit password that users can enter from PARTNER and MLS model phones to override dialing restrictions if the extension has access to an outside line Related Features Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using The password overrides all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Once a password is programmed you must enter it to turn Night Service on and off Additionally if Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group must enter the password to make any outgoing calls except calls to numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 4
58. Group If you have a PARTNER MAIL system and multiple fax machines you can assign the fax machines to a Hunt Group Then you can program the PARTNER MAIL system so that when an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL s Automated Attendant Service the PARTNER MAIL system recognizes that it is a fax call and automatically transfers it to the first available fax machine in the group Considerations for Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group is used exclusively for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware Do not assign any other extensions to this group A voice messaging system requires special hardware and set up procedures refer to Voice Messaging Systems jon page 4 28 and to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system for more information Considerations for Hunt Group 8 This Hunt Group is used exclusively for fax machines Do not assign any other extensions to this group When lines appear on a fax extension you will want to make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this a Set the fax machine for delayed pickup a Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to either delayed ring or no ring Recommended Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v Progr
59. Group Calling button on a system phone to ring or page a specified Calling Group or to transfer a call to a Calling Group with one touch When acallis transferred to a Calling Group and the call is not answered it goes back to the specified Transfer Return Extension 306 The call must be ringing not a voice page 5 145 Feature Reference Examples Here are some useful applications for this feature Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using 5 146 Group page employees for general announcements this feature is an inexpensive alternative to a paging system Remember to install system phones with built in spoeakers all models except the MLC 6 and TransTalk 9000 series where you want employees to hear announcements Put the extensions of people with similar responsibilities in a Calling Group so when a caller needs to talk with anyone in the group the receptionist can transfer the call to the group instead of making separate intercom calls For example a car dealership puts all extensions for the sales staff into Calling Group 1 To let a prospective customer talk to any salesperson the receptionist simply transfers the call to the group by dialing All phones in the group ring and the customer is connected to the first salesperson to answer Alternatively the receptionist can page the group throug
60. Ifa remote administration session is active during a scheduled Automatic Backup 123 the backup will cancel Considerations m The password can be changed only locally at Extension 10 or 11 It can not be changed at the PC n order to use remote administration you must enter a password m Only one administration tool can be active at a time If remote administration is active local administration is blocked If local administration is active and you start a remote session the local session will drop Valid Entries No password displays 8 dashes one each for the number of possible characters 4 Active password up to 8 alphanumeric characters Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a password 1 At extension 10 or 11 press Feature O System Program System Program O O 2 The Remote Password prompt displays REMOTE PASSWORD DATA Dashes display if there is no current password If there is a password it displays in place of the dashes 5 230 Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later 3 Enter or change the password by entering the two digit character codes found in Extension Name Display Table 5 1 4 To save the password press nier The bottom line of the display shows the password as it has been entered 5 Se
61. Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X For extension X set Automatic Line Selection to select pools and outside lines first line A selected first For all other extensions set Automatic Line Selection so that line A is the last line in the select sequence That way the modem line is used for outgoing voice calls only when all other lines are busy Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Immediate Ring Set all other lines or pools assigned to extension X to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 4 25 Using Auxiliary Equipment Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 4 26 You can set up modems fax machines and answering machines to receive calls automatically after hours When Night Service is on calls ring immediately at the appropriate extensions so that no human intervention is required to t
62. Next Procedure or Prev Procedure to do so since entering and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Up to 12 digits including 0 9 and any single digit 5 114 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for a Disallowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to prevent calls to the local number 555 5678 pressOOOOOOQOMA All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries prevent calls to the 900 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1900 and 0900 Toll Call Prefix not required 900 and 0900 All Telephone Numbers in One Exchange The following entries prevent calls to the 976 exchange Toll Call Prefix required 976 Prevents local calls 1 976 Prevents direct dial calls to all area codes 0 976 Prevents operator assisted calls to all area codes 1976 Prevents direct dial toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code 0976 Prevents operator assisted toll calls in the same area code needed only when 0 or 1 is required for toll calls in the same area code Toll Call Prefix not required 976 Prevents local calls 10 976 Prevents calls to area codes with 0 as the second digit such as 203 111976 P
63. Night Service on and off If you program a System Password 403 when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers without entering the System Password If you have a voice messaging system lines that are assigned to the user s phones in the Night Service Group are covered by the voice messaging system depending on the status of VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Do not include extensions connected to certain auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems internal or external hotline phones or doorphones in the Night Service Group A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it comes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s phone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v 5 200 Night Service Group Extensions 504 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 13 press B 3 To assign or unassign the extension press u
64. Press to decrease or to increase the volume as follows To adjust ringer volume press while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle To adjust speaker volume press while listening to a call through the speaker To adjust handset volume press while listening through the handset To adjust background music volume press while listening to music through the phone s speaker Learning About Telephones Lights Each line or pool button has a green light and a red light The meaning of these lights varies depending on whether the button is used to access an outside line or pool is programmed with a system feature or is programmed for Auto Dialing an extension number Intercom Auto Dial button Auto Dial buttons for fax extensions show additional information these described in Chapter 4 When a phone is in programming mode the lights show information about programmed settings see buttons are Chapter 2 for details Table 3 1 shows the meanings of the various light patterns for each possible button assignment Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Intercom Auto Dial Button Steady On Line is in use Green means you are using the line red means someone at another extension is using the line Green means feature is on Red means the extension programmed on the button is busy making o
65. Press eature 0 O System Program System Program Q at extension 10 or 11 The current setting is displayed Press Next Data or Prev Data to change the setting or press to return the setting to the default Exit programming mode If you chose Option 1 Active The system will be backed up to the PC Card at 2 00 a m and thereafter at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month provided that a valid Backup Restore PC Card is in the PC Card slot See PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions The old AUTO mmadvy file on the PC Card is replaced by the new one The MAN mmadyy file is unaffected You can use the Restore Programming 125 feature to check the date on the AUTO mmddyy file to verify that the backup was successful If you chose Option 2 Not Active no automatic backups will be performed For information about using Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 5 43 Feature Reference Backup Programming Manual 124 Description The backup of system and telephone programming is optional but recommended especially if you are changing the processor module or upgrading the system or before and after any major programming changes This System Programming procedure manually backs up all the programming except the system date day and time to a Backup Restore PC Card gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remot
66. Press eature 2 Dial your extension number Dial the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage manually 1 Press 2 Dial your extension number twice 5 48 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later To send calls for coverage using the programmed button t Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no covering extension was programmed dial the extension number of the covering extension Call Coverage is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Coverage using the programmed button Ti Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a covering extension were programmed on the button Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no covering extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Coverage is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Standard Phone To send your calls for coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press 3 Dial your extension number 4 Di
67. Program System Program H A at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press 5 85 Feature Reference 5 86 Atthe Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 31 dial To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays At this point To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 To program another group press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and repeat Steps 2 through 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Conference Calls Conference Calls Description This section explains how to set up conference calls using the button ona system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator in a single call Users can connect both outside and inside parties in a conference call but the call cannot include more than two outside parties Related Features Considerations You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties During the conference call any inside party can exit the call at any time simply by hanging up However if an outside party hangs up during a conference call the call
68. Programming Manual 124 do not backup the System Date Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Date See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the System Date 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H Q at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter today s date in the form mmddyy month day and year including leading zeros for single digit months or days For example to enter April 26 1997 press 4 O A display similar to the following appears System Date Data 042697 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 259 Feature Reference System Day 102 Release 2 0 and Earlier Description System Day is not applicable to Release 3 0 or later In those releases the system calculates the day of the week for you using System Date 101 This System Programming procedure sets the day of the week that appears on system display phones Related Features a Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 do not backup up the System Day a Restore Programming 125 does not restore the System Day Considerations Be sure that the System Day is set correctly before using backup or restore procedures Valid Entries 1 Sunday v 2 Monday 3 Tuesday 4 Wednesday 5 Thursday 6
69. Programming A method of telephone programming that lets you program individual extensions in the system from a system display phone at extension 10 or extension 11 Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to Extension Programming CO Line SeelLine Combination Extension An extension that has two devices connected to it Combination extensions can connect two stan dard devices or a standard device and a system phone but not two system phones Contact Closure Button A phone button that is programmed to activate one of the two Contact Closures on the Contact Clo sure Adjunct to control an auxiliary device such as a door lock GL 3 Glossary Control Unit Made up of a PARTNER ACS processor module and optionally a 2 Slot or a 5 Slot molded plastic carrier to hold additional system modules The 5 Slot carrier also has a cover The control unit con nects lines coming into your building to the extensions in your system and also provides system features D DGC Group See Group Call Distribution and Direct Extension Dial Release 2 0 or later An optional feature that enables outside callers to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without waiting for the receptionist to transfer the call See Automatic System Answer See al so Automatic Doorphone A Lucent Technologies proprietary phone that can be wall mounted outside your office or in a lobby to allow visitors to alert any number of system extensions by pres
70. System Speed Dial Numbers Description This feature lets you program a list of up to 100 frequently dialed numbers for the system Anyone on the system can dial a System Speed Dial number by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the three digit code from 600 through 699 You can mark System Speed Dial numbers to override dialing restrictions Related Features Considerations System Speed Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing four buttons is different from Auto Dialing which lets users dial a number by pressing a single button For instructions on entering special characters such as Pause ina number see Special Dialing Functions Individuals can have up to 20 additional Personal Speed Dial Numbers for use on their own phones You can store account codes as System Speed Dial numbers for use with the Account Code Entry feature A System Speed Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone number For example press Ho WOMODOODOAQDM This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 To program System Speed Dial numbers that override dialing restrictions mark them by entering a star before the phone number Note that Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the SMDR call report as F nnn where nnnis the Speed Dial code
71. Talk Time 611 Release 2 0 or Later 5 247 SMDR Top of Page 609 5 249 Star Code Dial Delay 410 5 252 System Password 403 5 261 Contents System Release Status F59 5 262 a System Reset Programming Saved 728 5 263 System Speed Dial Numbers 5 265 a System Time 103 5 268 a Toll Call Prefix 402 5 269 a Transfer Return Extension 306 5 271 a VMS Cover Rings 117 Release 2 0 or Earlier 5 282 a VMS Cover Rings 321 Release 3 0 or Later 5 283 a VMS Hunt Delay 506 5 284 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 5 286 Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 5 288 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 5 290 a Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 5 292 m Wake Up Service Button 115 5 294 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Customer Self Service Center on the Internet 6 1 Problems with Combination Extensions 6 15 Problems with Standard Devices 6 16 Problems with Automatic Backup 6 17 Problems with Manual Backup 6 20 Problems with System Restore 6 22 vi Contents System Problems 6 24 m Other Problems with System 6 28 A Specifications A 1 B Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information B 1 a Repair Information B 1 a 1 B 2 Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability B 2 i B 4 Product Ordering Information C Speed Dial Form C 1 i Speed Dial Form C D Programming Mixed Telephone Types D 1 vii Contents
72. Tel Program Message oo Next Next Next If Item 1 Data 1 Remove Prev Prev Prev ar If Item 1 Data 1 Enter j m E Eg BE DAGUE KNEE LJ PARTNER 34D Program el Program Message E p a O PARTNER 18D COO Figure 2 3 Programming Overlays for PARTNER Model Phones Button Locations When programming from a PARTNER model phone at extension 10 or 11 keepin mind that the button you press at the programming extension may be in a different location on the phone to which the programming applies Figure 2 4jon page 2 24 shows the relative location of buttons on each PARTNER model phone 2 22 Using System Programming For example the button labeled E on the PARTNER 34D phone in Figure 2 4lis in the bottom row The equivalent button on the PARTNER 18D phone is in the leftmost position of the second row from the bottom If your system has a mix of PARTNER and MLS model phones refer to Appendix E for information about programming from a PARTNER model phone to an MLS model phone or from an MLS model phone to a PARTNER model phone Programming Mode 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at ext
73. a three digit code These are called System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing Restrictions and Permissions 2 12 The system has several procedures for restricting telephone use and several for overriding those restrictions You can use any combination of these procedures to design a system that meets your needs When a user makes a call the system checks the number dialed against all of the dialing that apply to the extension making the call When the number dialed passes a restriction the system goes to the next restriction if necessary If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active star codes are also checked against the restrictions Star codes typically dialed before an outgoing call provide special services from the local telephone company Central Office CO for example enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID information to the called party When a user dials a star code the system checks it against the dialing restrictions to determine whether the code is allowed If the code is allowed the system resets its checking procedure and checks the remaining digits that the user dialed to make sure the call is permitted When a number violates a restriction the call is stopped and the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal System Programming Options IMPORTANT While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones provide more protection
74. a Forced Account Code List the system does not verify the account codes dialed at extensions that are required to enter them To validate an account code the system compares the first six digits of a user entered account code to the entries on the Forced Account Code List For a match to be successful the user must dial at least the account code s associated list entry even though the user can dial up to 16 digits for an account code If the system identifies a match the user can dial an outside number If no match occurs the user is denied access to an outside line and must re enter a valid account code to dial out Each list entry can include up to six digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display Up to 6 digits including 0 9 and any single digit 5 140 Forced Account Code List 409 Examples Expanded Account Codes Users can enter more than the required digits for an account code for tracking purposes For example a Customer Service Department s account code is 123 Representatives in the department must dial at least 123 to get an outside line but can enter additional digits to track a specific customer or item number For example The following entries are valid 123 123999 The following entries are invalid 1 12 Wildcard Characters You can use wildcard characters in list entries F
75. a specified number of rings and plays a short user recorded greeting to the caller Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system does one of the following Places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available Continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available Disconnects the call Related Features Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call For callers to hear Music on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller
76. add a line to the system it becomes the last line in the selection sequence Remove all outside lines from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing a line make sure you restrict the line for that extension using Line Access Restriction 302 even if the line is not assigned to that extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line Pickup Similarly if you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool make sure you restrict the pool for that extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 even if the pool is not assigned to that extension so it cannot be accessed using the pool access code The user must have access to an outside line in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 5 173 Feature Reference 5 174 oo o Of oOfF OOH OO oO 00 00 O00 oo oO 00 00 00 O0 a o Qa o o Qo o o o a a 0 Intercom Intercom m pad EA E Qo E z o o g o o o o a Message 8 4 o Intercom 0 Intercom i Message o m m Oo a o a 0 a a Qa a Intercom
77. add the line to an existing pool IMPORTANT Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Adding New Pools Use this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to create new pools If you add outside lines to your system for use in a new pool use Dial Mode 201 if the new lines are rotary lines Pool Line Assignment 207 to assign lines to the new pool Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the new pool to specific extensions Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the new pool will start ringing at each extension that has the pool and Pool Access Restriction 315 to limit an extension s access to all the lines in the new pool Also use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to add the new pool to the extension s Automatic Line Selection sequence Adding New Extensions If you add an extension to your system you can probably use Copy S
78. assign Outgoing Call Restriction to a specific button press 8 A display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 5 207 Feature Reference Using 5 208 To change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button turns on and extension 10 appears busy to the system Press the Auto Dial button for the desired extension repeatedly until its lights show the correct setting as follows a No Restriction The green light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady a Inside Only The red light next to the Auto Dial button is on steady a Local Only The green light next to the Auto Dial button flashes Press the Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 or lift the handset and replace it back in the cradle The green light next to the Outgoing Call Restriction button goes off and extension 10 resumes normal operation Outside Conference Denial 109 Outside Conference Denial 109 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether users can include more than one outside party in a conference call Related
79. at an extension which rings another extension automatically when the handset is lifted See a so External Hotline Hunt Group A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred calls in round robin fashion Calls to the hunt group go to the first available extension in the group with the extension that answered most recently being the last one in the hunt order See al so Calling Group and VMS Hunt Group GL 5 Glossary Hybrid Mode Release 2 0 or later An operating mode in which outside lines are grouped together in pools To access outside lines users press pool buttons on their phones or enter the pool access code In this mode users do not know which lines they are using to make and receive calls See also Key Mode and System Mode I Industry standard Device A telephone or other telecommunications device that can be connected directly to the public tele phone network See a so Proprietary Device ana Standard Phone Inside Call See Intercom Call Intercom Autodialer An auxiliary device that can be connected to the system phones at extensions 10 and 11 The device has an Auto Dial button for each extension in the system which can be used to dial or transfer calls to the extension with one touch Intercom Auto Dial Button A button that is programmed to ring or page another extension whenever the button is pressed The button can be used to call the extension or to transfer a call to the extension with one to
80. attempted What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 61 You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required Troubleshooting t Slide the switch on the PC card up to the nonprotected position Figure 6 1 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore PC Card Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 6 18 Problems with Automatic Backup Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try to do a backup using the manual backup
81. calls is not displayed contact your local telephone company Intercom Autodialer Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of Intercom Autodialer What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions a If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Intercom Autodialer is not receiving auxiliary power What to do Make sure the Intercom Autodialer is plugged into an electrical outlet a If the Intercom Autodialer works properly the problem is solved a Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The cord is defective 6 7 Troubleshooting What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the Intercom Autodialer and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works lf the Intercom Autodialer works the cord is faulty Call the hotline see page 6 1 to arrange for a replacement m If the Intercom Autodialer does not work call the hotline see page 6 1 Record a Call Light is Always Red Steady and You Can t Record a Call Possible Cause 1 You don t have enough ports assigned into Hunt Group 7 What to do You must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PMVS Release 5 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four po
82. change the number of times a transferred call rings before returning to the transfer return extension 1 Press eature System Program System Program H G at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter a setting 0 9 For example to set a Transfer Return of 5 rings press until a display similar to the following appears Transfer Return 5 Rings 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 274 Transferring Calls Transferring Calls Description This section explains how to transfer calls using the button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone Transferring a call lets users pass a Call from one extension to another Users can transfer both outside calls and intercom calls to other extensions Related Features Considerations To transfer calls to an extension with a single touch you can program the extension number on an Auto Dial button see Auto Dialing To transfer calls to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button While a call is being transferred the caller hears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music on Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the destination extension If Music on Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears sile
83. cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it Specifications Capacities System Module Extension Jack e 19 outside lines via line jacks on one ACS processor module plus four 400 modules e 40 extensions via extension jacks on one ACS processor module plus four 308EC modules e 1 loudspeaker paging system via PAGE jack on ACS processor module e 1 audio source via Music on Hold jack on ACS processor module RCA phono plug required e 1 call reporting device via SMDR jack on ACS processor module 335 A F adaptor required e 1 Contact Closure Adjunct using CONTACT CLOSURE jack on ACS processor module e 2 doorphones using two extension jacks e 1 voice messaging system PARTNER MAIL VS which uses a slot in the 2 or 5 Slot carrier or PARTNER MAIL which connects to either 3 5 or 7 extension jacks ACS Process or Module e 3 outside lines e 8 extensions e 2 touch tone receivers except when used with 308EC module e 2 power failure transfer extensions 200 Module e 2 outside lines e 0 extensions e 1 touch tone receiver 206 Module e 2 outside lines 6 extensions 1 touch tone receiver 1 power failure transfer extension 308EC Module 3 outside lines e 8 extensions e 6 touch tone receivers e 2 power failure transfer extensions 400 Module e 4 outside lines e No extensions e 2 touch tone receivers e Maximum two devices per extension jack total REN on
84. determines the order in which the system looks for an idle line or pool You can set the system to look for lines or pools in any desired order For standard phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions select an inside intercom line first Extension Name on Display With Extension Name Display users can assign a name up to 20 characters long to their extension Then when those users make an intercom call group call or transfer a call their name and extension number appears on the display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Line Ringing Line Ringing defines when each outside line or pool rings at a phone For each line or pool at an extension you can specify Immediate Ring Delayed Ring phone rings after a 20 second delay or No Ring The factory setting for line buttons is Immediate ring the factory setting for pool buttons is No Ring Personal Speed Dialing Personal Speed Dial numbers are outside phone numbers that a user dials by pressing or ona standard phone plus a two digit code Unlike System Speed Dial numbers which are available to all users in the system Personal Speed Dial numbers are available only at the extension for which they are programmed Users can store up to 20 Personal Speed Dial numbers Programming Telephone Buttons 2 26
85. dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 See Restrictions and Permissions jon page 2 12 for a summary of all dialing restrictions For pooled extensions use Pool Access Restriction 315 to assign restrictions to all the lines assigned to a specific pool Pool Access Restriction overrides Line Access Restriction For individual lines on pooled extensions use Line Access Restriction To prevent an extension from using a line restrict the line even if it is not assigned to the extension so it cannot be accessed using Direct Line Pickup If an extension s access to a line is set to No Access or In Only the extension cannot place calls on that line either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup ldle Line Likewise if the extension s access to a line is set to No Access or Out Only the extension cannot receive calls on that line that are ringing at other extensions either by pressing the line button or by using Direct Line Pickup Active Line a When a user has access to an outside line for outgoing calls dialing restrictions can be customized for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 a Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines programmed for Out Only or No Access Considerations If a line is assigned to a phone but is restricted to No Access the line button lights show call
86. extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press To set Caller ID Log Answered Calls press until the appropriate value displays See Valid Entries To set Call ID Log Answered Calls for another extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 69 Feature Reference Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display phones It is not available for the MLS MLC MDW or Tip Ring phones This programming procedure allows you to associate lines with extensions for the purposes of logging unanswered Caller ID calls Multiple lines can be associated with an extension and multiple extensions can be associated with the same line Caller ID calls can be logged only if they ring on an extension that is associated with a line that has been programmed for Call Logging Related Features Considerations 5 70 If you also want answered Caller ID calls to be logged at an extension use the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 with the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 feature You can select to log answered Caller ID calls only unanswered Caller ID calls only or you can choose to log both You can also program a maximum of one extension to
87. extension numbe For voice signaling the first available extension to voice signal the extension PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom amp fz fz MESSAGE LIGHT OFF p 5 190 5 258 DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 6 PRESS a programmable button STATION UNLOCK p Do not program a button PRESS Feature 11 o GROUP PICKUP p 5 153 DIAL optional two digit extension number PRESS Feaue 21 21 PRESS a programmable button TOUCH TONE ENABLE p 5 270 PRESS left intercom 6 6 MESSAGE LIGHT ON p 5 192 PRESS a programmable button DIAL a Pickup Group number 1 4 PRESS a Programmada button PRESS Feature 0 fa PRESS Feature 01 2 LAST NUMBER REDIAL p 5 167 DIAL optional two digit extension number VMS COVER p 5 280 PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 01 5 PRIVACY PRESS Feature 1 5 PRESS a programmable button with Ta LOUDSPEAKER PAGING p 5 181 LPRESS feawe fo z PRESS a programmable button PRESS left intercom fz fo RECALL p 5 224 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature fa 3 STATION LOCK p 5 255 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 21 1 VOICE INTERRUPT p 5 290 ON BUSY TALK BACK PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature 1 a1 0 VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER _ p 5 292 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 4
88. extension to Immediate Ring and the lines at the users extensions to No Ring Receptionist Backup If you want all calls on a line or in a pool to ring directly at users extensions with the receptionist providing backup set the line or pool at the users extensions to Immediate Ring Then set the line on the receptionist s extension to Delayed Ring An incoming call that is not answered by a user within 20 seconds also rings at the receptionist s extension See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the way outside lines or pools ring at an extension 1 5 180 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Line Ringing The green lights next to the line or pool buttons show the current Line Ringing settings for all lines or pools assigned to the extension If a line or pool is not assigned to a button the green light next to that button is off The following ringing options can be shown by the green light next to the line or pool button a Immediate Ring on steady a Delayed Ring flashes slowly a No Ring flutters quickly To change Line Ringing on any line or pool press the line or pool button until the button light shows the correct setting the setting for the currently
89. from an earlier release using the PC Card upgrade all of your system programming settings will be converted to work with the new release However you may want to consider some additional programming for the features that are new in Release 2 0 or Release 3 0 2 7 Programming gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Av WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade The new programmable features in Release 2 0 are v D 10 10 10 101 101 JO JO JO gt gt gt gt gt elle lel lelle m m m end llel S lelle 3 13 13 3 3 a a p la p foe 2 o S S lS jo DM DM V V W a la a la lo m m m m o o o 3 13 13 3 3 YP gt P gt gt S 15 5 S 5 a a lo la jo 2 S S a s IRI IRIIRI BAHE o B 2 lo a 5 2 fae R S Ol 2 IN fe INI S 2 9 B lo ja o o O x re m_k all Coverage F20 XX XX all Coverage Rings 116 aller ID Call Log Line Association 318 aller ID Log Answered Calls 317 irect Extension Dial Button 113 irect Extension Dial Del
90. in a system configured for Key mode are referred to as key extensions Hybrid Mode Hybrid mode offers users flexibility in accessing outside lines from their phones As in Key mode individual lines can be assigned to system extensions Additionally multiple outside lines can be grouped together in pools The system can have up to four pools including a main pool and three auxiliary pools Each pool is identified by a pool access code 880 881 882 and 883 respectively Pools are represented on system phones by pool buttons Unlike line buttons pool buttons give users access to multiple lines from a single button Each auxiliary pool is associated with only one pool button Since the main pool typically contains most of your company s outside lines it is associated with two pool buttons This setup allows the user to place a call using one of the main pool buttons put that call on hold and make another call using the second main pool button Or the user can establish a conference call using lines in the main pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool can be assigned to an extension fora maximum of five pool buttons System phone users can press any of the available pool buttons on their phones or they can enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to make an outside call Standard phone users must dial 9 or enter the pool access code at intercom dial tone to access a pool since their phones do not have pool buttons After th
91. intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings If you turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing the call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox If VMS Cover is already on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to your voice mailbox 5 281 Feature Reference VMS Cover Rings 117 Release 2 0 or Earlier Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for VMS Cover defines the number of times a call rings before it is sent to a user s voice mailbox Related Features a VMS Cover also applies to lines that have been designated an owner with Line Coverage Extension 208 a Ifan extension has VMS Cover F15 or Automatic VMS Cover 310 active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings Valid Entries 1 9 3v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times calls ring before being sent to the voice messaging system 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O O O at extension 10 or 11
92. jack not to exceed 2 0 System phone REN is 0 0 zero Note The two devices combined on an extension jack can be a system phone with a standard device or two standard devices DO NOT connect two system phones to the same extension jack If a device lists two RENs use the higher number when adding up the RENs e No more than one system phone per jack For programming a system display phone must be connected to extension 10 or 11 Specifications Dimensions and Weights approx Processor Module 200 module 206 module 308EC module 400 module 2 Slot carrier 5 Slot carrier PARTNER 34D phone PARTNER 18D phone PARTNER 18 phone PARTNER 6 phone PARTNER CA48 Autodialer 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 11 D x 17 H x 1 5 W or 27 9 x 43 2 x 3 8 cm 2 D x 9 75 H x 5 5 W or 5 1x 24 8 x14 cm 12 D x 19 H x 11 W or 30 5 x 48 3 x 27 9 cm 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 9 3 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 23 6 cm 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 7 9 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 20 1 cm 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 7 9 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 20 1 cm 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 1 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 15 5 cm 9 8 D x 3 75 H x 6 1 W or 24 9 x 9 5 x 15 5 cm 4 5 Ibs or 2 kgs 4 5 Ibs or 2 kgs 4 5 Ibs or
93. lift the handset or press before dialing 1 If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number or if you want to call using a specific pool press the pool button or press and the three digit pool access code 2 Press eaiture 5 211 Feature Reference 5 212 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone Standard Phone You can dial Personal Speed Dial numbers on a standard phone but the numbers must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 To dial a programmed Personal Speed Dial number 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the two digit Personal Speed Dial code 80 99 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number Pickup Group Extensions 501 Pickup Group Extensions 501 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign extensions to a Pickup Group When a call rings at an extension in a Pickup Group a user at any other extension in the system can answer the ringing call by dialing the Pickup Group code The Pickup Group feature is useful when a user needs to answer calls on lines or pools not assigned to his or her phone The system supports up to four Picku
94. line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 The message will be one of the following s ackup Fatlediivite Prot m Backup Failed Check Card m Backup Failed SystemBusy m Backup Failed InsertCard See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for an explanation of these messages and suggested corrective actions and for the procedure for clearing the Backup Failure Alarm message Related Features Verify that the System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 are set correctly so that the automatic backup occurs at the correct time These settings are not backed up You can use Backup Programming Manual 124 in place of or to supplement the automatic backups if desired Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed up to a PC Card you can use the Restore Programming 125 procedure to restore the settings if they become corrupted You can also use Restore Programming 125 to verify the date on a backup file 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 5 41 Feature Reference Considerations Valid Entries Programming 5 42 To perform either automatic or manual backups purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies If the PC Card has not been installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Whenever the setting for Backup Programming Automatic is changed from Not Active to Active a backup will occur at the next occur
95. log a answered Caller ID calls and a unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lines Use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the extension that will log all calls then use the Caller ID Log All Calls 319 feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines It is not necessary to associate lines and extensions to log unanswered transferred calls Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically To log Caller ID information you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Release 2 0 or Later Valid Entries 1 Assigned line is associated with an extension or the extension is associated with a line 2 Not assigned line is not associated with an extension v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones
96. number 3 The Cover Rings prompt displays VMS Cover Rings XX 3 Rings Enter a setting 1 9 or press until the correct value appears 4 To set VMS Cover Rings for another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 283 Feature Reference VMS Hunt Delay 506 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system You can set the system for any number of rings 0 6 Assigning more rings gives the receptionist an opportunity to answer calls before they go to the Automated Attendant Service For ACS Release 3 0 VMS Hunt Delay is programmable on a per line basis In addition this procedure is programmable so that calls can be handled one way during the day and a different way when the system is in Night Service Related Features You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Considerations Users who do not subscribe to ICLID services and want immediate call handling should set this option to 0 rings a Users who do subscribe to ICLID service
97. number before the stop is dialed to activate the feature When you press the button again the rest of the stored number is dialed to deactivate the feature Number Outside a PBX or Centrex System To store a number that dials out of a PBX or Centrex system include a dial out code in the Speed Dial number This entry to dial the number 201 555 4321 includes a dial out code a 1 5 second pause and a toll call prefix of 1 for direct dialing which may not be required for your dialing area HD Q 0 00000 5 251 Feature Reference Star Code Dial Delay 410 Description 5 252 Central Offices of some phone companies support the use of star codes before the dialed phone number to obtain special services for example in some areas you can dial 67 to prevent Caller ID information from being sent to the called party Rotary phones use 11 in place of the Star Code Dial Delay 410 is designed to help prevent misdialing when star codes are used For information about the star codes that your Central Office supports contact your local phone company Restriction Resetting If Star Code Dial Delay is Not Active the system uses the normal processing of restricted numbers it checks digit by digit to see whether the number is restricted If the first digit dialed is a and is not restricted the call goes through without further checking since it can no longer match any number on the list If Star Code Di
98. of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers in the Number field on the call report The longer field is useful for businesses such as law offices and hotels that need to record many digits for outgoing calls for billing purposes Before changing to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that 24 digit output is supported Related Features You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports When you change the output format the length of the Number field is adjusted for the next call record that prints To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 If you use Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial you may want to set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system Considerations a This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 lf the output format is set to 15 digits and a prints as the last digit of a dialed number on a call report indicating that the digits dialed exceed the 15 digits the Number field can hold you may want to change the output format to 24 digits f the output format is set to 24 digits and SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active the combined length of the
99. of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign lines to the system at initial system setup 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program C at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter two digits for the number of outside lines in the system that you want to assign to all extensions or the main pool For example dialing means that all extensions are assigned lines 1 through 6 or lines 1 through 6 are assigned to the main pool 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 203 Feature Reference Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions jon page 2 12 for a summary of calling restrictions Related Features Considerations 5 204 This restriction also applies to lines that a user has access to with Direct Line Pickup ldle Line To override this feature users can dial Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers from an Allowed Phone Number List 407 and the Emergency Phone Number List 406 Also if a System Password 403 is defined MLS model system phone users can enter it to override restrictions You can program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to quickly change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting See Out
100. on the speakerphone If you want to call using a specific pool on a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code If you did not lift the handset the lights next to and go on and you are active on the speakerphone Press the Auto Dial button on which the outside number or extension number is programmed The system automatically selects a line if you did not specify one turns on the speaker if you did not lift the handset and dials the Auto Dial number The number being dialed will show on a display phone To use an Auto Dial button programmed with a feature code or account code follow the directions for the feature you want to use 5 19 Feature Reference Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes Related Features You can not use System Day 102 You can use System Time 103 and System Date 101 with this feature to correct your system clock Considerations System Day 102 is not applicable for Release 3 0 and later The day of the week is automatically calculated from the date Valid Entries 1 Active v 2 Not Active Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the status of
101. order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives One way to obtain permission is to contact ASCAP BMI and or similar performing rights organizations to obtain a license Or you can purchase a Magic on Hold system which includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually by the copyright owners or their representatives Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required Features and Capabilities Features Available with Release 2 0 or Later Automatic System Answer feature to help answer and route calls Direct Extension Dial feature to allow callers to dial an extension or help group directly without the aid of the receptionist Line Pooling to create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When users access a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Call Coverage for users who are unable to answer their calls but want their calls answered by another individual Caller ID Logging and Dialing feature for users to view the names and numbers of logged calls from system phones Users can press the Dial option to automatically dial the caller s number SMDR Talk Time to allow you to track on an SMDR call report the length of time that users talk on incoming outside calls Features Available with Release 3 0 or Later Call screening to listen to a caller
102. other calls on another line or pool while a call is on hold Related Features Considerations System phone users can use Exclusive Hold to put calls on hold that can be retrieved only from their own extension Placing a call on Exclusive Hold also prevents other users from accessing Caller ID information for the held call If you put a call on a line in a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it will no longer be available to you To ensure that no on else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold Use Call Park to put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system This type of hold typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because it allows the user to retrieve a call without having to know which line the call is on Callers on hold hear Music on Hold 602 only if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Standard phone users can put a call on hold to retrieve a second call provided Call Waiting 316 is programmed for their extensions For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Only one party on an intercom call can put the call on hold If both parties try to put the call on hold the call is disconnected
103. phone at extension 10 to be used to change the current Outgoing Call Restriction setting for an extension This button is useful for quickly changing an extension s restriction For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of the room phone from No Restriction to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out Conversely a receptionist can change the Outgoing Call Restriction setting of a conference room phone from Local Only which prevents users from making long distance calls to No Restriction so a client can dial long distance Related Features Considerations 5 206 Rather than using an Outgoing Call Restriction button you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to change an extension s Outgoing Call Restriction setting through System Programming if you prefer You must use an Auto Dial button with lights to designate the extension you want to change after you press the Outgoing Call Restriction button It is recommended that you use an Auto Dial button on the PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer However you can use an intercom Auto Dial button on the system phone at extension 10 provided the button has lights For information about programming Auto Dial buttons see Auto Dialing jon page 5 17 An Outgoing Call Restriction button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 Outgoing Call Restriction must be prog
104. phone rings anyone else in the system who can hear the call ring can pick it up simply by dialing the Pickup Group code for that group lntercom O Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 153 Feature Reference Using 5 154 To program a Pickup Group button 1 2a Rp wD Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Dial a Pickup Group number 1 4 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use Group Pickup when programmed on a button press the programmed button To use manually 1 Lift the handset and press intercom You hear intercom dial tone Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Standard Phone To use Group Pickup i Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial and a group number 1 4 to pick up a call ringing at any extension in the group Hold Hold Description This section explains how to place and retrieve calls on hold using either the button on a system phone or the switchhook on a standard phone The user can make and receive
105. phones are proprietary devices that can only be used with the control unit described in this guide See a so Industry R RAU Remote Administration Unit An auxiliary device that lets you perform system programming from a remote location Recall A system feature that sends a timed switchhook flash to let you recall a dial tone to make another call to or access a PBX or Centrex service Use Recall only on an outside call using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Record a Call Release 3 0 or later This feature allows the user to record an active conservation in the user s PMVS mailbox Reorder Tone A fast busy signal that the system transmits to an extension when a user attempts to use a feature that is not available to that extension Ringer Equivalence Number REN A measure of the power it takes to ring a phone or other telecommunications device usually shown on a label on the bottom of the device Restore The reinstating of system and telephone programming settings that have been saved on a Backup Restore PC Card using either Backup Programming Automatic 123 or Backup GL 9 Glossary Programming Manual 124 If necessary this backed up information can be restored using Restore Programming 125 S Send All Calls Lets you send calls immediately_to Call Coverage or to the voice messaging system Simultaneous Paging A feature that lets you make announcements over the loudspeaker
106. post warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies If you do not have a contract Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time and materials basis by calling the hotline A contract provides to you within the applicable coverage period and response times service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs Both Business Day and Around the Clock coverages of varying lengths are available To order a post warranty service contract call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you leased your system under a Term Plan from Lucent Technologies Business Day service is included in your lease To upgrade to Around the Clock service call 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability Lucent Technologies warrants to you the customer that your system will be in good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller delivers or installs the system whichever is later Warranty Date If you notify Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller within one year of the Warranty Date that your system is not in good working order Lucent Technologies will without charge to you repair or replace at its option the system components that are not in good wo
107. procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 to test the system m Ifthe backup completes successfully the problem may be solved An automatic backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 a If the backup fails try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards lf the system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the hotline a a lf the system writes to one of the PC Cards the original PC Card is corrupted See Table 1 on page B 7 for information about ordering a new Backup Restore PC Card gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause Changes were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and selec
108. programmed a Use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the telephone selects a line or pool when the user picks up the handset If you want to change Automatic Line Selection for an extension you must do so immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number Using Telephone Programming Use Extension Name Display to assign a user s name to the extension See Chapter 5 for the character codes Like Automatic Line Selection this procedure must be done immediately after you enter programming mode and dial the extension number If you want to change both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display first change Automatic Line Selection then press Central Tel Program redial the extension number then use Extension Name Display a Use Line Ringing to change the ringing for an individual line or pool For standard phones you must now also program all other extension features For non display system phones you may also want to program all extension features at this point To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Mic HFAN To change the settings for another extension press Central Tel Program then dial the new extension number To exit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between Syste
109. programming mode 5 181 Feature Reference Using 5 182 System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Press the programmed button or then lift the handset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system If your paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Making Calls Making Calls Description A user can make a call by dialing an outside phone number or an extension number There are also several ways to speed dial a number see Related Features below Hybrid Mode Only Making calls in Hybrid mode is the same as in Key mode except users can select a pool button rather than a line button to access an outside line When a user presses a pool button the system automatically selects an idle line belonging to the pool To access a line in a pool that is not assigned to that extension or to a
110. recorded greeting for that mailbox 3 Hang up 5 294 Wake Up Service Button 115 Wake Up Service Button 115 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later Related Features Considerations Valid Entries Wake up time is based on System Time 103 If users answer a wake up call they hear Music on Hold 602 if it is Active If Music on Hold is Not Active users hear silence Wake up calls ring at target extensions even if Do Not Disturb is active at the extension Wake up calls to a target extension that has Call Forwarding active ring at the extension the calls are not forwarded Wake up calls that are not answered do not go to voice mail coverage even if VMS Cover is active at the target extension A Wake Up Service button must be programmed on the system display phone at extension 10 Wake Up Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights A scheduled wake up call occurs once in a 24 hour period If you want to send a wake up call at the same time on the nex
111. repeat the current programming procedure m ext Item and Prev item cycle forward and backward through a procedure s parameters A parameter is typically an outside line a pool an extension or a telephone list entry m Next Data and Prev Data cycle forward and backward through the valid entries These buttons work only for fixed data such as a line or extension number They do not work for variable data such as date time password telephone numbers or doorphone assignments m returns the current setting to the factory setting When using Line Assignment 301 removes lines from an extension when using Pool Extension Assignment 314 removes pools from an extension m ends an entry of variable length such as a telephone number in an Allowed Phone Number List m starts the System Programming process a starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process to customize individual telephones centrally from extension 10 or 11 a when followed by enters or exits programming mode m enters a wildcard a character that matches any digit dialed in telephone numbers in Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and the Forced Account Code List 409 2 21 Programming Next Next Next Procedure Mm Item Mm Data m Remove f Prev Prev Prev l rocedure Item l Data l Enter System Central J J Program
112. ring An intercom call will ring ring ring ring ring ring A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back will ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring ring gt NOTE Dial Tones If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Telephones use the ringing patterns described here instead Standard phones have two different dial tones Outside dial tone is generated by your local telephone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line 3 9 Learning About Telephones a Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two dial tones lift the handset The dial tone you hear assuming the phone is set to select intercom first as recommended in this guide is an intercom dial tone To hear an outside dial tone press 9 Using the Switchhook Some of the call handling instructions in this guide direct you to rapidly press and release the switchhook Pressing the switchhook for 1 2 to 1 second sends a signal over the line called a switchhook flash However do not press the switchhook too quickly If you press the switchhook and nothing happens try again and press it a ittle longer gt NOTE If your feature phone has a b
113. see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide If the audio source develops trouble such as a bad tape you can quickly turn it off by changing the Music on Hold setting to Not Active until you are able to solve the problem The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives The Magic on Hold system available from Lucent Technologies includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually Music on Hold 602 Valid Entries 1 Active v 2 Not Active Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the setting of the Music on Hold jack 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 To activate or deactivate the Music on Hold jack press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 195 Feature Reference Music on Hold Volume 614 Description This System Programming procedure allows you to select one of seven volume settings for the external music source provided through the Music on Hold jack on the PARTNER ACS proces
114. selected line or pool also appears on the display Continue programming or exit programming mode Loudspeaker Paging I70 Loudspeaker Paging 170 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the processor module Related Features Considerations Programming Users can make Simultaneous Paging announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Calling Group Extensions 502 to program Calling Group 1 You can specify the loudspeaker paging system as a hotline alert extension so that the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker For more information see Hotline 603 You can program a Loudspeaker Paging button on a system phone to access the loudspeaker with one touch If the loudspeaker paging system is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Loudspeaker Paging button 1 h oe uN Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Program another button for this extension or exit
115. set to Not Active callers hear recorded music or messages while being transferred Music on Hold Volume 614 controls the volume at which the music plays when the Music on Hold jack is active Changes to this setting affect the many features that use Music on Hold Background Music Call Park Call Waiting Exclusive Hold Hold Transfer and Transfer Return Background Musicllets users with system phones other than the MDC 9000 or TransTalk 9000 series phones play the recorded material through their phone s speaker when the phone is not in use a Hotline 603 identifies internal hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined extension number automatically rings External Hotline 311 dentifies external hotline extensions so when a person lifts the handset of the hotline phone a predetermined outside phone number is automatically dialed Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 jidentifies extensions to which doorphones are connected Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 identifies extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed The Contact Closure Adjunct which plugs into a jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and has two Contact Closures that can be used to control devices such as an electronic door lock or an alert uses the following procedures Contact Closure Group 612 specifies which extensions can activate one or both of the Cont
116. settings and to restore these settings if they become corrupted This card must be inserted in the PARTNER ACS processor module before you use the system s backup or restore features Backup Programming Automatic 123 Backup Programming Manual 124 or Restore Programming 125 See also PC Card C Call Answer Service A voice messaging system feature that lets callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or transfer themselves to another extension Call Assistant See lIntercom Autodialer Call Coverage Release 2 0 or later A feature that lets users send their intercom and transferred calls and calls on their owned lines to a covering extension when they are unable to answer calls Call Park A feature that lets a user put a call on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any exten sion in the system Call Record A line of information on a call report that includes data fields such as call type date time called caller number and call duration See a so Account Code and Call Report GL 2 Glossary Call Report A page of information that begins with a header and lists incoming and outgoing calls to and from your business on a call by call basis See a so Call Record and Call Reporting Call Reporting A feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting also is referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR Call Screening Release 3 0 or later This feature
117. specified number of Call Coverage Rings Outside and intercom calls continue to ring at the covering extension until the call is answered or the caller hangs up Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later Considerations For transferred calls If the covering extension does not answer the call goes to the transfer return extension after the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time at the user s extension before it goes to the transfer return extension If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence If a user at a covering extension has a system display phone and is busy on a call he or she can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a coverage call is being sent If a user is not active on a call and multiple coverage calls are ringing he or she can press the line pool or buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent however if the user picks up the handset he or she will join or answer the call that was previously ringing at the originating extension shown on the display Call Coverage does not apply to parked calls See Call Park If you want calls answered by Call Coverage to be logged as unanswered calls use the Call Log Line Associ
118. start lines e Hong Kong Hong Kong Telecom Network Connection Reference CR01 Direct Exchange Lines Hong Kong Telecom Network Connection Reference CR02 Direct Dial in Lines Hong Kong Telecom Network Connection Reference CRO03 Voiceband operation in private circuits Hong Kong Telecom Network Connection Reference CR04 DC continuity operation to private circuits Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Maintenance Your system is designed to provide trouble free performance without any special maintenance procedures To reduce the risk of accidental damage m Keep the system modules in an area free of dust smoke and moisture and do not block the air vents by placing objects on top of the control unit Donotplace telephones near a heating duct radiator or other heat source and do not drop or expose them to excessive shock or vibration a Unplug the telephone if its cord is damaged if liquid is spilled into it or if its housing becomes cracked or otherwise damaged To clean your telephone wipe the outside housing with a soft dust free cloth If absolutely necessary you may use a cloth slightly dampened with a mild soap and water solution Dry quickly with a soft cloth A caution Your telephone contains sensitive electronic parts Never submerge it in any kind of liquid and never use detergents alcohols solvents abrasive cleaners or an excessive amount of water when cleaning the housing an
119. switchhook to get intercom dial tone then send a Recall signal by pressing 3 On a standard feature phone that has a Recall or Flash button first press the Recall or Flash button to get intercom dial tone then send a system Recall signal by pressing You can program a Recall button on a system phone to send a Recall signal with one touch Using Recall while recording an intercom call disconnects the call This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 Recall F03 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using To program a Recall button 1 oO Pe Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting while active on an outside line System Phone i 2 3 Press the programmed button or press Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the programmed button or press again Standard Phone 1 Press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone that has one You hear in
120. system phone to ring or voice signal a Hunt Group with one touch If you have a voice messaging system you can program Hunt Group 7 intercom O O O on a button to retrieve messages with one touch Here are some useful applications for a Hunt Group Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 150 Place the extensions of employees who work in a department sharing calls such as a customer service group in a Hunt Group so that when a call comes in to the receptionist it can be transferred to the next available extension This alleviates the problem of one employee receiving most of the calls Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an order To program a Hunt Group button 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this featur
121. system phones To assign Allowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press feature System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press A display similar to the following appears AllowTo 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 8 For example to select list 1 press 4 To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point a To assign or unassign another list to this extension press or until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 10 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of other dialing restrictions as long as they have access to an outside line For example if you restrict an entire category of calls through Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 you can permit calls to a specific number in that category by placing that number on an Allowed Phone Number List Using this procedure you can create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features Considerations After completing this p
122. the Number of Lines procedure will change Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing To change pool assignments without affecting other settings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pod Extension Assignment 314 p 5 202 TRANSFER RETURN RINGS DIAL 105 p 5 273 DIAL one digit 0 9 for the nurnber of rings before the call returns 0 9 rings 4 rings Y 0 rings no return RECALL TIMER DURATION DIAL 107 p _ 5 226 DIAL two digits 01 80 to set the length of a switchhook flash V 18 450 msec TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PRESS Feature fo fo PRESS feature 01 fo TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE DIAL and three digit procedure code Example 1 fal 1 for System Date TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES PRESS Next Procedure or Prev Procedure NOTES Procedures 399 609 and 728 shown later in dashed boxes are skipped when cycling ROTARY DIALING TIMEOUT DIAL 108 p _ 5 236 DIAL 1 4 sec 2 8secv 3 12 sec DIAL MODE DIAL 201 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 Touch Tone 2 Rotary PRESS Next Item to program another line HOLD Disconnect TIM DIAL 203 CEA 237 DIAL a system line number DIAL 00 No Detection 01 50 msec 07 350 02 100 msec 08 400
123. the batteries Backup Failure Alarm messages appear if an automatic backup is unsuccessful The message is displayed until you clear the alarm or until the next successful automatic backup or system restart See Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm on page 6 3 Related Features Considerations 5 118 The System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 settings are shown as the default display You can use Display Language 303 to identify the language in which messages appear if the extension has a system display phone Users can assign a name to their extension Then when that extension is used to make an intercom call group call or transferred call the name and extension number appear on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name and extension number of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call See Extension Name Display for more information The call timer records the time a user is active on a call It begins when the handset is lifted out of the cradle and ends when either the handset is placed back in the cradle or the call is placed on hold This is not the call duration reported to SMDR SMDR records the total time the call is in progress including the time a call is placed on hold For more information refer tol Call Reporting Devices SMDRY Jon page 4 9 When a call is transferred the t
124. the programmed button or press If the phone is idle you hear Background Music If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns on 2 To adjust the volume of Background Music use the phone s volume control buttons while listening to the Background Music To turn Background Music off Press the programmed button or press again If the Background Music button has lights the green light turns off Backup Programming Automatic 123 Backup Programming Automatic 123 Description The backup of system and telephone programming is optional but recommended This System Programming procedure determines whether the automatic backup of all programming except the system date day and time occurs or not The default setting is Not Active When Backup Programming Automatic is set to Active the information is backed up at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month determined by the system date and time settings to a Backup Restore PC Card gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 If Backup Programming Automatic is Active and an automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the system date and time on the top
125. the replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline seepage 61 Standard Phone Rings Back after Intercom Call with No One at Other End Possible Cause 1 The switchhook is accidentally pressed and released causing a call to ring back What to do Be sure that the handset is always replaced carefully If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Automatic Line Selection is programmed incorrectly What to do lf one of the phones involved is a standard single line rotary or touch tone telephone set its Automatic Line Selection to intercom first If the problem is not solved call the hotline see pag Standard Phone s Message Waiting Light Does Not Light Possible Cause 1 The standard phone is part of a combination extension which includes a system phone that has Background Music on What to do Check to see if the system phone has Background Music on A standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone a If Background Music is on turn it off If the standard phone s message waiting light lights properly the problem is solved a f Background Music is not on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 The standard phone s message waiting light is not compatible with the system 6 9 Troubleshooting What to do See Standard Telephones on page 1 16 for a list of supported standard phones with message waiting lights Als
126. the reset also turns off the light for the Call Forwarding button A successful use of Restore Programming 125 causes a System Reset Programming Saved 728 to occur The information stored in the Save Number Redial F04 and the Last Number Redial F05 buffers is lost when a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs Resetting the system disconnects all active calls This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly The system reset begins immediately and takes only a few seconds You cannot interrupt the reset process or use any telephones in the system during the reset process 5 263 Feature Reference Using 5 264 All of the system and telephone programming settings that were in effect before the power failure or down period are retained except those mentioned in the Related Features section above they do not revert to the default settings See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To reset the system press eature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Reset Save All When the reset is completed the system is no longer in Programming Mode and the date and time appear on the display System Speed Dial Numbers
127. to system lines are within these release dependent ranges System Components Table 1 4 summarizes PARTNER model system phone features Table 1 4 PARTNER Model System Phones PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 Total Number of 32 16 16 4 Programmable Buttons with Status Lights Total Number of 4 4 0 0 Programmable Buttons without Status Lights Key Mode Line 24 16 16 4 Button Capacity Number of Programmable Buttons with Status Lights Hybrid Mode Pool 5 5 5 4 Button Capacity Line Capacity 19 16 163 4 Intercom Buttons 2 2 2 2 Display v v Speakerphone d v v 1 The main pool uses two buttons 2 The system supports a maximum of 19 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines you can use up to 19 buttons on these phones for outside lines 3 Thesystem supports a maximum of 19 lines when the system is configured for the maximum number of lines you can use up to 16 buttons on these phones for outside lines Overview Intercom Autodialers PARTNER model system phones support the PARTNER CA48 Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer at extensions 10 and 11 The autodialer provides Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system The status lights next to each button also indicate calling activity at that extension Users can program the Auto Dial buttons for either intercom ringing voice signaling
128. to enter an account code for a call for example to charge calls to specific departments or projects the account code prints on the call report If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List 409 only valid account codes and any other entered digits up to 16 print on the call report Marked System Speed Dial Numbers appear on the call report as F nnn where nnn is the Speed Dial code If you use Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial you may want to set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report For instructions on notifying the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page see SMDR Top of Page 609 If you use Caller ID SMDR reports include the telephone numbers of incoming calls This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 Valid Entries 1 All Calls outgoing and incoming v 2 Outgoing Only 5 245 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 246 To identif
129. to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours Related Features Considerations Night Service affects only the extensions identified using Night Service Group Extensions 504 If you program a System Password 403 the password must be entered when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only The status of the Night Service button at extension 10 tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode The Night Service button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to System Reset 728 being used A Night Service button must be programmed on the system phone at extension 10 Night Service must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button without lights A user in the Night Service Group can receive an after hours outside call only if it co
130. use this procedure to change from Regular to Machine dial tone Considerations Use this procedure only if an autodialing device has trouble making calls Valid Entries 1 Regular dial tone v 2 Machine outside line dial tone Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting for an extension 1 5 164 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 22 press To change the Intercom Dial Tone setting press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Wext item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Joining Calls Joining Calls Description Joining is adding yourself to a call in progress the same way you do on a home telephone by picking up an extension This is different from conferencing in which the originator pulls you into the call Up to three system extensions can join acall on an outside line for a total of one outside and four inside parties Related Features Considerations You can use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 t
131. which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA Card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 A WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade Use a PC Card to store Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial messages You can insert the card in either PC Card Slot 1 or PC Card Slot 2 of the ACS Processor Module Release 2 0 or later For PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 or later use a PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card to provide messaging features store personal greeting and store and retrieve callers messages for up to four mailboxes if Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required System Components For PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later anew PARTNER Remote Access PC Card and software give you the ability to administer the system from your PC either remotely or locally The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card For information on installing PC Cards see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Overview System Capacity The PARTNER ACS release you have the carrier you use and the combination of modules installed determine the number of available lines and extensions For PARTNER ACS Release 1 0 and 1 1 the carrier you use and the combination of 200 206 and 400 modules installed determine the number of available
132. winking green light to reconnect to the caller If the call is accepted hang up If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller To transfer a call with one button touch While on a call press the Auto Dial button programmed for the extension or the Hunt Group or Calling Group button for the group to which you want to transfer the call There is no need to press ans or Next Item this takes the place of Steps 1 and 2 in the procedure on the previous page
133. 0 or Later Description This procedure applies only to systems configured for Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure assigns lines to or removes lines from the main and auxiliary pools supported for Hybrid mode You can change line assignments in the main pool 880 or in any of three auxiliary pools 881 882 or 883 Related Features You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools created with this procedure to specific extensions If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all lines in a specific pool you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change a pooled extension to a key extension Considerations a You can assign some or all outside lines to a specific pool but you cannot assign a specific outside line to more than one pool Because users cannot control which line they get when they access a pool you should group lines with similar purposes WATS lines FX lines lines designated for a particular set of users together in a unique pool a f you have individual lines assigned to a pooled extension and you use this procedure to change pool line assignment be careful not to press or to specify a pool assignment If you do the system will remove that line from all extensions that have the line assigned Valid Entries 1 No Pool 2 Main Pool 880 v all lines assigned 3 Pool 881 4 Pool 882 5 Pool 883
134. 0 seconds Related Features Considerations 5 34 After the Automatic System Answer greeting plays the system either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call For callers to hear Music on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed If the PC Card has not been installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer
135. 01 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone Valid Entries 1 Touch Tone line v 2 Rotary line Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Dial Mode setting for a specific line 1 Press eature O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the first line to be programmed For example to program line 8 press 3 To change the dial mode press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all lines that you want to change 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 98 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Release 2 0 or Later Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Release 2 0 or Late
136. 03 150 msec 09 450 04 200 msec 10 500 05 250 msec 11 550 06 300 msec 12 600 OUTSIDE CONFERENCE DENIAL DIAL 109 DIAL 1 Allowed 2 Disallowed msec msec msec msec msec msec AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER DELAY e529 DIAL 110 DIAL a ring delay number 0 9 Y 2 rings PRESS Next item to program another line AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER 20 AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ANSWER 20 BUTTON p 525 LINES p 5 30 DIAL 204 DIAL a system line number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another line DIAL 111 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL DELAY 2 0 DIAL 112 p _5 102 DIAL a ring delay number 0 9 2 rings Y 0 rings answered immediately DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON p _ 5 99 ae S 20 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press VMS COVER RINGS DIAL 117 a programmable button DIAL 1 9 3y DIRECT EXTENSION DIAL LINES DIAL 205 p 5 104 DIAL a system line number 20 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another ling p 5 282 20 or earlier OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION BUTTON DIAL 114 tF DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button RING ON TRANSFER DIAL 119 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active WAKE UP SERVICE BUTTON a DIAL 115 p 5 294
137. 06 and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation To program a System Password 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program 4 at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears Set System Password Data Enter a four digit password or press to delete the existing password Select another procedure or exit programming mode Before lifting the handset or turning on the speaker at a PARTNER or MLS model phone press Hold Enter the password The System Password does not appear on display phones Press an outside line button or press and a two digit line number or a pool button or press and a three digit access code and lift the handset Dial the number The password is in effect until you hang up the phone 5 261 Feature Reference System Release Status F59 Description Using 5 262 When calling for customer support you need to know the release level of your system This feature enables you to determine that information at any system display phone A display similar to the following appears P ACS R2 0 COl1 This message indicates that this is Release 2 0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System The c01 represents the country code To use this feature press 9 at any system display phone The system release mess
138. 1 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension X use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button To Program Fax 2 Receive Ext Y i Modems If extension Y is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension Y If extension Y is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools and then use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension Y If you want it to be able to dial out when fax 1 is unavailable set Automatic Line Selection for extension Y to select outside lines first line A selected last Set Line Ringing for line A at extension Y to Immediate Ring set all other lines and pools at extension Y to No Ring For all other extensions set line A to No Ring or Delayed Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension Y to Assigned Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine at extension Y use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension Y as a fax extension and program a Fa
139. 1 6 ____ O O O PARTNER ACS Processor Module 1 6 1 7 2 17 ss PARTNER Phones System Phones 1 14 S SS S PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card 1 1 1 8 2 9 2 20 f BAZ CS PARTNER 34D Telephone buttons andindicators 3 200 _ S for receptionist 2 20 _ _ SSS illustration 2 220 IN 5 Index programming overlay 2 PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Password Remote Administration 5 230 Password System 403 5 261 ___ PC Card Slots 1 8 PC Cards 1 9 2 19 5 42 5 44 _________ O peel Soe MALO LED a EN Se en esos Dialing 2 Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA Card see PC Cards Personal Speed Dial Numbers 2 26 5 209 ss Phones seq Feature Phones Standard Phones hnd Sys tem Phones Picking up a Held Call 5 154 5 156 ___ Pickup ae group line 5 109 5 111 Placing a Call Pool Line Assignment 207 Pooled Extensions Printer se Privacy description 5 overlays overview 2 1 2 23 O S y O 2 21 2 23 2 32 _ _ S 2A o IN 6 PBX Centrex support for 2 11 _ ______ Quick Reference Charts End of book receptionist extension 2 27 y remote 2 1 restore restrictions and permissions system 2 1 J2 12 220 __ o telephone 2 1 2 25 2 30 0 voice messaging system 2 29 Programming see alsq System Programming bnd Tele Programming Overlays Illustration 2 22 sd Pulse Dial 5 98 5 236 S
140. 1 o long distance for 5 269 _ o outside lines controlling calls on 2 14 lt lt Index overriding 5 261 5 265 PBX Centrex services with 2 pooled extensions for 5 215 Direct Group Calling 5 Direct Line Pickup Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Display adjusting contrast 5 Display Language 303 Display Phone for programming 2 1 2 Distinctive Ring 308 Do Not Disturb description 5 121 o O Doorphones description doorphone alert extensions 606 5 123 doorphone extensions 604 605 5 124 programming for 5 123 5 124 J5 125 _ __ 3 89 Es Drop Conference 5 89 Dropping Parties from a Conference Call 5 DSS seg Auto Dial Buttons fand Intercom Autodialer E Electromagnetic Interference Filter Extension adding an 2 combination 3 12 J6 15 _ _ S O copying settings 2 7 _ _ o O customizing an groups 2 Extra Alerts F FACE Forced Account Code Entry 5 138 ss FACE see Forced Account Code Entry 307 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 5 135 sd Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 137 ssid Fax Machines dialing restrictions for 4 19 418 es end and receive 4 18 example setups line saver programming single transferring calls tof 4 17 Cd 5 Slot Carrier configuration overview 1 6 Cd G GCD 5 143 GCD see Group Call Distribution Group Call Distribution 206 5 143 Group Calling 5
141. 10 and any extensions set to Key using Line Access Mode 301 are key extensions If you add an outside line to your system you may need to adjust some line settings In particular use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line Line Assignment 301 to assign the line to specific extensions Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when the line will start ringing at each extension that has the line and Line Access Restriction 302 to limit an extension s access to the line Additionally the system automatically assigns the new line as the last line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence If you want to change the order use Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming IMPORTANT Do not use Number of Lines 104 if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To add a new line without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 2 9 Programming Pooled Extensions Use this section to add new lines to existing pools if your system is configured for Hybrid mode To assign a new line to a pooled extension as an individual line follow the procedures in If you add an outside line to your system for use in an existing pool use Dial Mode 201 if the new line is a rotary line and Pool Line Assignment 207 to
142. 2 kgs 4 5 Ibs or 2 kgs 4 5 Ibs or 2 kgs 1 0 Ibs or 46 kgs 5 5 Ibs or 2 5 kgs 2 7 lbs or 1 2 kgs 2 4 lbs or 1 1 kgs 2 3 lbs or 1 0 kgs 1 9 Ibs or 0 9 kgs 1 5 Ibs or 0 7 kgs A 2 Other Specifications Switch Fabric Full digital nonblocking Electrical Specifications 35 Watts 120 BTUs hr per ACS processor module during normal power consumption 45 Watts 154 BTUs hr per ACS processor module during maximum power consumption 10 Watts 35 BTUs hr per 400 module normal and maximum power consumption 25 Watts 90 BTUs hr per 206 module during normal power consumption 35 Watts 120 BTUs hr per 206 module during maximum power consumption 30 Watts 105 BTUs hr per 308EC module during normal power consumption 40 Watts 140 BTUs hr per 308EC module during maximum power consumption U S Canada and other 110V countries ACS processor module and one 206 module 2 Slot carrier 2 3 Amps max current full system capacity ACS processor module and four 206 modules 5 Slot carrier 4 Amps max current full system capacity Countries using 220V ACS processor module and one 206 module 2 Slot carrier 1 2 Amps max current full system capacity ACS processor module and four 206 modules 5 Slot carrier 2 Amps max current full system capacity 45 days to 6 months memory backup with 2 AAA size standard alkaline batteries IEC LRO3 Processor Module Specifi
143. 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module You can set Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 to Active to log calls on lines answered by Automatic System Answer The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message All lines programmed with Automatic System Answer should be assigned to extension 10 Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Release 2 0 or Later Only outside calls on Automatic System Answer lines are answered automatically Intercom transferred and transfer return calls are not answered automatically Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify the lines on which outside calls should be answered by the system 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 2 2 Enter the two digit system line number of the desired line For example to specify line 1 press 3 To assign or unassign the line press until the appropriate value displays 4 To identify another line press Next item or Prev item until the line numb
144. ACS processor module has two PC Card slots These slots function similarly to a floppy drive on a PC in that information can be added to the system or copied from the system using a PC Card inserted in one of the slots To use the optional Backup and Restore features of the system you must purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies Only these Lucent Technologies PC Cards can be used in the PARTNER ACS processor module The same PC Card stores both automatic and manual backups separately gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Ay WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 2 19 Programming Backup Programming Automatic 123 enables you to specify whether automatic backups should be performed or not If you set this feature to Active your system and telephone programming settings are backed up to the PC Card automatically at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month The PC Card must be present in the PC Card slot for the backup to take place Backup Programming Manual 124 enables you to initiate a backup of your system and telephone programming settings
145. AL 4 MANmmddyy v 2 AUTO mmddyy PRESS Enter to begin the restore AUTOMATICDAYLIGHT STANDARD TIMES DIAL 126 DIAL 1 Active Y 2 Not active 3 0 p 5 20 LINE ASSIGNMENT DIAL 301 DIAL a system extension number To remove all existing line assignments press Remove before selecting a line DIAL a line number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select Button then press a programmable button to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select PRESS Next Item to program another line for this extension To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps p 5 173 LINE ACCESS RESTRICTION DIAL 302 p _5171 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a system line number DIAL No Restriction Outgoing Only Incoming Only No Access line appears on button but you can use line only to pick up a transferred or held call 1 2 3 4 To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps DISPLAY LANGUAGE DIAL 303 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 English Y 2 Spanish 3 French PRESS Next Item to program another extension AUTOMATIC EXTENSION DIAL 304 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Ass
146. ARTNER 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each MLS model phone Figure D 2 shows the buttons on the MLS 34D Programming Overlay and the relative location of those buttons on each PARTNER model phone The letters on the PARTNER 34D Overlay in Figure D 1 are printed on the Overlay To help you program from an MLS 34D phone you may want to write the letters shown on the MLS 34D Overlay in Figure D 2 on your Overlay If you want to program features on specific buttons at target phones it is recommended that you 1 Look at the figure with the overlay that matches the phone at your programming extension Find the location of the button in the picture of the target phone Note the letter associated with that particular button Find the letter in the picture of the Programming Overlay ao fF wo NM Press that button on the programming extension For example if you are using a PARTNER 34D phone at extension 10 and you want to program Do Not Disturb on the top leftmost button of an MLS 18D phone refer to Figure D 1 find the top leftmost button on the MLS 18D phone then press the button labeled M on the PARTNER 34D Programming Overlay D 1 Programming Mixed Telephone Types a EE ay Lo en T m PARTNER 34D Overlay fmt E
147. Answer Lines 204 Release 2 0 or Later 5 30 Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Release 2 0 or Later 5 32 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Release 2 0 or Later 5 34 Automatic VMS Cover 310 5 37 a Background Music F19 5 39 ii Contents Backup Programming Automatic 123 5 41 Backup Programming Manual 124 5 44 Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later 5 46 Call Coverage Rings 116 Release 2 0 only 5 50 Call Coverage Rings 320 Release 3 0 or Later 5 51 a Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX 5 52 a Call Park 5 55 Call Pickup I6XX 5 57 Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later 5 59 a Call Waiting 316 5 61 Caller ID 5 63 a Caller ID Inspect F17 5 66 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Release 2 0 or Later 5 68 a Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 Release 2 0 or Later 5 70 a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Release 2 0 or Later 5 72 a Caller ID Log All Calls 319 Release 2 0 or Later 5 79 a Caller ID Type 122 5 83 Copy Settings 399 5 96 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Release 2 0 or Later 5 99 Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Release 2 0 or Later 5 102 Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Release 2 0 or Later 5 104 a Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Release 2 0 or Later 5 106 iii Contents Distinctive Ring 308 5 120 Doorphone
148. C Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the Backup Restore PC Card reapply power to the system and restart the Restore Programming 125 procedure Possible Cause 2 The backup file is corrupted What to do Retry the Restore Programming 125 procedure If you get the same result try again using a different backup file from the same Backup Restore PC Card or a file from a different Backup Restore PC Card Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 6 23 Troubleshooting System Programming Settings Reverted to Default Settings Possible Cause You ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure but the restore failed What to do See Possible Causes 1 and 2 under Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode Display Shows Restore Complete but All Calls Were Disconnected Possible Cause You just ran the Restore Programming 125 procedure What to do Nothing This is normal behavior after a restore the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours System Problems Call Rings Continuously When Answered No One at Other End Possible Cause Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is used on a system that does not suppo
149. CS processor module One 308EC module Total 16 extensions 6 lines 5 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module Four 400 modules Total 19 lines 8 extensions One PARTNER ACS processor module Four 308EC modules Total 40 extensions 15 lines gt NOTE If you want to install a PARTNER Mail VS module keep in mind that it will require one of the slots in the carrier which reduces the system line and System Mode extension capacity The system supports two modes of operation The mode of operation determines how users access outside lines from their phones Key Mode Users access individual outside lines to make and receive calls Hybrid Mode For 2 0 or later users can access individual outside lines as in Key mode However you also can create up to four groups or pools of multiple outside lines When the user accesses a pool to make a call the system selects an available line from the pool Since multiple lines are associated with the pool the user does not know which line within the pool is being used to make the call System mode is determined by the configuration of the processor module By default the system is configured for Key mode Changing to Hybrid mode requires modifying the processor module Only Lucent Technologies Authorized Personnel can modify the processor module to accommodate Hybrid mode The mode for your system must be decided upon before installation and i
150. D Log Answered Calls 317 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature is available on 24 character PARTNER 18D and 34D display phones It is not available for the MLS MLC MDW or Tip Ring phones This programming procedure allows a system administrator to program extensions to log answered Caller ID calls so that calls answered at an individual extension can be viewed in the Caller ID Call Log Once the feature is activated for an extension when a user activates the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 all caller ID calls that are answered by that extension will be logged A telephone symbol a vertical handset appears in the Call Status Display to indicate that the call being viewed has been answered The Caller ID Log Answered Call feature is useful when users may have no other way of tracking callers phone numbers For example a sales representative who takes phone orders could find a number in the log for a caller whose credit card information was later determined to be invalid Related Features a f you also want to log unanswered Caller ID calls use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to program lines and extensions to log unanswered calls You can select to log answered Caller ID calls only unanswered Caller ID calls only or you can choose to log both You can also program a maximum of one extension to log all answered Caller ID calls and all unanswered Caller ID calls received
151. Dial Numbers Personal Speed Dial Numbers and Auto Dialing but not Marked System Speed Dial Numbers Automatic Line Selection does not apply for an extension programmed with this feature the user must manually select a line or pool after entering an account code Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry to an External Hotline 311 extension If a System Password 403 is required to override dialing restrictions for an extension users must enter it before entering the account code Forced Account Code Entry 307 Considerations Valid Entries If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 for more information about call reporting For forced account code entry if a Forced Account Code List exists only valid account codes are printed on the call report Forced account codes are not required to answer incoming calls at the extensions programmed with this feature 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 O O at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to pro
152. Entries above 5 To set VMS Hunt Delay for another line press Wext Item or Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 285 Feature Reference VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure determines whether the outside lines assigned to Hunt Group 7 hunt through the VMS Hunt Group all the time only during Day operation Night Service is off or only during Night operation Night Service is on This feature affects only the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system For ACS Release 3 0 VMS Hunt Schedule is programmable on a per line basis Related Features You must use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign lines to Hunt Group 7 You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 If you set the VMS Hunt Schedule for Day Only or Night Only you must use Night Service Button 503 to program a Night Service button for extension 10 When the VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only and Night service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on lines assigned to the hunt group will be sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls will not go to the Hunt Group When the VMS Hunt Schedule is
153. Extension 604 and 605 5 124 Exclusive Hold F02 5 128 Extension Name Display 5 130 External Hotline 311 5 132 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later 5 135 Fax Machine Extensions 601 5 137 Forced Account Code Entry 307 5 138 a Hold Disconnect Time 203 5 157 a Joining Calls 5 165 a Last Number Redial F05 5 167 m Line Access Mode 313 Release 2 0 or Later 5 169 m Line Access Restriction 302 5 171 a Line Coverage Extension 208 5 177 a Making Calls 5 183 a Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX 5 188 a Message Light Off F10XX 5 190 iv Contents a Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 5 206 Outside Conference Denial 109 5 209 a Personal Speed Dial Numbers 5 210 Pickup Group Extensions 501 5 213 Pool Access Restriction 315 Release 2 0 or Later 5 215 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Release 2 0 or Later 5 217 a Pool Line Assignment 207 Release 2 0 or Later 5 220 a Privacy F07 5 222 a Recall F03 5 224 a Recall Timer Duration 107 5 226 Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later 5 228 Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later 5 230 Restore Programming 125 5 232 a Ring on Transfer 119 5 235 a Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 5 236 Save Number Redial F04 5 237 Send All Calls 5 239 Simultaneous Paging I 70 5 241 SMDR Output Format 610 5 243 SMDR Record Type 608 5 245 a SMDR
154. F05 Station Lock F21 Personal Speed Dial Numbers F80 89 and System Speed Dial Numbers F600 699 Programmed buttons that will interrupt Call Screening are Do Not Disturb F01 Save Number Redial F04 Last Number Redial F05 and Station Lock F21 If the voice messaging system extension does not have Automatic Extension Privacy 304 turned on other users can bridge onto the call If a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system and it disconnects from the call This causes the screening station to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party Call Screening must be programmed on a button with lights For security purposes this is only permitted using Centralized Extension Programming This feature is not available at tip and ring proprietary cordless or wireless telephones This feature can be primed only by pressing the programmed button It cannot be accessed by dialing the Call Screening feature access code An incoming call can be screened at that station only if the station is the Line Coverage Extension for that line the call has been transferred to that station or the call is an intercom call to the station If the user is currently on a line or intercom call Call Screening will be ignored After a call has been sent to the voice mail system the Call Screening feature cannot be used to screen that cal
155. Feature Reference VMS Cover F15 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets system phone users press a programmed button to turn VMS Cover on and off routing unanswered intercom and transferred calls for their extension to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after the specified number of rings factory setting is three rings Related Features Considerations 5 280 If Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned to an extension that extension normally is covered by the voice messaging system For greater flexibility the user can use this feature to program a VMS Cover button to turn coverage on and off as needed Once a VMS Cover button is programmed the user must use the button to turn VMS Cover on and off even though Automatic VMS Cover 310 is Assigned VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Use VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system A user can turn on VMS Cover while a call is ringing to send that call immediately to his or her voice mailbox See Send All Calls Users with VMS Cover already turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbo
156. Features Considerations Valid Entries For instructions on making conference calls see Conference Calls Use Conference Drop to drop the last outside party added to the conference This feature setting applies to all system users A conference call connects up to five parties including the conference originator If outside conference is allowed you can have up to two outside parties and up to three inside parties If outside conference is disallowed you can have one outside party and up to four inside parties 1 Allow conference calls with up to two outside parties v 2 Disallow conference calls with two outside parties Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To allow or disallow conferences with two outside parties 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 To allow or disallow two outside parties on a conference call press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 209 Feature Reference Personal Speed Dial Numbers Description This Telephone Programming procedure lets you store up to 20 frequently dialed numbers for each extension Personal Speed Dial numbers can be dialed quickly by pressing or at intercom dial tone on a standard phone and the two digit code from
157. For more information about SMDR see Call Reports on page 4 10 A Marked System Speed Dial Number can begin with a star code To enter it press followed by the star code and the phone number For example press DWOMOOODOODM System Speed Dial codes cannot be programmed on Auto Dial buttons System Speed Dial numbers can be programmed only from extension 10 or 11 but can be used from any extension Refer to a completed System Speed Dial form for the list of numbers to be programmed After programming the numbers distribute a copy of the completed form to users See Appendix Difor a blank form 5 265 Feature Reference m Ifthe system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system include the dial out code and one or more pauses if available in Speed Dial numbers that must dial out of the PBX or Centrex system m f you program 911 or other emergency numbers as Speed Dial numbers and want to place test calls you should 1 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening and 2 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up You can use multiple Auto Dial buttons and Speed Dial numbers during the course of a single call For example you can use an Auto Dial button or Speed Dial number to dial the Account Code Entry feature code and
158. H O 0 2 Enter the desired system line number For example to specify line 1 press 3 To assign or unassign Direct Extension Dial press until the appropriate value displays 4 To specify another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all desired lines 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 105 Feature Reference Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature The maximum length of the message is 40 seconds Related Features Considerations 5 106 Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 You must program a button with lights on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Direct Extension Dial are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time
159. If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call hold feature that lets you place a call on hold and place another call on the same line For more information see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead Hold acts differently on feature phones standard phones with feature buttons When you press a Hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself This means other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line Also callers on hold ata feature phone will not hear the system s music on hold 5 155 Feature Reference Using 5 156 System Phone To put a call on hold press Hoia The green light next to the intercom line or pool winks To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Press the niercom line or pool button next to the winking green light 2 If the handset is in the cradle lift it up or press Sk You are reconnected to the held call The green light next to the line or intercom button changes to on steady To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold press the button next to the winking red light or press and the two digit line number Standard Phone To put a call on hold press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone The ca
160. Information that directly gives rise to the claim Except as provided below Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any incidental special reliance consequential or indirect loss or damage incurred in connection with the equipment As used in this paragraph consequential damages include but are not limited to the following lost profits lost revenues and losses arising out of unauthorized use or charges for such use of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through or connected to the equipment For personal injury caused by Lucent Technologies negligence Lucent Technologies liability shall be limited to proven damages to person No action or proceeding against Lucent Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twenty four 24 months after the cause of action accrues THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY Product Ordering Information Reference Materials In addition to this guide the following materials are available Title Order Number Description PARTNER Advanced 518 456 161 Provides the forms needed to plan and record Communications System how your system and telephones are to be Planner programmed PARTNER Advanced 518 456 162 Provides instructions for installing the system Communications Installation User Instruction Cards 518 456 341 Contains basic instructi
161. LL FORWARDING CALL FOLLOW M PRESS a programmable button p 5 52 PRESS Feature 1 1 CALLER ID NAME DISPLAY CHOEP CALLING HINGIPAGE DIAL optional two digit originating PRESS a programmable button with ighis for ringing Iher group extension number PRESS Feature 1 6 Ema PRESS a programmable button DIAL optional two digit destination E FRESS left intercom z aversion RUPEE DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 CONFERENCE DROP p 5 89 For paging the group PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature a 61 PRESS left intercom fz DIAL a Calling Group number 1 4 CONTACT CLOSURE 1 p 5 90 PRESS a programmable button Factory setting DIAL left Feature 4 1 Ck Button with lights required Button with lights recommended 20 PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later 20 PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later CONTACT CLOSURE 2 p 5 90 PRESS a programmable button DIAL left Feature 4 2 System Features Continued GROUP HUNTING RING VOICE Ye 2 148 ANUAL SIGNALING p 5 188 SIMULTANEOUS PAGING p 5 241 5 149 PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button For ringing th first available axe PRESS ceaue 1 2 PRESS lett merom fae z fo PRESS a programmable button DIAL the two digit extension number PRESS left intercom z fz to ring extension or DIAL a Hunt Group number 1 7 DIAL plus the two digit
162. List the call report prints the last valid account code entered If the changed account code is not valid the report prints the original account code f a Forced Account Code List exists you can check to see if an account code is valid when entering or changing an account code by pressing after entering the account code If the account code is not valid you will hear a denial tone The Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal uses less than 16 digits for an account code Refer to the device s documentation to determine the maximum digits supported a You can program the Account Code Entry feature code on a button on a system phone It is recommended that you use a button with lights This button can be used for optional Account Code Entry or Forced Account Code Entry Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Account Code Entry button 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably one with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode OU E Using To enter or change an optional account code 1 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter i
163. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations PARTNER Advanced Communications System Programming and Use 518 456 163 Comcode 108355249 Issue 1 December 1998 Copyright 1998 Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies 518 456 163 All Rights Reserved Comcode 108355249 Printed in U S A Issue 1 December 1998 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class A or a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules For additional information on FCC regulations see Communications Commission FCC Interference Information jon the next page Canadian Emissions Requirements This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A or the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Industry Canada IC For additional IC information see IC Notification and Repair Information jin this section Le present appareil numerique n emet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la classe A ou de la classe B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Industrie Canada Vous trouverez des renseigneme
164. Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Product Ordering Information To use Table B 1a first locate the item you want A triangle s indicates where you can obtain it Table B 1a Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacement Parts U S SOURCE U S System Telephones and Accessories Lucent Direct Catalog Sales 1 800 451 210 0 Lucent Technologies Sales Office 1 800 247 700 0 Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer Lucent Technologies National Parts Sale Center 1 800 222 727 8 PARTNER 34D corded telephone S S PARTNER 18D corded telephone S S PARTNER 18 corded telephone PARTNER 6 corded telephone Backup Restore PC Card ASA DXD Announcement PC Card PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 and later only PARTNER Answering Machine PC Card PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 and later only Software Upgrade Card PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 2 0 and later Contact Closure Adjunct PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Button label package specify telephone model Button label package PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Handset AB1A Standard for PARTNER model phones Amplified handset K6S Optional for hard of hearing users with PARTNER model phones Handset cord 9 ft coiled Connects handset to telephone Telephone mounting cord D4BU Connects phone to wall jack jack panel or 206E module ext jack Specify length 2 7
165. P o N 5 241 Feature Reference Using 5 242 System Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Press the programmed button or intercom amp O then lift the handset 2 Speak into the handset To avoid feedback do not use the speakerphone Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 If your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements Standard Phone To make an announcement over the loudspeaker paging system and the idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 3 Speak into the handset Your voice is heard through the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of all idle system phones in Calling Group 1 For touch tone phones only if your loudspeaker paging system supports announcements to zoned areas refer to the instructions packaged with the device to make zoned announcements SMDR Output Format 610 SMDR Output Format 610 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether a maximum
166. Personal Answering Machine A personal answering machine is used to answer all the calls that ring at a certain extension Figure 4 3 It is useful for the following situations When you do not want to dedicate an extension to an answering machine When the extension receives a lot of intercom calls When outside calls come through a receptionist and are transferred to the extension When an extension has a private line Figure 4 3 Personal Answering Machine To Use Go to the machine to manually retrieve messages From any system extension make an intercom call to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code From outside the system call in and have someone transfer you to the extension When the machine answers dial the message retrieval code Or call in when no one will answer before the answering machine does To Program at Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to the desired ring Immediate Delayed or No Ring 4 7 Using Auxiliary Equipment 2 If the lines assigned to extension X are also assigned to other extensions adjust the answering machine to answer on the third or fourth ring so that it does not answer calls before someone else can If the answering machine is to cover transferred or coverage calls make sure the number of rings is less than the amount of transfer return rings set for the extension This assures that the answering machine will p
167. Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number To voice signal a system phone at the extension press plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply Making Calls a If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response a If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers 5 187 Feature Reference Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Description This feature applies only to PARTNER and MLS model phones This feature lets you program a button on your PARTNER or MLS model phone that you can use to signal a predetermined co worker s extension It typically is used by a receptionist to alert a user when the user is b
168. RTNER MAIL or ASA DXD PARTNER ACS determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to the fax machine ACS will automatically transfer the call to a fax hunt group Fax Management Button A system phone button with lights that is programmed with the extension number of a fax machine A user can monitor the lights next to this button to determine when the fax machine is in use available or not answering Feature Phone An industry standard phone that includes programmable buttons or other built in features Forced Account Code Entry A system setting that forces users at specified extensions to enter an account code before making a call See also Account Code and Forced Account Code List Forced Account Code List An optional list of account codes that the system checks when a user enters a forced account code If the forced account code entered by the user is on the list valid the user gets access to an outside line if not the user is denied access G Group Call Distribution A system setting that automatically directs incoming calls on specific lines to a Hunt Group See also Hunt Group ana VMS Hunt Group H Hold Reminder Tone On system phones a short beep that is generated for a call that is left on hold for longer than one minute The tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up Hotline Phone A standard phone
169. Slide the switch on the PC card up to the nonprotected position Figure 6 2 Write Protect Tab on a Backup Restore PC Card 6 20 Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows System Busy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause An automatic or manual backup was in progress at the time you requested a manual backup What to do Exit the procedure and retry the manual backup after a few minutes Display Shows Backup Failed Check Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the backup was in progress What to do Check to see whether the PC Card was removed If it was not go to Possible Cause 2 If it was power down the system reinsert the PC Card and reapply power to the system Restart the Backup Programming Manual 124 procedure Possible Cause 2 The Backup Restore PC Card or the PARTNER ACS processor module is corrupted What to do Try the backup again using the backup procedure Backup Programming Manual 124 m lf the backup completes successfully the problem is solved If the backup fails again try to determine whether the problem is a corrupted PC Card or a corrupted processor module by trying the backup twice using two different Backup Restore PC Cards lf the system will not write to either PC Card the processor module is probably corrupted call the hotline eeo lf the system writes to one of the PC Cards the o
170. System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be saved using this feature A Save Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting When you automatically dial the number displayed in the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature you can save the number using the Save Number Redial feature If this feature is programmed on a bution it interrupts Call Screening F25 This feature redials all digits dialed on the outside call for which the feature was used except account codes You can program a Save Number Redial button on a system phone to access the feature with one touch If you do you can press the button to save the number and press the button later to redial the number You can program this feature on more than one button to save more than one number See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button 5 237 Feature Reference Using 5 238 4 Press 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To save a number from a system phone press the programmed button or press after dialing the nu
171. Telephone buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed for system features such as Exclusive Hold or Conference Drop or for telephone numbers so you can use the feature or dial the phone number with one touch Once programmed these buttons are called Auto Dial buttons because simply pressing the button automatically dials the feature code or telephone number A user who has a system phone with programmable buttons should consider programming them with a combination of frequently used features and outside and intercom telephone numbers Telephone Programming Options Programming a Receptionist s Extension Call Handling Options If you set up a centralized telephone answering position at extension 10 use the following settings to customize it Call Answering lf the receptionist should answer all calls use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension 10 Set Line Ringing for all lines at extension 10 to the desired number of Ring set the lines assigned at each user s extension to Delayed Ring or No Ring In Hybrid mode Immediate Call Answering is the factory setting Lines are assigned as individual line buttons on the phone at extension 10 and all pool buttons assigned to users extensions are set to No Ring Backup Call Answering lf the receptionist should answer some lines only when a user does not pick up set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to Delayed Ring set the lines or
172. To manually ring or page a Calling Group E Lift the handset and press ntercom You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To manually transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 2 While on a call press rans Dial C and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring Standard Phone To ring or page a Calling Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 4 All available extensions in the Calling Group ring To make a paging call press and a group number 1 4 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are not busy in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page 5 147 Feature Reference To transfer a call to a Calling Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear interc
173. UTPUT FORMAT DIAL 610 p 5 243 DIAL 1 15 digits 2 24 digits SMDR TALK TIME DIAL 611 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active Y CONTACT CLOSURE GROUP DIAL 612 DIAL a group number 1 or 2 DIAL an extension number 10 41 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group p 5 247 CONTACT CLOSURE OPERATION TYPE DIAL 613 DIAL a Contact Closure 1 or 2 DIAL 1 1 Second On 2 3 Seconds On 3 5 Seconds On 4 Toggle p _ 5 94 MUSIC ON HOLD VOLUME 9 1 DIAL 614 p 2198 DIAL NORWOOD nue uw tou ue REMOTE ADMINISTRATION PASSWORD p _5 230 3 0 DIAL 730 No Password 8 dashes display Active password up to 8 alphanumeric characters Password can only be changed at Extension 10 or 11
174. Use Contact Closure Group 612 to assign extension Y to Contact Closure Group 1 This extension can activate Contact Closure 1 4 Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to set Contact Closure 1 to Option 3 5 Seconds On Credit Card Scanners Credit Card Scanners Many retail businesses and restaurants use credit card scanners to get instant approval of credit card purchases The system allows your credit card scanners to share the lines in your system as shown in Figure 4 7 You can install the credit card scanner on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide Figure 4 7 Credit Card Scanner Using Credit Card Scanners When you make a call on the credit card scanner an outside line is automatically selected If you combine the credit card scanner with a system phone or standard phone you cannot use the phone while the credit card scanner is operating You can use only one of the devices at a time Programming Credit Card Scanners 1 O oa A O If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign the lines you want the scanner to use to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the scanner to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any i
175. Voice interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Your voice is heard through the recipient s handset or speaker Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If the call is accepted hang up to complete the transfer The call rings at the recipient s extension If the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the switchhook again to reconnect to the caller Unique Line Ringing 209 Release 3 0 or Later Unique Line Ringing 209 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature applies only to MLS PARTNER and TransTalk phones This feature allows a ringing pattern maximum of eight to be assigned on a per line basis for users to differentiate by sound which line is ringing Once a ring pattern is assigned to a line incoming calls on that line ring with the assigned ring pattern Incoming calls that are transferred to another station ring with the assigned ring pattern followed by two tra
176. What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code a If you can make a call the problem is solved f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate for all lines in the pool m If you can make a call the problem is solved lf the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting for the extension What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Pool Access Restriction 315 for the extension u f someone changed the Pool Access Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Pool Access Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The pool may not be assigned to the extension What to do Check Pool Extension Assignment 314 to see if the pool is assigned to the extension m Ifthe pool is not assigned assign it f the pool is assigned go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Not enough lines are assigned to the pool to support usage What to do Check Pool Line Assignment 207 to see if an appropriate number of lines are assigned to the pool Other Problems with Phon
177. a held or transferred call on the line Direct Line Pickup cannot be used to access an active call at an extension that has Privacy activated or that is part of a Conference Call or a held call at an extension that used Exclusive Hold Calls picked up with this feature get Caller ID information unless Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is used to prevent users at specific extensions from viewing Caller ID for ringing calls Considerations This feature is useful when users are requested or paged to pick up a call on a specific line that does not appear on their phone a Users cannot access conference calls using this feature a You can program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Direct Line Pickup Active Line button 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 5 109 Feature Reference Using 5 110 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press left 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone 1 If you want lift the
178. a quiet area such as a library Lucent Technologies offers several compatible alerts Speakerphones provide hands free two way operation of a phone without lifting the handset Combining a speakerphone with a system phone or a standard phone in a conference room or office is an inexpensive way for several people at a meeting to conference in other parties In conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the SoundStation from Lucent Technologies is recommended since the built in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use Headsets allow users to hold hands free conversations A headset is a combination earphone and microphone worn on the head useful for receptionists salespeople or others who need to have their hands free while talking on the phone Lucent Technologies offers several compatible headsets Overview a Specialty Handsets are designed for those individuals who need greater functionality than that provided by the handsets on system phones and standard phones For example an amplified handset is available for all PARTNER phones for hard of hearing users a In Range Out of Building IROB protectors are required to prevent electrical surges from damaging your system when phones or other standard devices such as a doorphone are installed in a location other than the building where the control unit is installed The system supports the Lucent Technologies IROB protector which provides coverage for up
179. able button 4 To specify the extension to be answered press left iniercom followed by 6 and the two digit system extension number For example to answer a call ringing at extension 23 press left intercom 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press and the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked 5 57 Feature Reference Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial plus the two digit number of the extension at which the call is ringing or parked 5 58 Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later Call Screening F25 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system and an MLS or PARTNER system phone This feature is not available on Tip Ring phones Call Screening allows a user to listen to a caller leaving a message in the user s mailbox gt NOTE It is recommended for security purposes that you use Station Lock F21 to prevent misuse of this feature If Station Lock F21 is activated Call Screening will not work Centralized Programming is required to program Call Screening on an extension button Once the button is programmed the user can turn the feature on prime it by pressing the button Calls will now be screened unti
180. access to specific pools m Individual lines can be assigned to an extension with pool buttons as long as the lines are not part of any pool At installation the system assigns all outside lines to the main pool and assigns the main pool to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of all system phones except extension 10 If desired you can remove some of the lines from the main pool and create auxiliary pools Then you can assign pools and or individual lines on a per extension basis FCC Registration In the continental U S your system s mode of operation must be registered with the FCC as either KF Key Function for Key or MF Multifunction for Hybrid If the system is registered as KF no outside lines can be pooled if the system is registered as MF lines can be pooled and individual lines also can be assigned directly to line buttons Overview Telephones System Telephones This guide refers to Lucent Technologies telephones specifically designed to work with the system as system phones These include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 6 telephones You can also use MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 and the TransTalk 9000 series wireless phones including MDW 9000 MDW 9010 MDW 9030P and MDW 9031P Pocketphone although they are not discussed in this guide For information about an MLS model MLC model or TransTalk 9000 series phone refer to the documentation that came with the p
181. act Closures on the Contact Closure Adjunct Contact Closure Operation Type 613 specifies the length of time that each Contact Closure remains active Contact Closure F41 and F42 can be programmed on feature buttons so that the Contact Closures can be activated by pressing the buttons Programming m AA Extensions 607 identifies an extension to which an auto attendant is connected This lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant Also Transfer Return Extension 306 lets you identify the extension to which a call transferred by the auto attendant should be routed if the destination extension does not answer The call reporting device uses the following procedures SMDR Record Type 608 specifies the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only SMDR Top of Page 609 notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page SMDR Output Format 610 identifies whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report SMDR Talk Time 611 specifies whether or not the call report includes the Talk field which records the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system A
182. actory and no backups have been recorded on it yet the filenames will be MAN and AUTO respectively You cannot use these files for a restore they will generate the error message Empty File after you press in Step 4 5 233 Feature Reference 5 234 4 Press to start the restore If the system detects an error before beginning the restore the bottom line of the display shows one of the following messages Insert Card or Insert Valid Card Bad File or Bad File Try Again Incompat Version or Incompatible Versions Empty File See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more information about these messages If the system does not detect an error the restore begins When the restore has completed successfully the bottom line of the display shows Restore Complete for two seconds Then the system resets itself which means that all calls in progress are disconnected You are no longer in System Programming mode If the restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restore Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings You are no longer in System Programming mode Try the restore again Ring on Transfer 119 Ring on Transfer 119 Description This System Programming procedure lets you specify what callers hear while they are being transferred If Rin
183. ader after changing SMDR Output Format or SMDR Talk Time When this feature is used the system prints a new call report header Related Features Considerations E E Using 2 3 You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to active to print on call reports the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system You can use Display Language 303 to specify the language in which the call report page header should print This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code directly Make sure the paper in the printer is aligned at the top of a new page Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O The system responds by printing the call report page header Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 249 Feature Reference Special Dialing Functions Description This feature lets you add special characters for System Speed Dial numbers Personal Speed Dial numbers
184. age replaces the default information on the top line of the telephone display for 15 seconds System Reset Programming Saved 728 System Reset Programming Saved 728 Description This System Programming procedure resets the system while retaining the currently programmed settings Reset the system only when advised to do so by technical support personnel Related Features After a power failure or system reset Considerations Automatic System Answer Button 111 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Night Service Button 503 and Station Lock return to the status on or off that they were in immediately prior to the power failure or system reset The VMS Cover button and Privacy button return to the status on or off determined by the programmed setting of Automatic VMS Cover 310 and Automatic Extension Privacy 304 respectively For example If Automatic Extension Privacy is Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be on again after the system reset However if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned and the Privacy button is on when a system reset occurs the Privacy button will be off after the system reset All other active features at an extension are reset to the default settings For example if an extension has calls forwarded to another extension resetting the system turns off Call Forwarding if the feature is programmed on a button with lights
185. al and safety requirements The IC does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that is permissible to connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring for single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or any equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users for their own protection should ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas A CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or electrician as appropriate To prevent overloading the Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percen
186. al 9 A display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play 5 Press The following display appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play 6 At this point To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the procedure for recording a message a To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure To exit the procedure hang up the handset 5 108 Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Direct Line Pickup Active Line I68LL Description This feature allows users to access a ringing or held call or to join a call in progress on a specific outside line where LL is a system line number This feature is useful for picking up a ringing or held call or for joining a call on a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features a lfa line is idle users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information about accessing an idle line see Direct Line Pickup ldle Line a lf Line Access Restriction 302 or pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access or Out Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to answer a call on that line which is ringing at another extension but the user can join a call or access
187. al Delay is Active the system permits star codes that meet the Bellcore standard a 2 digit codes where the first digit is 0 1 or 4 9 and the second digit is 0 9 for example 67 70 a 3 digit codes where the first digit is 2 or 3 the second digit is 0 9 and the third digit is 0 9 for example 210 Therefore when Star Code Dial Delay is Active the system resets dialing restrictions after leading star codes The system checks the first two digits dialed If the first digit is a or the first two digits are 11 the system then checks whether the following two or three digits are a star code The digits that follow the star code are then compared again to the restrictions More than one star code can be dialed at the beginning of a dialing sequence the system s number restrictions will still work properly with restriction checking resetting as often as necessary For example 67 705552539 could be dialed to block Caller ID information and to turn off Call Waiting the system would still check to see whether the 555 2539 number is restricted Second Dial Tone After a star code is dialed some Central Offices respond by providing a second dial tone as a prompt for the caller to enter more digits Usually the second dial tone is provided immediately but if the tone is delayed the caller should wait for the dial tone before continuing to dial The system may not recognize the numbers dialed before the second dial tone whi
188. al code on a button on their phones An extension cannot be used for a doorphone and a hotline at the same time However hotlines and doorphones can have the same alert extensions You should not assign doorphones to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules Remove voice messaging system mailboxes from doorphone extensions You cannot bridge two doorphones together Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Valid Entries Any extensions except 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules None Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a doorphone extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H for doorphone 1 or for doorphone 2 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the doorphone extension number For example to identify extension 20 as a doorphone extension press 2 or press to unassign an existing doorphone extension 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 125 Feature Reference Emergency Phone Number List 406 Description This System Programming procedure creates a list of up to 10 telephone numbers that all users can dial regardless of dialing restrictions provided they have access to an outside line Typical list entries include fire police and eme
189. al the extension number of the covering extension To remove Call Coverage 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial your extension number twice 5 49 Feature Reference Call Coverage Rings 116 Release 2 0 only Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions programmed for Call Coverage defines the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension Related Features a Call Coverage redirects an extension s covered calls to the covering extension You must use Line Coverage Extension 208 to designate an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage for that line f an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Then If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Valid Entries 1 9 av Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming butt
190. alfunctioning the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer its authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC In the event repairs are needed on this equipment please contact your local Authorized Dealer or the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 For warranty information see Appendix B Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the local telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service Hearing Aid Compatibility All system phones are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids as prescribed by the FCC Industry Canada IC Notification and Repair Information The Industry Canada IC label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operation
191. aller ID For more information see Caller ID 308EC Expansion Module Release 2 0 or later provides expanded line and extension capability It has jacks for three outside lines and eight extensions Using combinations of modules you can have a maximum of 40 extensions with 15 lines one ACS processor module and four 308EC modules or 19 lines with eight extensions one ACS processor module and four 400 modules To get Caller ID first you must subscribe to the service from your local phone company if it is available on a per line basis then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the 206EC 308EC and or 400EC modules Any users with system display phones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get Caller ID For more information see Caller ID Hereafter references to 206 modules include 206E 206EC and all 206 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Similarly references to 400 modules include 400E 400EC and all 400 modules used with previous releases of the PARTNER product line Any 200 modules can also be used If you want message waiting capability on standard phones that are equipped with LED compatible message waiting lights you must connect those phones to extension jacks on a PARTNER ACS processor module a 308EC module or on Release 3 0 R3 0 or later 206 modules Table 1 1 Summary of Module Capacities Module Lines Extensions 308EC 3 8 200
192. allows the user to listen to a caller leaving a message in the user s mailbox Call Waiting A feature that lets standard phone users receive notification of a second incoming call when they are busy on a call The user can press the switchhook to put the first call on hold and answer the second call Caller ID A feature that displays an incoming caller s number or name on a system display phone To get Caller ID you must subscribe to the service if it is available from your local phone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Caller ID Inspect A feature that allows you to view incoming Caller ID or Call Coverage information on other lines while active on a call without placing the call on hold or hanging up Caller ID Logging and Dialing Release 2 0 or later A feature that allows you to log and view Caller ID information and to return logged calls using a dial button See also Caller ID Caller ID Name Number A feature that allows you to toggle between a caller s Caller ID name and Caller ID number Caller ID Service A subscription service available from some local telephone companies providing the telephone number and or name of the caller on lines that have the service Calling Group A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously by dialing a group calling code See also Calling Restriction A feature that lets you control telephone use at specific extensions Centralized Telephone
193. am System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button preferably one with lights 4 Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Press the programmed button or press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 The green light is on steady 2 If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Step 1 to deactivate the Contact Closure The green light goes off Standard Phone To activate a Contact Closure 1 Pick up the handset to get an intercom dial tone 2 Press for Contact Closure 1 or for Contact Closure 2 3 If the Contact Closure Operation Type for that Contact Closure is set to Toggle repeat Steps 1 and 2 to deactivate the Contact Closure 5 91 Feature Reference Contact Closure Group 612 Description The PARTNER ACS processor module has a jack to connect a Contact Closure Adjunct that has two Contact Closures This System Programming procedure allows you to specify which user extensions can activate each Contact Closure The Contact Closures can control devices such as electronic door locks Related Features Valid Entries 1 Assigned to the Contact Closure Group 2 Not Assigned to the Contact Cl
194. amming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 162 Hunt Group Extensions 505 To assign extensions to a Hunt Group t Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program O at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 8 For example to select group 1 press T A display similar to the following appears Hunt Group 1 Extension Enter the desired extension number For example to select extension 31 press To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays At this point To assign or unassign another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 163 Feature Reference Intercom Dial Tone 309 Description This System Programming procedure determines the type of dial tone that the system provides at an extension It may be necessary to change this setting to Machine outside line dial tone for an autodialing device such as a fax or modem that has trouble making calls For example if you have a modem that checks for outside line dial tone before dialing
195. amming mode From a system phone press the programmed button to turn Privacy on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Privacy is on 5 223 Feature Reference Recall F03 Description This feature causes the system to send a timed switchhook flash over the telephone line to recall a new dial tone or to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Related Features Considerations 5 224 If users have trouble with Recall use Recall Timer Duration 107 to adjust the length of the Recall signal Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 You can press to insert a Recall signal in an Auto Dial or Speed Dial number provided it is the first character in the stored number For examples see Special Dialing Functions jon page 5 250 Using Recall on an intercom call disconnects the call Whenever your PBX or Centrex documentation tells you to press the switchhook when you are on an outside call use the Recall feature instead If you are already on a call most PBX or Centrex systems require that you press the switchhook to get a new dial tone then dial a feature access code to access a specific PBX or Centrex service Onasystem phone press a programmed button or press to use Recall On a standard phone first press and release the
196. and all idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 See a so Loudspeaker paging system SMDR Station Message Detail Recording See Call Reporting Speed Dialing A feature that lets a user dial a telephone number quickly by dialing a short code Standard Phone An industry standard touch tone or rotary phone such as you might have in your home Some standard phones include special feature buttons for frequently used calling functions See also Feature Phoneland lndustry standard Device Star Codes Codes typically dialed before an outgoing call that provide special services from the local phone company Central Office For example 67 enables a dialer to block the sending of Caller ID infor mation to the called party Station See Extension Station Lock A feature that lets a user lock his or her extension to prevent other users from making outside calls from the locked extension Station Message Detail Recording SMDR See Call Reporting Subscriber 1 On a voice messaging system a user who has a mailbox in the system 2 A user who has access to an outside line with special features such as Caller ID System The Lucent Technologies control unit and system phones that you purchased plus all other telecommunications devices that are connected to your control unit System Manager The person in your business who is responsible for managing your system including system programming System Phones The Lucen
197. andset symbol indicates whether the call was answered at the extension If the call was not answered this column is blank m Inthe next column D indicates that a user attempted to use automatic dialing to return the call If no calloack was attempted the column is blank 2 8 10 37am IO 1 t Prev Erase More Figure 5 4 Call Status Display You have several options at this display a Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed 5 76 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Release 2 0 or Later Press the Prev button to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record a Press the Erase button to erase the log record see instructions that follow Press the More button to view the Telephone Number Display Erasing Call Log Records When the Erase button is pressed on the Call Status Display the Entry Erased Display shown in Figure 5 5 appears Entry Erased Next Prev All Figure 5 5 Entry Erased Display You have several options at the Entry Erased Display m Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed Press the Prev button to view the Call Status Display of the previous log record a Press the A11 button to erase all call log records for this ext
198. another Speed Dial number to dial the account code Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Mic HFAN Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 600 through 699 No number assigned to any code v Programming 5 266 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program System Speed Dial numbers 1 Press at extension 10 or 11 A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 2 Select a three digit code by pressing and dialing three digits between 600 and 699 For example to select code 600 press If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank 3 Enter the number For example to program 555 4757 press 6 O The following display appears 5554757 To mark the System Speed Dial number to override dialing restrictions precede the number by a For example to mark the number 555 1001 press amp O The following display appears 5551001 System Speed Dial Numbers 4 At this point To program another System Speed Dial number start from Step 2 To program over an existing number enter
199. ar the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 5 291 Feature Reference 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously 5 292 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Voice Mailbox Transfer F14 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system It is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user transfer a caller directly to a specific extension s voice mailbox in order for the caller to leave a message without first ringing the extension This feature is useful when a user knows that a co worker is away from his or her desk Related Features Considerations While a call is being transferred the caller h
200. ary processor module and all of the idle systems phones with speakers assigned to Calling Group 1 Related Features You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to identify the extensions in Calling Group 1 Use Loudspeaker Paging to make announcements only over the loudspeaker paging system Considerations You can program a Simultaneous Paging button on a system phone to access with one touch the loudspeaker paging system and idle system phones with speakers in Calling Group 1 m If the loudspeaker paging system or Calling Group 1 is in use a user attempting to make an announcement hears a busy tone m f someone answers a loudspeaker page from a system phone in Calling Group 1 the page becomes an intercom call a f some extensions in Calling Group 1 have standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phones those extensions are not included in the simultaneous page because they do not have built in speakers Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Simultaneous Paging button 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left intercom amp O Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode o
201. as a pool assigned flashes To remove all existing line assignments press before selecting a line Enter the line number to be assigned For example to select line 1 press 5 175 Feature Reference 5 176 4 At this point If you want to assign the line to the first available button with lights press until the display reads Line Assignment 15 L01 1 Assigned If you want to remove a line assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 2 Not Assigned If you want to assign the line to a specific button press A display similar to the following appears Line Assignment 15 L01 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the line to that button If you use option 3 after a line has been assigned the line moves from the old button to the new button you select 5 At this point To program another line for this extension press or until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Coverage Extension 208 Line Coverage Extension 208 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage
202. at any extension on specific lines Use the Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate lines with the extension that will log all calls then use the Caller ID Log All Calls 319 feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log Answered Calls is set to active Considerations 5 68 10 log Caller ID information you must subscribe to a Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules a You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Release 2 0 or Later Valid Entries To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights 1 Active answered calls logged 2 Not active answered calls are not logged v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 at
203. atic 123 2 20 5 41 5 43 6 17 46 19 _ __ manual 124 2 20 5 44 5 45 6 20 6 21 ___ PE PC Card 542 e a M inserting 5 5 42 problems with 6 20 Bed and Breakfast Features outgoing call restriction button 114 2 14 2 20 5 206 _ wake up service button 115 5 294 ss Busy Extension Indication seqLight Patterns Cid Busy Lamp Fields BLF Feature sed Light Patterns Button Locations for Programming at Extension 10 11 description 222 e Iemm Buttons auto dial system shane a Call Accounting see Station Message Detail Recording Call Assistant Intercom Autodialer 1 16 5 17 Call Coverage 1 3 Call Coverage 116 Rings 5 50 5 51 Call Coverage Rings 116 5 50 ___ Call Coverage Rings 320 5 51_ O Call Follow Me light patterns Call Forwarding description light patterns Call Handling IN 1 Index features 3 Call Intercept Feature AR Call Park Call Pickup 5 57 OSS Call Report 4 9 5 245 5 249 _ _ Call Reporting Devices 4 9 CS Call Restriction Outgoing 401 5 204 Call Waiting 316 Caller ID call waiting description device 4 3 information viewing 5 63 5 66 modules required for printing information SMDR with 5 65 sd Caller ID Call Logging iali description 5 74 dialing logged call numbers Caller ID Inspect 5 66 Caller ID Log All Calls 319 description 5 79 o programming 5 80 5 800 Caller ID Log Answe
204. ations 318 feature to associate the lines with extensions for logging unanswered calls You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 A system display phone is recommended for the covering extension so the user can identify coverage calls coverage Call for XX appears on the display when a coverage call rings at a covering extension rather than Caller ID information if available If the covering extension has an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the light shows green flutter while the coverage call is ringing at the covering extension If the user at the extension lifts the handset he or she will be connected to this call Intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership can be covered Group calls forwarded calls transfer return calls voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls Wake Up Service calls and calls to doorphone alert extensions cannot be covered Do not designate any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system as a covering extension A single extension can cover multiple extensions however an extension programmed for Call Coverage can have only one covering extension Only one Call Coverage button can be programmed per extension 5 47 Feature Reference Programming The user at an extension who has activated Call Coverage can intercept an outside call routed for coverage by pressing the o
205. ax comes in on a line other than line A you can transfer the call to fax 2 see Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine on page 4 17 If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine see Using the Fax Using the Fax Management Feature jon page 4 16 If fax 1 is set for Delayed Ring on line A fax 1 can pick up fax transmissions when fax 2 does not answer To Program Fax 1 Send Ext X 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X including line A If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove line A from all pools Then use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign line A and any other individual lines to extension X 2 Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first line A selected last For pooled extensions set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select pools and outside lines first line A selected last 3 Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X to Delayed Ring set all other lines and pools to No Ring Modems 4 5 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 50
206. ay 112 irect Extension Dial Lines 205 irect Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 ool Access Restriction 315 ool Extension Assignment 314 ool Line Assignment 207 MDR Talk Time 611 PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 or later The new programmable features in Release 3 0 are O all Screening F25 Fax Calling Tone Detection 505 Group 8 ecord a Call F24 ight Standard Time 126 gt D c e 3 D oO o D 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 2 8 Changing Settings after Installation a Unique Line Ringing 209 Call Coverage Rings 320 E VMS Cover Rings 321 For more information about setting these features see Chapter 5 Feature Reference For more information on using the PC Card Software Upgrade see Upgrading the PARTNER ACS jin this section For more information on using the PARTNER Voice Messaging PC card see PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Installation Programming and Use Changing the System Clock You may need to change the system clock for daylight saving time after a prolonged power failure or after a system reset Use System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 to set the current date day and time Adding New Lines Key Extensions Use this section to add individual lines to pooled extensions or to add new lines to key extensions all extensions in Key mode in Hybrid mode extension
207. ay phone at extension 10 3 Press the button Dial The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads DXD 1 Record If a message was previously recorded a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play Press A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a tone and you can begin recording your message While you are recording the following display appears Press to stop Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 40 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears DXD 1 Record 2 Play At this point To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this procedure a To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the playback procedure that follows To exit the procedure hang up the handset To play back a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 5 107 Feature Reference 3 Press the button 4 Di
208. being answered by these features to be completed 2 Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 3 Press the i button 4 Dial A display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 2 A display similar to the following appears Message Playback After the message is played back you hear a confirmation tone and a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play At this point To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the procedure for recording a message a To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 directly in this current procedure To exit from the procedure hang up the handset Automatic VMS Cover 310 Automatic VMS Cover 310 Description This feature applies only if you have a voice messaging system This System Programming procedure automatically routes an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls to the Call Answer Service of the voice messaging system after a specified number of rings default for all system extensions is three rings so callers can leave a message Related Features To manually change an extension s VMS Cover state users can program the VMS Cover feature on a button with lights Users can then press the VMS Cover button to activate the feature green light on or deactivate the feature green light off If Automatic VMS Cover is Assigned at an
209. bers which a user can dial by pressing or ona standard phone followed by a three digit code System Password 403 creates a password that can be entered at any PARTNER model or MLS model system phone to override dialing restrictions for the duration of a call The system password should be changed periodically to prevent unauthorized use and toll fraud To override all dialing restrictions except Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction and Night Service with System Password 403 use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create up to eight lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Then use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more of the lists to an extension Setting Up Groups of Extensions 2 16 You can set up four types of extension groups Pickup Group Extensions 501 assigns extensions to one of four Pickup Groups A Pickup Group lets any user in the system answer outside calls for any extension in that group Calling Group Extensions 502 assigns extensions to one of four Calling Groups A Calling Group lets users ring or page all extensions in that group simultaneously or transfer calls into the group Additionally Simultaneous Paging lets users make announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the speakers of idle system phones belonging to Calling Group 1 Night Service Group Extensions 504 assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Nig
210. button labeled Fax 30 is programmed as a Fax Management button for the fax machine connected to extension 30 The lights next to the button show what is happening at the fax machine for example red broken flutter indicates that the fax machine is not responding for example when it is out of paper For more information see Using the Fax Management Feature 2 29 Programming PARTNER 34D Phone Line Programmable Buttons Any unused line button is programmable o Night 6vc INR SNR VMMsgs VMBox Grp Page oad Ext 23 Ext 24 Ext 25 Ext 26 Ext 27 Ext 28 Ext 17 Ext 18 Ext 19 Ext 20 Ext 21 Ext 22 OO 00 00 oO OOF OO Ext 11 Ext 12 Ext 13 Ext 14 Ext 15 Ext 16 E Line7 Line8 MS Bill Fax 30 Sales b st Support o Line Line2 LineS Line4 LineS Lines OO OOF o0 OO 00 OO OO a0 OO 00 OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 oO 00 Figure 2 5 Button Programming for Receptionist s Phone Alternatively the receptionist can use an Intercom Autodialer for the extensions the receptionist dials most frequently This leaves buttons on the phone free for more features and phone numbers Using Telephone Programming There are two ways to program a telephone Centralized Telephone Programm
211. button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the phone number To reserve a busy line or pool so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free this is useful when you share a line such as a WATS line with other people 1 Press the busy line or pool button red light is on steady without lifting the handset or pressing px 2 When the line is free and your phone beeps lift the handset and dial the number If more than one person reserves a line all their phones beep when the line is free The first person to pick up the phone after the beep gets the line and the other reservations are canceled Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial to get an outside line You hear outside line dial tone 3 Dial the phone number If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the PBX or Centrex system To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial 8 plus the two digit line number 3 Dial the phone number To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 3 Dial the phone number 5 185 Feature Reference How to Mak
212. button tell you when the fax machine is in use available or not answering for example when it is out of paper You can also use the button to transfer calls from your extension to the fax machine with a single touch Programming for Fax Management 4 16 To program a Fax Management button first assign the fax machine extension using Fax Machine Extensions 601 See Chapter 5 for details Then program the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button For more information see Auto Dialing jon page 5 17 Fax Machines Using the Fax Management Button The lights next to the Fax Management button show what is happening at the fax machine see Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Fax Management Button Light Patterns Light Pattern Indicates Red broken flutter Fax trouble The fax machine is not answering If broken flutter occurs because the fax machine is out of paper refill the paper The light clears the next time the machine transmits or receives a call If the machine takes longer than four rings to answer the light shows fax trouble when the machine does answer the light changes to fax busy red steady Red steady Fax busy The fax machine is busy transmitting or receiving a call Green flutter Fax transfer return A call you transferred to the fax machine was not answered and is returning to you Transferring a Call to the Fax Machine Automatic Transfer of Calls to Fax Machin
213. call or manually signal to audibly alert another predetermined extension Grouping of extensions for flexibility in directing and answering calls Integrated voice messaging support with the PARTNER MAIL VS system or PARTNER MAIL system so callers can reach a desired extension or group without operator assistance and leave messages at unanswered or busy extensions PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card provides a voice messaging service as well as effective solutions for after hours call answering and back up for the receptionist Available with Release 1 1 or later Caller ID support on system display phones if Caller ID service is available from your local telephone company and you subscribe to it Power failure operation with standard phones allowing you to make and receive calls during a power failure while retaining programmed equipment settings for up to four days An optional Uninterruptible Power Supply or UPS is also available to allow full equipment operation during a power failure 1 1 Overview Centrex or PBX operation support including one touch dialing of feature access codes on system phones a Flexible dialing restrictions and permissions so you can control telephone activity and phone bills Special hospitality features that let Bed and Breakfast proprietors for example regulate phone use in guest rooms and schedule wake up calls for guests Easy to use programming procedures making it simple f
214. calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed 3 Lift the handset of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 Press intercom Dial The current time of day remains on the second line of the display for the duration of this procedure The top line of the display reads ASA 1 Record If a message was recorded previously a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play Press 1 A display similar to the following appears for three seconds Record at the tone After three seconds you hear a confirmation tone and you can begin recording your message While you are recording a display similar to the following appears Press to stop Press when you are done recording If the allotted time 20 seconds for the message is completed before you press you hear a tone to let you know that the system has stopped recording 5 35 Feature Reference 5 36 When you finish recording a display similar to the following appears ASA 1 Record 2 Play 8 At this point To re record the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in this current procedure a To play back the message follow the instructions from Step 5 in the following procedure To exit from the procedure hang up the handset To play back an Automatic System Answer message 1 Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of
215. cations 68306 16 Mhz processor 512Kbyte RAM 512Kbyte FLASH ROM Polarity reversal detection on the CO line port Custom VLSI DSP ASIC 16bit 52 Mhz VLSI Very Large Scale Integration DSP Digital Signal Processor ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit Extension Jack Specifications 206 module Ringing voltage 5VDC 140 VDC peak to peak trapezoidal wave shaping 35 to 38 Volt talk battery Ringing frequency 20 Hz Extension Jack Specifications ACS Processor and 308EC module Ringing voltage 55VRMS Balanced ringing within a trapezoidal wave shaping 38 to 42 Volt talk battery Ringing frequency 20 HZ Polarity reversal detection on the CO line port 56K modem bypass to the Power Fail Transfer PFT relays PAGE Jack Specifications Draws current on inner wire pair e Provides paging contact closure on outer wire pair e 600 Ohm impedance Music on Hold Jack e Accepts 2 Volts at 50 Kohms maximum input Specifications e 0 18 dB attenuation Specifications CONTACT CLOSURE Adjunct Jack Specifications Operates up to 150 feet 45 72 meters from control unit using 24 gauge solid conductor wire if 2 Contact Closures used up to 800 feet 243 84 meters from control unit using 24 gauge solid conductor wire if only 1 Contact Closure used Install the Contact Closure Adjunct in the same building as the control unit cannot be installed out of doors Has three te
216. ccess a line in a pool that the user is already using system phone users can press and dial the pool access code If all lines in a pool are busy the user hears busy tone Automatic Line Selection can be programmed to change the way the system selects pools when a user lifts the handset to make a call To restrict an extension s access to all lines assigned to a pool use Pool Access Restriction 315 If users are not allowed outgoing access to a pool they hear a reorder tone after dialing the pool access code at the intercom dial tone Related Features You can store an outside number an intercom number or a feature code on a button so a user can dial the number with a single touch For information about programming and using Auto Dial buttons see Auto You can program outside numbers for one extension or for the entire system so a user can dial a number by pressing or ona standard phone plus a two or three digit code 80 99 for Personal Speed Dial numbers 600 699 for System Speed Dial numbers For more information see Personal Speed Dial Numbers and System Speed Dial If a user lifts the handset before pressing a line or pool button the system automatically selects the first available outside line or pool or the intercom The order in which the system makes the selection is determined by the Automatic Line Selection for the extension On either a system phone or a standard phone users also can use Direct Line P
217. ccount Code Eniry lets users enter account codes for outside telephone calls incoming or outgoing if used the account codes are included on the call report The voice messaging system uses the following procedures Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 the VMS Hunt Group Group Call Distribution 206 assigns lines to the VMS Hunt Group so calls can ring directly into the voice messaging system and receive Automated Attendant Service Line Coverage Extension 208 identifies an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so calls on that line can ring directly into the owner s voice mailbox when either Automatic VMS Cover 310 or VMS Cover F15 is on at the owner s extension VMS Hunt Delay 506 determines when outside calls should be answered by the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system The system allows you to assign the number of rings 0 6 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 determines when outside calls should ring the VMS Hunt Group always day only or night only depending on the status of the Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Automatic VMS Cover 310 determines whether or not an extension s unanswered intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership are automatically covered by the voice messaging system 2 18 System Programm
218. ce signal the extension LINE RINGING PRESS each line or pool button until the desired ringing option appears in the display e Immediate ring green steady v Lines e No ring green fast flutter v Pools e Delayed ring starts ringing after 20 seconds green slow flashing ees System Features ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY p 5 7 CALL PICKUP p 5 57 DIRECT LINE PICKUP ACTIVE LINE PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button PRESS a programmable button p 5 109 PRESS Feature 4 2 PRESS left intercom fe DIAL left intercom fe a DIAL the two digit extension number DIRECT LINE PICKUP IDLE LI CALL SCREENING p 5 59 30 PRESS a programmable button P 5 111 PRESS a programmable button with lights DIAL lett intercom 8 PRESS Feature 2 5 BACKGROUND MUSIC p 5 39 PRESS a programmable button PRESS Feature 1 2 CALL COVERAGE i DO NOT DISTURB p 5 121 PRESS a progr mmabje button 20 CALLER ID CALL LOGGING amp DIALING PRESS a programmable button with lights PRESS Feature PRESS a programmable button p 5 72 DIAL optional two or orginating PRESS ae e 2 3 OD PRESS Feaue o a extension number DIAL optional two digit covering CALLER ID INSPECT 0 5 66 EXCLUSIVE HOLD 0 2129 extension number PRESS a programmable button PRESS rogrammable button with lights PRESS p oi a jep G PRESS Feature fo 2 CA
219. cedures 207 313 314 and 315 shown in square dotted boxes E EENEN RRR RRR RRR RRR 20 EXTERNAL HOTLINE DIAL 311 DIAL a system extension number 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to program another extension DIAL VOICE INTERRUPT ON BUSY DIAL 312 DIAL a system extension number DIAL Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension v BEE BERR RRR Rees E E LINE ACCESS MODE p 5 169 DIAL 313 All ASSOCIATION m DIAL a system extension number W m DIAL 1 Pooled all extensions m except 10 E E a a a cn dal ha a ad 2 Key v extension 10 only e207 DIAL 314 DIAL a system extension number E To remove all existing pool assignments press Remove before selecting a line DIAL a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 DIAL 1 Assigned 880 Not Assigned v 881 882 88 3 Select Button then press a programmable button auxiliary pools only PRESS Next Item to program another pool for this extension To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps BEER ERE RPP eee v BERBER BEEBE RB RBBB ee m POOL ACCESS RESTRICTION To associate another extension mPOOL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT m PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure 2 0 20 VMS COVER RINGS 3 0 CALL WAITING p 5 61 DIAL 316 DIAL a system extens
220. ch may cause the call to be misrouted You can use the Star Code Dial Delay setting to force a delay in Auto Dialed calls after the star code so that the system waits to dial the rest of the digits until the second dial tone begins You can program an automatic pause of 0 to 5 seconds after each star code that is autodialed whether from a touch tone or a rotary phone Star Code Dial Delay 410 Related Features You can include star codes in Allowed Phone Number Lists and Disallowed Phone Number Lists Star Code Dial Delay settings apply to Auto Dialing Last Number Redial Personal Speed Dial Numbers Save Number Redial and System Speed Dial Numbers If Dial Mode 201 is set to Rotary star codes are entered by dialing 11 instead of If you have users at extensions with Outgoing Call Restriction 401 set to Local Only who are calling out on lines with the Dial Mode 201 set to Rotary you should add 11 to an Allowed Phone Numbers List 407 and assign the list to these extensions Otherwise when the users at the restricted extensions dial 1 to begin a star code the system interprets this as an attempt to place a long distance call the call is blocked and the user hears the reorder tone System Speed Dial Numbers can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting To program enter a Pause followed by the star code and the phone number For example
221. control unit 400 module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that has line jacks for connecting up to four out side lines A Account Code A code of up to 16 digits that is associated with incoming or outgoing telephone calls Entry of an account code may be optional or forced If entered an account code appears on the call record for a call See a so Call Report Forced Account Code Entry and Forced Account Code List Auto Dial Button A programmable telephone button that lets you dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button An Auto Dial button can be used to store a feature code a phone number or an account code so that it can be dialed with one touch See a so Programmable Button Auto Attendant An optional device that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement Automated Attendant Service A voice messaging system feature that answers calls and routes them to the appropriate extension based on caller responses to a recorded announcement See also Auto Attendant and Voice Mes Automatic Daylight Standard Times Release 3 0 or later A feature that automatically updates the system clock for annual Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time changes Automatic System Answer ASA Release 2 0 or later An optional system feature that causes incoming calls to be answered by the system if the receptionist cannot answer within a specified number
222. create the following entry for the Emergency List 911 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Programming Overriding Number on a Disallowed List You can use Emergency List entries to override numbers that would otherwise be disallowed For example if you created Disallowed List entries to prevent calls to area code 201 but you want to allow calls to a specific number in that area code such as the number of a manager who is on call after hours put the number in the Emergency List Toll Call Prefix required 12015556666 and 02015556666 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015556666 See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create an Emergency Phone Number List 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 Select a list entry 01 10 For example to select the third entry press 3 A display similar to the following appears Emergency List 03 Data 3 Enter the telephone number To save the telephone number in memory you must press Enter At this point To enter other phone numbers press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the phone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 a To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove Select another procedure or exit programmi
223. create the lists of disallowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Considerations When a Disallowed Phone Number List is assigned to an extension the list applies to all lines to which the extension has access Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign Disallowed Phone Number Lists to an extension 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 27 press A display similar to the following appears Disallow To 27 List Number 3 Enter the list number 1 8 For example to select list 1 press 4 To assign or unassign the list press until the appropriate value displays 5 At this point a To assign or unassign another list for this extension press or p until the list number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 113 Feature Reference Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Description This System Programming procedure specifies telephone numbers that users cannot dial For example you may want to p
224. ctive Ring Intercom Dial Tone Automatic VMS Cover External Hotline Voice Interrupt On Busy Automatic Line Access Mode Line Ringing Pool Extension Assignment Pool Access Restriction Call Waiting Peon For Release 2 0 only For Release 2 0 and later For Release 2 0 and earlier For Release 3 0 and later Considerations 317 318 320 321 401 405 408 501 502 504 505 601 607 612 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing Caller ID Log Answered Calls Call Coverage Rings VMS Cover Rings Outgoing Call Restriction Disallowed List Assignments Allowed List Assignments Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Hunt Group Extensions Fax Machine Extensions AA Extensions Contact Closure Group Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing a This procedure is skipped in the sequence of programming procedures when cycling To use this procedure enter the code 399 directly For each type of phone program one extension then use this procedure to copy the programming from that extension to the others with the same number of line or pool buttons for example from a PARTNER 18D phone to a PARTNER 18 phone Pooled extension settings can be copied to key extensions except for extension 10 Key extension settings can be copied to pooled extensions 5 96 Copy Settings 399 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming butt
225. d faceplate To do so could result in irreparable damage Repair Information Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your system In Warranty Repairs If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one year warranty period Simply call the hotline and ask for service B 1 Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Business Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control unit and system phones Business Day service is performed during normal business hours However if you need 24 hour service protection during the warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure you can purchase an Around the Clock service contract from your local Lucent Technologies sales office 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only Around the Clock service is not available for phones If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer contact your dealer for repairs Post Warranty Repairs If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post warranty service contract Lucent Technologies service is provided under the terms of that contract To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period you can purchase a
226. d the system denies the user access to an outside line For faster entry of frequently used account codes you can program an account code on an Auto Dial button or as a System or Personal Speed Dial number but not as a Marked System Speed Dial Number See Auto Dialing System Speed Dial Numbers and Personal Speed Dial INumbers for programming instructions When an account code is entered during a call the caller on the other end does not hear the touch tone digits dialed If SMDR is used the account code assigned to incoming or outgoing calls prints on call reports See Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 for more information about call reporting If an account code is entered for an outgoing call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the originating extension as the owner of the call Conversely if an account code is entered for an incoming call and the call is transferred to another extension the call report shows the destination extension as the owner of the call 5 7 Feature Reference Account codes can be changed during a call However only the person who entered the original account code can enter a different account code SMDR prints changed account codes as follows For optional or forced account code entry without a Forced Account Code List the call report prints the last account code entered For forced account code entry with a Forced Account Code
227. d call returns you will not receive notification even if Call Waiting is Assigned to your extension The parked call rings back when your phone is idle To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and the extension number where the call is parked 5 56 Call Pickup I6XX Call Pickup 16XX Description This feature lets users answer any intercom outside or transferred call ringing at another specified extension where XX is a system extension number This feature is useful for officemates who agree to answer each other s calls Related Features Use this feature to retrieve a parked call see Call Park Note that if you use Call Pickup to answer a call that is parked at an extension that also has ringing calls you will be connected to the parked call parked calls take precedence over ringing calls Considerations You can program a Call Pickup button on a system phone to pick up with one touch a call that is ringing or parked at another specified extension Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Call Pickup button 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programm
228. d repeat Steps 4 and 5 To change the phone number you just entered press and repeat Steps 4 and 5 To delete the phone number you just entered press Remove To create another list press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and repeat from Step 2 7 Select another procedure using Next Procedure or Prev Procedure or exit programming mode 5 116 Display Display Description PARTNER model display phones have a 2 line 24 character per line adjustable display area for calling and programming feedback Specifically the display shows Current date excluding year day and time when the phone is idle Account code as it is entered Number dialed when making a call Duration of call call timer Number and name if programmed of the extension calling when receiving an intercom call or transferred call Number and name if programmed of the extension returning a transferred call when no one answers at the destination extension Automated Attendant Voice Messaging System or Direct Extension Dial when a call is transferred from an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Extension Dial feature respectively Transfer from Auto Att or Transfer from VMS or Transfer from Direct Extension Dial if a call is returning to your extension after an unsuccessful transfer by an auto attendant a voice messaging system or the Direct Dial Extension feature respectively Caller ID numb
229. demarks of Lucent Technologies Microsoft is a registered trademark and Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation The SoundStation is a registered trademark of Polycom Inc Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty for this product Refer to Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability in Appendix B of this book Ordering Information The order number for this book is 518 456 163 To order additional books call 1 800 457 1235 or 765 361 5353 For information about ordering other system reference materials replacement parts accessories and other compatible equipment refer to Product Ordering Information in Appendix B Support Telephone Number If you need assistance when programming or using your system contact your local Authorized Dealer or call Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 628 2888 In the continental U S Lucent Technologies provides a toll free customer hotline 24 hours a day Consultation charges may apply Outside the continental U S contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Information References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U S Class A Compliance This equipment in the 5 Slot configuration and in the 2 Slot configuration with a 308EC module or PARTNER MAIL VS has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a C
230. device s user manual For every auxiliary device connected to your system either set the device itself to answer on a later ring when the Line Ringing for the device s extension is set to Immediate Ring or set the extension s Line Ringing to Delayed Ring For a voice messaging system check all of the settings associated with it Refer to the documentation package with your voice mail system for complete details on installing programming and using your system Refer to the documentation with your voice messaging system for complete details If the auxiliary device no longer answers calls automatically the problem is solved If the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 6 13 Troubleshooting Trouble Hearing Called Party Answer Possible Cause 1 f you are using a speakerphone there may be environmental factors that affect the performance of the speaker or microphone for example too much background noise What to do See Speakerphone Performance Tips jon page 3 8 for suggestions on the proper use of the speakerphone If the problem is not solved go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 lf the system is set for touch tone dialing you may have a faulty phone or cord See System Phone Does Not Work on page 6 5 If the system is set for rotary dialing the Rotary Dialing Timeout interval is too long What to do Reset the interval using Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 a If you can hear the ca
231. ding on your business needs a The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System which physically resembles a 206 module resides in the control unit in a 2 or 4 port configuration a PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card in a 2 port configuration only provides four mail boxes The PARTNER MAIL Voice Messaging System in a 2 4 or 6 port configuration is an auxiliary device that connects to the system through extension jacks The PARTNER MAIL system also offers advanced voice mail features such as outcalling group lists broadcast messages and fax management For complete details contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer or refer to the documentation provided with the voice messaging system Delayed Call Handling 4 28 Figure 4 14 shows a PARTNER MAIL VS system that provides delayed call handling This setup allows the receptionist at extension 10 to provide personalized service by answering calls during normal business hours The PARTNER MAIL VS system connected to extensions Z1 and Z2 handles calls when the receptionist is busy or not available so calls do not go unanswered The PARTNER MAIL VS system also answers calls received outside of business hours and prompts callers to leave a message in the receptionist s mailbox This example also includes two user extensions X and Y which are not automatically covered by the PARTNER MAIL VS system This allows the receptionist to give the caller more
232. ds all PARTNER models oaaao oaae Figure 3 1 PARTNER 34D Phone The following buttons and indicators appear on system phones Display PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D only Shows date day and time when the phone is idle number dialed when placing a call extension number and name if programmed calling you or transferring a call to you and duration while a call is in progress When programming shows settings options and prompts To adjust the display contrast on the PARTNER 34D and PARTNER 18D phones press then to decrease the brightness or to increase the brightness while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle Line Programmable Buttons Used for individual outside lines or if no line is assigned on a button for programming telephone or extension numbers or other system features such as Last Number Redial When a line is assigned press the line button to make a call on that specific line lights show status of line When a number feature is programmed press the button to dial the number or use the feature The PARTNER 34D has 36 programmable buttons 32 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18D has 20 programmable buttons 16 with lights and 4 without lights the PARTNER 18 has 16 programmable buttons all with lights the PARTNER 6 has 4 programmable buttons all with lights Intercom Buttons Press to make or answer a call to or form another e
233. e System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 81 Feature Reference Using Press the programmed button to turn Caller ID Name Display on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on Caller ID Name Display is on 5 82 Caller ID Type 122 Caller ID Type 122 Description This System Programming procedure can be set for Singapore or USA operation USA Operation Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming replacing the system date and time display on system phones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information Singapore Operation Caller ID normally displays the number from which the incoming call is coming When there is no incoming number the system detects a P or an O in the reason for DN Directory Number absence field and substitutes the information sent by the local telephone company Central Office in the Name parameter field m Ifthe name is supplied the system displays i
234. e 3 Press a programmable button 4 To program the button to ring the next available extension in the Hunt Group press left and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls To program the button to voice signal the next available extension in a Hunt Group press left ntercom amp O and dial a Hunt Group number 1 8 for ringing calls 1 7 for voice signaled calls Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G Using System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or voice signal an extension in the Hunt Group simply lift the handset or press and press the programmed button If you are voice signaling start talking after the beep To transfer a call to an extension in the Hunt Group while on a call press the programmed button To manually ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset and press ntercom You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting To ma
235. e a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring ring until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring ring ring How to Transfer a Call 5 276 System Phone To pass a call to another extension 1 While active on the call press anst The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone The green light next to the line or pool button winks 2 Dial the extension number or and a Hunt Group number or and a Calling Group number to which you want the call transferred 3 When someone answers announce the call then hang up If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the winking green light to reconnect to the caller Transferring Calls If you do not wish to announce the call hang up as soon as you hear ringing after Step 2 above If no one answers the call rings back at your extension unless a different transfer return extension is programmed for your extension lift the handset and you are reconnected to the caller To make a voice signaled transfer to a system phone in Step 2 of the procedure on the previous page press x plus the two digit extension number Then listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If no one answers or the call is refused press the line or pool button next to the
236. e user presses a pool button or enters a pool access code the system selects a free line from the pool for the user to make the call A user can access a pool as long as there is at least one available line in the pool System Components A major benefit of Hybrid mode is that it allows users who have system phones with fewer buttons to have access to multiple outside lines and various types of pools You can make efficient use of outside lines by grouping those of a similar type or function together For example you can create an auxiliary pool of WATS or international lines and assign the pools to different groups of users Additionally individual lines can be assigned to a manager s extension so that he or she always has access to an outside line In Hybrid mode extension 10 always operates like an extension in Key mode This means that every outside line in the system is associated with a specific line button at extension 10 All other extensions can be set up with access to only lines only pools or a combination of lines and pools Those extensions that have pool buttons even if they also have individual line buttons are called pooled extensions Those extensions that have only line buttons including extension 10 are called key extensions Key extensions cannot access pools If your system is configured for Hybrid mode keep in mind Aline can be assigned to only one pool m Individual extensions can be restricted
237. e 2 0 or later PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 only PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later Overview Table 5 2 Dial Code Feature FO1 Do Not Disturb F15 VMS Cover F02 Exclusive Hold F16 Caller ID Name Display F03 Recall F17 Caller ID Inspect F04 Save Number Redial F18 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F05 Last Number Redial F19 Background Music F06 Conference Drop F20 XX XX Call Coverage F07 Privacy F21 Station Lock F08 Touch Tone Enable F22 Station Unlock F09XX Message Light On F23 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F10XX Message Light Off F24 Record a Call 4 F11 XX XX Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F25 Call Screening 4 F12 Account Code Entry F41 Contact Closure 1 F13XX Manual Signaling beep or ring F42 Contact Closure 2 F13 XX Manual Signaling voice signal F59 System Release Status F14 Voice Mailbox Transfer Table 5 2a Intercom Dial Code Features 16XX Call Pickup I66G Group Pickup I68LL Direct Line Pickup Active Line 170 Loudspeaker Paging 1 70 Simultaneous Paging 17G Group Calling Ring I 7G Group Calling Page 177G Group Hunting Ring I 77G Group Hunting Voice Signal I8LL Direct Line Pickup ldle Line 1891 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1892 Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1 A5 Slot carrier can provide a maximum of 40 extensions or a maximum of 19 l
238. e Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Related Features Considerations Verify that the System Date 101 System Day 102 and System Time 103 are set correctly These settings are not backed up You can use Backup Programming Automatic 123 if you prefer If so backups are done automatically at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month You can also use both methods performing manual backups between the scheduled monthly backups Once the system and telephone programming settings have been backed up to a PC Card you can use the Restore Programming 125 procedure to restore the settings if they become corrupted You can also use Restore Programming 125 to verify the date on a backup file To perform either manual or automatic backups purchase a Backup Restore PC Card from Lucent Technologies If the PC Card has not been installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions You must have a Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot before a backup can take place It is recommended that you leave the Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup begins
239. e PC Software required Hardware Considerations Maximum Lines Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 400 Processor Module Module Module 400 Modules Module 400 Modules Hi Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Figure 2 1 PARTNER ACS Stand Alone 2 Slot and 5 Slot Systems Configured for Maximum Lines 3 7 or 19 Maximum Extensions Stand Alone 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier ACS ACS ACS Processor Processor 308EC 2308EC Processor 2308EC Module Module Module Modules Module Modules 4 fs ca agaga Extension Jacks Extension Jacks Extension Jacks HOO ooo ie BAB oOe aes Figure 2 2 Stand Alone 2 Slot and 5 Slot Systems Configured for Maximum Extensions 8 16 or 40 2 3 Programming Initial System Setup After the control unit is installed you set up the system using a combination of system and telephone programming procedures In this guide System Programmin
240. e a call Note that auxiliary pools 881 882 and 883 are not automatically added to an extension s Automatic Line Selection You can use Line Ringing to identify when each pool and individual line assigned to an extension should start ringing the factory setting for pools is No Ring and for lines is Immediate Ring If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing all the lines in a pool you must restrict the extension using Pool Access Restriction 315 If you want to prevent a user at an extension from accessing an individual line you must use Line Access Restriction 302 Remove pools from Hotline 603 and Doorphone 604 605 extensions to prevent calls from being made or received on them You can use Line Access Mode 313 to change an extension from a pooled extension to a key extension When using Unique Line Ringing 209 incoming calls that ring at a pool button will ring with the pattern assigned to that line Lines within a pool may be assigned individual ring patterns 5 217 Feature Reference Considerations Valid Entries You cannot assign pool buttons to extension 10 or to any key extension The main pool buttons are always assigned to the two leftmost buttons on the bottom row of a system phone You cannot use Select Button Setting 3 for the main pool 880 during Pool Extension Assignment programming If you select Not Assigned Setting 2 for the main pool 880 during Pool
241. e an Intercom Call 5 186 An intercom call or inside call is a call between two extensions without using an outside line There are two ways you can signal the extension you are calling by ringing or by voice System Phone You can lift the handset or press before dialing then 1 Press an idle button red and green lights are both off You hear intercom dial tone and the green light next to the button is on steady 2 To ring the extension dial the two digit extension number To voice signal a system phone at the extension press plus the two digit extension number and listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Be brief and discreet in your interruption If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear ringing you have reached an idle standard MLC 6 or Trans Talk 9000 series phone or a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers Standard
242. e call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call If you use Caller ID make sure Automatic System Answer Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Automatic System Answer Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Release 2 0 or Later Valid Entries 0 9 0 rings answered immediately 2v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as and on system phones To change the number of times an incoming call rings at extension 10 before the system answers it 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H O O 2 To change the number of rings press until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries above 3 Select another procedure or exit programming
243. e des dispositifs ne d passe pas 100 No d homolagation Voir l tiquette sur le c t de l unit de contr le No de certification CSA LR 60486 Indice de charge 7 Contents e o OoOo About This Guide ix PC eC 1 Features and Capabilities 1 1 System Components 1 4 a Auxiliary Equipment 1 17 2 Programming 2 1 Hardware Considerations 2 2 Initial System Setup 2 4 Changing Settings after Installation 2 7 Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services 2 11 a System Programming Options 2 12 a Using System Programming 2 20 a Upgrading the PARTNER ACS 2 25 a Telephone Programming Options 2 25 a Using Telephone Programming 2 30 3 Learning About Telephones 3 1 System Telephones 3 1 Standard Telephones 3 8 Combination Extensions 3 12 a Using Telephones 3 13 Contents 4 Using Auxiliary Equipment 4 1 Answering Machines 4 4 Auto Attendant 4 8 4 9 a Call Reporting Devices SMDR ee 5 Feature Reference 5 1 i 5 1 a AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 5 4 Account Code Entry F12 5 7 a Auto Dialing 5 17 Automatic Daylight Standard Times 126 Release 3 0 or Later 5 20 Automatic Extension Privacy 304 5 21 Automatic Line Selection 5 23 a Automatic System Answer Button 111 Release 2 0 or Later 5 25 Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Release 2 0 or Later 5 28 Automatic System
244. e last field on the call report To print a new header use SMDR Top of Page 609 This feature requires special hardware and or software For more information see Call Reporting Devices SMDR jon page 4 9 If talk time is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits 1 Active 2 Not Active v 5 247 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To include the Talk field on call reports 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 248 SMDR Top of Page 609 SMDR Top of Page 609 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure notifies the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page Use this feature after inserting paper clearing a jam or to print a new he
245. e line was not assigned using the Number of Lines procedure to remove lines from some extensions or to change the button used to pick up a line ata specific extension Line Access Restriction 302 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on specific lines Initial System Setup Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line will start ringing at each extension that has the line For additional information about line ringing options see Programming a Receptionists Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line intercom or outside when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a call without first selecting a specific line button For extensions with standard phones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables standard phones to access system features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access an outside line they must dial Pooled Extensions Release 2 0 or later Use the procedures described in this section if your system is configured for Hybrid mode to change the assignment of lines in pools and to assign auxiliary pools to or remove the main pool from pooled extensions If a pooled extension also has an individual line refer to Key Extensions to assign that indiv
246. eaker on 3 11 S switchhook 3 10 5 224 0 system messages Standard phones overview rotary Star Code Dial Delay 410 5 245 5 249 Station Programming se IN 7 Index Station Unlock 5 258 __ o Support Customer Support customer B SSSSSSCSCSCSCS S Swapping ExtensionsJ2 10 0 Switchhook Flash System Answer System Clock2 4 o System clock 2 9 o System Date 101 System Day 102 System Password 403 System Phones problems with programming Telephones see System Phones ana Phones ringingpatterns 3 6 Cd speaker 3 8 using 3 1 J3 13 o System phones programming mixed types System Planner B4 SOS System Problems 6 24 SSS System Programming changing 2 7 J2 2000 S individual procedures 5 1 2 ss issSSSsSsSsSd initial 2 3 o methods of options 212225 SSCS overview 2 PBX Centrex support for 2 System Programming see aa System Reset 728 System Settings changing 2 20 __ S System Settings Changing System Speed Dial Numbers description 5 265___ S marking to override dial restrictions star codes using with marked numbers System Time 103 5 T Talk Back 5 290 Telephone Programming at extension IN 8 auto dial buttons 2 26 5 17 ___ 5 113 Touch tone Dial 5 236 Touch Tone Enable programming feature on a button 5 270 phone number 5 250 programming f
247. ears ringing if Ring on Transfer 119 is Active If it is Not Active and Music on Hold 602 is Active and an audio source is connected to the system the caller hears music on hold while the call is being transferred to the voice mailbox If Music on Hold is Not Active and Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active the caller hears silence This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 You can program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button on a system phone to transfer a caller directly to a voice mailbox by pressing the button then dialing the mailbox subscriber s extension number Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button iF af wo NM Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 293 Feature Reference Using To transfer a caller to a specific subscriber s mailbox 1 From a system phone press the programmed button or press 4 2 Dial the two digit extension number or press an Auto Dial button of the mailbox subscriber for whom the caller wants to leave a message The caller is routed to the mailbox and hears the
248. ease hold for the receptionist or dial an extension number now To Program 1 oan KR OD Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the auto attendant to cover Set Line Ringing for all lines assigned to extension X to Delayed Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Use AA Extensions 607 to identify extension X as the auto attendant Set Transfer Return Extension 306 for extension X to extension 10 Set the auto attendant to pick up within a specific number of rings so if the receptionist does not pick up a call the auto attendant will Call Reporting Devices SMDR SMDR Station Message Detail Recording is a call reporting feature that provides records of call activity Call reporting information provides you with the ability to Detect any unauthorized calls Bill clients or projects Bill back by department Reduce telephone costs by identifying the need to change telecommunications services like adding a WATS line for calls to a particular area code Print Caller ID information Call reporting information is recorded after each call is completed For outgoing calls the system records information for each call that lasts more than 10 seconds The timing begins when you lift the handset or press to access an outside line For incoming calls the timing begins when the call is answered Timing stops when the call is disconnect
249. ector flush against the plastic case for the entire length of the board Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it m lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected Ifthe green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the hotline see pag m f the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 System Problems a If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the hotline seelpage 61 Possible Cause 2 The power outlet is faulty What to do Test the outlet by plugging in an appliance like a lamp or radio a Ifthe appliance does not work the outlet is faulty If possible plug the control unit into a different outlet Then check the fuse box or call an electrician ma If the appliance works call the hotline see page 6 1 Multiple Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights Possible Cause 1 The LED on one system module is out What to do If the green LED on the front of a module is out try reseating the module in the control unit a Ifthe LED lights the problem is corrected m f the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 Possible Cause 2 The green LEDs on several system modules are out What to do If the LEDs on the front of several system modules are out try reseating the leftmost module of the ones with the lights out see Replacing System Modules in the PARTNER Advanced Communicati
250. ectronic door lock as shown in Figure 4 6 or an alert The device being controlled must be wired to the Adjunct by an electrician in accordance with local electrical codes See Appendix A Specifications for more information 4 13 Using Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closure 1 Door with Electronic Lock Doorphone Figure 4 6 Contact Closure Adjunct Using Contact Closure Devices You must designate which extensions are eligible to use the Contact Closures and you must program how the contacts will respond when activated Then users at eligible extensions can program a button on their phones or they can simply use to activate Contact Closure 1 or to activate Contact Closure 2 For example suppose Contact Closure 1 can release the door lock on the Deliveries door You program extension Y as an eligible extension for Contact Closure 1 using Contact Closure Group 612 and set the Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to 5 Seconds On When a delivery person uses the doorphone extension X to announce a package delivery the user at extension Y can use to activate Contact Closure 1 The lock on the Deliveries door will be released for five seconds enabling the delivery person to enter Programming Contact Closure Devices 4 14 1 Use Doorphone Extension 604 to assign Doorphone 1 to extension X 2 Use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify extension Y as an alert extension for Doorphone 1 3
251. ed The system sends the information through a 1200 baud serial interface to either a serial printer or a call accounting device The device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the processor module 4 9 Using Auxiliary Equipment Programming Use the following programming procedures for call reporting Call Reports SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls that you want to record for call reporting either all calls or outgoing calls only SMDR Top of Page 609 to notify the system that the printer has been aligned to the top of a new page SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report Before changing the output format to 24 digits check the documentation for your call accounting device to verify that this operation is supported SMDR Talk Time 611 to include the Talk field on the call reports This field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting was played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call Forced Account Code Eniry 307 to identify extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to making outside calls and Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes Display Language 303 to specify the language to be used for display messages The call report header is printed in the same language as is specified for extension 10 The System Date 101 and Sy
252. em Release 5 programming and maintaining your Installation and Programming PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL VS Voice 585 322 533 Provides the forms needed to plan and record Messaging System Release 5 how your PARTNER MAIL VS system is to be Planning Forms programmed Using the PARTNER MAIL VS 585 322 531 Contains instructions for using the PARTNER Voice Messaging System MAIL VS system Release 5 Using the PARTNER Voice 585 322 705 Contains instructions for using the PARTNER Messaging System Release 2 Voice Messaging System PARTNER Voice Messaging 585 322 706 Provides instructions for planning installing System Release 2 Installation programming and maintaining your and Programming PARTNER Voice Messaging system PARTNER MAIL Voice 585 322 516 Provides instructions for planning installing Messaging System Release 3 programming and maintaining your Planning Installation and Use PARTNER MAIL system PARTNER MAIL Voice 585 322 517 Provides the forms needed to plan and record Messaging System Release 3 how your PARTNER MAIL system is to be Planning Forms programmed PARTNER MAIL Voice 585 322 518 Contains instructions for using the PARTNER Messaging System Release 3 MAIL system User s Guide PARTNER Voice Messaging 518 456 100 Contains instructions for installing programming and using the PARTNER voice messaging system ACS Release 1 1 or later Some of these materials also are available in Spanish and French For more
253. em phones Using To change the Voice Interrupt On Busy setting for an extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program O at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature To assign or unassign Voice Interrupt On Busy press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode To initiate a voice interrupt on busy call From a system phone press ntercom 2 Press plus a two digit extension number or use an Auto Dial button 1 3 Listen for one of the following responses If you hear one beep you have reached an idle system phone You can speak after the beep Your voice is heard through the other extension s speaker If the recipient is present he or she can reply If you hear two beeps you have reached a busy system phone with Voice Interrupt On Busy Assigned You can speak after the beeps Be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice If the recipient has a Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button wait for a response If you hear a second set of beeps the recipient has ended the voice interrupt on busy call In either case hang up to end your part of the voice interrupt on busy call 5 289 Feature Reference If you hear ringing you have reached a standard phone an idle MLC 6
254. ence Using Outside parties may be harder to hear on a conference call than ona two party call depending on the number of parties and the outside lines connected to the system This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 With standard phones you can only do three way conferencing System Phone 1 5 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press Conf The first party is now on hold Set up the call to the second party You are connected with the second party If you are adding an inside party to a call you must wait until the party answers If you are active on a call using a pool button and you want to set up a conference call using one of the other lines in that pool you can press and dial the pool s access code to gain access to another line in that pool Press again to add the second party to the call You can now speak with the first and second parties Repeat Steps 2 through 4 to add more parties Standard Phone 1 5 88 Set up the call to the first party You can call the party pick up the call from hold or answer an incoming call You are connected with the first party Press the switchhook down once rapidly The first party is now on hold You hear intercom dial tone To add an outside party dial or a pool access code plus the outside numbe
255. eneral call handling topics or Telephone Programming procedures Each feature includes the following information if applicable a Description Examples Related Features Programming Considerations a Using a Valid Entries v factory setting This chapter gives step by step instructions using the following conventions All of the instructions in this chapter assume that system phones select outside lines or pools first and standard phones select intercomStandard phones Automatic Line Selection for first as determined by each extension s setting for Automatic Line Selection See Chapter 2 for a review of the methods and buttons you can use while in programming mode Programming instructions tell you to use the button to change values for specific settings You can enter a value using the dialpad if you prefer Similarly there are different ways to exit programming mode as described in cnet the method with which you are most comfortable For Telephone Programming this chapter provides only the instructions for Centralized Telephone Programming To program from individual extensions users should refer to their User Instruction Cards Display prompts in the chapter are shown as they appear on PARTNER model phones If you are using an MLS model phone some of these prompts may be abbreviated If you have trouble finding a feature name in this chapter consult the index Perhaps you know the feature by a different
256. ension Dialing Instructions 1 If you want to dial the telephone number and return the call press the Dial button on either the Telephone Number Display or the Name Display When you press the Dial button on either display the Dial Display shown in Figure 6 appears Select a Button to Dial a 908 5551234 Back Figure 5 6 Call Log Dial Display 5 77 Feature Reference 2 For Release 2 0 systems only if you want to make an outside call using a specific pool press the idle pool button or dial i plus the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 and if desired lift the handset 3 The button you press to dial the call depends on the number of digits you must dial to complete the call from your area To dial the complete number including the 1 press the button under the 1 left button To include the area code but not the 1 press the button under the area code the second button To dial the seven digit number only press the button under the seven digit telephone number displayed the third button You also have the following options at the Call Log Dial display m Press the Back button to return to the Telephone Number or Name Display Press the Call Log Display button to exit the Call Log The green light goes off when the feature is deactivated 5 78 Caller ID Log All Calls 4319 Release 2 0 or Later Caller ID Log All Calls
257. ension 10 or 11 see Programming Overlays for more information 2 To enter programming mode press A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 3 Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering System Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 4 4 Press again A display similar to the following appears SYSTEM PROGRAM 5 Specify a programming procedure in one of two ways Direct Method Dial the code for that procedure System Programming procedures in this guide are identified by a anda three digit code for example System Date is 101 This method is best when you are using only a few procedures during a programming session and you know the codes Cycle Method Cycle through the procedures in numerical order Press Wext Procedure and Prev Procedure to cycle forward and backward through the programming procedures This method is best when you are using multiple procedures during a programming session or if you do not know the codes 6 To exit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle gt NOTE You can talk on the phone while you program This is useful if you call for suppo
258. ension number or pressing an Auto Dial button programmed for voice signaling You can make a voice signaled call from either a system phone or a standard phone However if you try to make a voice signaled call to a standard phone or an MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phone it will ring 1 The HFAI feature can be turned on or off only when your phone is idle Muting your voice while you are on a call only turns off the microphone for the duration of the call 2 If HFAI is on and you are already on a call you will not receive any voice signaled calls to your extension they will ring instead 3 If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a busy extension it may result in a voice interrupt on busy call to that extension See Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls for more information Voice Interrupt on Busy Calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets you interrupt and speak to another user who is busy on a call and who has the Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 feature activated When you use Voice Interrupt on Busy the interrupted user hears two beeps before hearing your voice Be aware that the third party to whom the interrupted user is speaking will probably hear the two beeps and the faint sound of your voice Therefore the message you deliver with the interruption should be brief and discreet If the interrupted user wants to answer you he or she can press a programmed Talk Back button the interrupted
259. er or name of calling party if applicable Coverage Call for XX onthe display of users receiving a coverage call XX represents the number of the extension that activated call coverage Forward xx xx onthe display of users forwarding their calls the first xx represents the number of the user s extension the second xx represents the number of the destination extension Wake Up Call on the display of users receiving a wake up call Volume or display contrast level bars as volume or display contrast is adjusted Programming messages and prompts when in programming mode When you are in Telephone Programming mode the current line assignment feature code or Speed Dial number if any assigned to a button displays when the button is pressed Blank displays if nothing is programmed At idle extensions 10 and 11 only specific messages appear on the top line of the display instead of the usual day date message in the following circumstances Users at these two extensions should be instructed to notify the System Manager when such a message appears 5 117 Feature Reference ChgBat W PowerOn Of ReplaceSysBat W Power On appears when PARTNER ACS processor module batteries need to be replaced The message may flicker on and off as the batteries near the low power threshold These batteries are used to retain system programming settings during a power failure See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for instructions for replacing
260. er shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for all the lines that you want to identify 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 31 Feature Reference Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Release 2 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure determines how the system handles Automatic System Answer calls after the greeting plays There are three available modes Hold places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available Ring continues to ring and the green light next to the line button continues to flash at all extensions that have access to the line the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available Disconnect ends the call immediately after the Automatic System Answer greeting plays Related Features Considerations 5 32 Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Automatic System Answe
261. eration Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed through the system Abuse misuse or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and persons under the customer s control or Acts of third parties and acts of God For warranted items that were not installed by Lucent Technologies self installed and are not covered by a Service Protection Plan the means of warranty fulfillment on the product is to ship the replacement item to you or at Lucent Technologies discretion to dispatch a technician to repair or replace the product Lucent Technologies OBLIGATION TO REPAIR REPLACE OR REFUND AS SET FORTH ABOVE IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE Lucent Technologies ITS AFFILIATES SUPPLIERS AND DEALERS MAKE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Limitation of Liability Except as provided below the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers for any claims losses damages or expenses from any cause whatsoever including acts or omissions of third parties regardless of the form of action whether in contract tort or otherwise shall not exceed the lesser of 1 the direct damages proven or 2 the repair cost replacement cost license fee annual rental charge or purchase price as the case may be of the equipment Maintenance Repair and Ordering
262. ers that remain in the conference may hear a dial tone Use Conference Drop to remove the last added outside party from a conference call Caller ID information does not display for extensions that are active ona conference call Users can use System Speed Dial Personal Speed Dial or Auto Dial numbers to add parties to the conference Do not add a busy or ringing outside call to a conference if you do all callers hear the busy or ringing signal If you hear a busy signal or the party does not answer reconnect with the held party by pressing the line button Users cannot join a conference call the originator must add each party to the conference If the conference originator puts the call on hold other parties can continue to talk Other inside parties can put their extensions on hold if there are outside parties on the conference call When the originator hangs up the conference is disconnected Conference calls cannot be transferred If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a conference calling feature that lets you connect multiple callers on a single PBX or Centrex line The number of callers you can connect depends on your PBX or Centrex system For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the Recall feature instead 5 87 Feature Refer
263. es If an appropriate number of lines are not assigned you may need to add more lines If an appropriate number of lines are assigned go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 One or more local phone company lines in the pool are faulty What to do At extension 10 try to access each individual line assigned to the pool If the lines accessed from individual line buttons on extension 10 are still faulty refer to Possible Cause 7 in Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls If the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 Calls Are Answered Automatically A call rings once then disappears as if it were answered Possible Cause 1 Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on What to do Check to see if Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on If Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is turned on turn it off by pressing the programmed button at extension 10 If Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is not turned on go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 An auxiliary device answers when it should not this could occur with a fax machine voice messaging system answering machine or modem What to do Be sure the device is set to answer correctly If the device answers before it should adjust it to answer on a later ring If the device should not answer calls at all turn off its auto answer feature Refer to the
264. es Release 3 0 or Later When an incoming call is answered by PVM PMVS PARTNER MAIL or ASA DXD PARTNER ACS determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to the fax machine ACS will automatically transfer the call to a fax hunt group Incoming fax detection is activated automatically by assigning extensions to Hunt Group 8 For more information see Chapter 5 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or For this feature to work you must have a voice messaging system or ASA DXD You must also have your system configured in one of these ways a Partner ACS as a stand alone module m 308EC version 2 module in slot 1 any modules in remaining slots 200 206 400 module in slot 1 308EC version 2 module in any other slot This feature will not work if you have a 308EC version 1 module in slot 1 Using Auxiliary Equipment Manual Transfer of Calls to Fax Machines Release 2 0 or Later There are two situations in which you would want to transfer a call to your fax machine You answer an outside call and hear a fax machine signaling A fax signal is a single beep sequence beep beep beep If you hear this you should transfer the call immediately to the fax machine extension a You are ona call with a person who wants to send you a fax using the fax machine that is connected to his or her phone You can receive the fax by transferring the call to y
265. es are logged This combination can be assigned to a maximum of one extension per system The Caller ID information is shown on three screens The first screen shows the caller s number or the reason that the number is not available The second screen shows the caller s name or the reason that the name is not available 5 72 Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 Release 2 0 or Later The third screen shows the date and time of the call In addition the system logs the line the call came in on whether the log entry was viewed whether the call was answered or not answered and whether an attempt was made to return the call using the Dialing option Related Features Considerations To log Caller ID information you must subscribe to a Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules To enable a user to log calls and view the Call Log use the Caller ID Call Line Association 318 programming procedure to associate the line and extension for the purposes of logging unanswered calls Use the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 programming procedure if you also want to log answered calls at the extension All unanswered Caller ID calls that are transferred to another extension are logged at that extension Caller ID calls transferred to a group are logged at every extension that alerts in the group
266. estore Programming 125 the system resets itself In the future warn users before beginning the restore or perform the restore during nonbusiness hours If you did not run Restore Programming 125 go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Power was interrupted to the control unit What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the on position O if you have a 5 Slot carrier A caution The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case for the entire length of the board Do not install the power cord at an angle to the case or with a loop in it m lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit and the trouble is gone the problem is corrected lf the green LEDs on the modules are lit but the trouble remains call the hotline see pag lf the green LEDs on the modules are out go to Possible Cause 2 in All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights a If any green LEDs on the modules are flashing call the hotline seepage 61 All Phones Dead No Dial Tone or Lights 6 26 Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power What to do Make sure the control unit s power cord is plugged securely into the wall outlet Also make sure the on off switch is in the ON position O if you have a 5 Slot carrier A CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the conn
267. ettings 399 to copy the settings of an existing extension If you wish to further adjust a new extension s settings see Customizing Extensions Swapping Extensions 2 10 If auser changes location but wants to keep the same extension number you can make the change easily by changing the connection at the control unit For example if the users at extensions 29 and 32 switch offices you can disconnect the modular plugs from those extension jacks in the control unit Then reconnect the plug from 32 into extension jack 29 and the plug from 29 into extension jack 32 Now the users can take their respective phones to their new Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services locations keep the same extension numbers and retain the phones programmed settings Changing Settings to Support PBX or Centrex Services This section applies only if you use PBX or Centrex services with your system If it does not apply go to the next section System Programming Options PBX services are provided by a private telephone switch a Centrex services are provided by your local telephone company from a Central Office CO outside your premises These services include the Centrex lines connected to your control unit modules and some set of features such as hold conference or transfer that are available on those lines Centrex services may be offered in your area under a different name For specific Centrex feature
268. exit programming mode 5 214 Pool Access Restriction 315 Release 2 0 or Later Pool Access Restriction 315 Release 2 0 or Later Description This procedure applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure restricts a pooled extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool For example you may want customer service representatives to make calls using the WATS lines that belong to auxiliary pool 881 but not receive incoming calls on the lines in that pool in this case you assign pool 881 to the customer service representative s phones and restrict the pool to Out Only Related Features This procedure is the most extreme way to restrict dialing For example an extension set to In Only or No Access for a particular pool cannot select that pool to dial out even for numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 See Dialing Restrictions and Permissions on page 2 12 for a summary of all dialing restrictions a When a user has access to a pool for outgoing calls you can customize dialing restrictions for the user s extension by using Outgoing Call Restriction 401 and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 To restrict a pooled extension from receiving and or making calls on individual lines you must use Line Access Restriction 302 You can use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign pools to specific e
269. extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the VMS Cover button to indicate that VMS Cover is currently active If this is the case and the VMS Cover button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate VMS Cover again you must press the button Automatic VMS Cover also applies to outside calls on lines assigned ownership with Line Coverage Extension 208 Use VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to change the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at all system extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system Users with Automatic VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified amount of VMS cover rings If an extension has Automatic VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the forwarding destination they are not covered by the voice messaging system 5 37 Feature Reference Considerations Standard phones and system phones without a programmed VMS Cover button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension Valid Entries 1 Assig
270. extension that will log all calls then use the Caller ID Log All Calls 319 feature to allow the extension to log all Caller ID calls on the associated lines Transfer Return calls that are answered at the return extension are not logged even if Caller ID Log All Calls is set to active Considerations A maximum of one extension can use the Caller ID Log All Calls feature To log Caller ID information you must subscribe to a Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules a You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active a To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights 5 79 Feature Reference Valid Entries Extension number 10 49 No extension assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 80 To program the extension to log answered calls 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press Se
271. extensions Z1 and Z2 to ensure that calls transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system return to extension 10 if they are not answered 3 Use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions Z1 and Z2 to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group 4 Set the VMS Hunt Delay 506 to Delayed 5 Set the VMS Hunt Schedule 507 to Always 6 Make sure that a Night Service Button 503 is assigned at extension 10 the receptionists extension When Night Service is on callers hear the night menu when no one is available to answer their calls 4 29 Using Auxiliary Equipment 7 Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button at extension 10 to enable the receptionist to transfer calls directly to extension X s and Y s mailboxes without first ringing their phones This is useful when the receptionist knows that the users at extensions X and Y are away from their desks 8 Program an Auto Dial button for the VMS hunt group intercom O O O at extensions X and Y to allow the subscribers to call in for their messages with one touch 4 30 Feature Reference Overview This chapter provides reference information for programming and using system features Features are listed in alphabetical order System Programming procedures include the procedure code and three digit number in the heading dial code features include the feature code F for or for intercom plus a two or three digit code Headings without codes are g
272. f even though Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is Assigned Automatic Extension Privacy 304 is appropriate for use with standard phones Privacy applies to active calls any user can retrieve a held call unless the call is placed on hold with Exclusive Hold If you have Caller ID you can use Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your call and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed for active calls at your extension Privacy must be programmed on a button with lights Users cannot dial the Privacy code manually or use a programmed button without lights to activate this feature When Privacy is on the button light at the extension is also on indicating that others cannot join calls Privacy can be turned on and off at any time even during a call Users cannot join calls using pool buttons regardless of the Automatic Extension Privacy setting or the state of the Privacy Button Privacy F07 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using To program a Privacy button 1 arf oO DN Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press QM Program another button for this extension or exit progr
273. f your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones it is recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension To program a phone from extension 10 or 11 use the following procedure 1 Place the Programming Overlay over the dialpad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 see Programming Overlays jon page 2 21 for more information 2 To start programming a Press A display similar to the following appears PROGRAM EXTENSION 10 If you are programming from extension 11 11 displays instead of 10 b Press System Program A display similar to the following appears 10 Enter Extension Name This display is for the Extension Name Display feature When you are entering Centralized Telephone Programming mode skip it by moving on to Step 2c c Press again The display reads SYSTEM PROGRAM d Press Central Tel Program A display similar to the following appears CENTRAL TELEPHONE PROG Extension 3 Dial the extension number of the telephone to be programmed The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned show the current Line Ringing settings remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 4 At this point program the features that must use Centralized Telephone Programming For all phones these features must now be
274. ffic One machine sends the other receives You can install both a telephone and a fax machine on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide This lets you receive both voice and fax calls on the same line but not at the same time If you pick up the phone and hear a fax signal push the Start button on your fax machine and then hang up Fax Machines If you are using the PARTNER MAIL system s Automated Attendant Service you can program PARTNER MAIL to transfer fax calls to the fax extension or a group of fax extensions automatically Use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify fax extensions If you have multiple fax machines put all of the fax extensions into a single Hunt Group any group 1 6 using Hunt Group Extensions 505 Restricting Dialing from a Fax Machine You can use dialing restrictions to restrict calling activity on a fax machine For example you can use Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to restrict the fax machine to local calls only For a more detailed discussion ofjdialing restrictions see Chapter 2 Single Fax Machine The single fax machine setup shown in Figure 4 8 is good for moderate traffic The fax machine has its own line line A the number of which is published as the fax number The fax line can be used by other phones when all other lines are busy The fax machine is connected to its own extension extension X
275. fied in this guide by a A A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided A WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal personal injury if the hazard is not avoided How to Comment on This Guide A feedback form is located at the end of this guide after the appendixes If the form is missing send your comments and recommendations for changes to Publications Manager Lucent Technologies 211 Mount Airy Road Room 2W 226 Basking Ridge NJ 07920 FAX 1 908 953 6912 Overview Features and Capabilities The following list provides an overview of the system s features The features apply to all releases of PARTNER ACS unless specified otherwise Full line of system phones some with displays showing date time and programming and feedback messages All system phones provide access to multiple outside lines and system features Programmable buttons on system phones providing one touch access to system features simply by pressing the button Intuitive operation of basic call handling capabilities including transfer conference and hold Intercom inside calling to other system extensions using an Intercom button and the two digit number assigned to the extension Users can either ring or voice signal an idle system phone use Voice Interrupt On Busy to signal another user who is active on a
276. fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the output format back to 15 digits Valid Entries 1 15 Digits v 2 24 Digits 5 243 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the maximum number of digits for dialed numbers that can print on call reports 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 244 SMDR Record Type 608 SMDR Record Type 608 Description Call Reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to specify whether all calls or outgoing calls only are to be included on call reports Related Features Considerations The date and time that appear on call reports are determined by System Date 101 and System Time 103 The call report page header prints in the Display Language 303 specified for extension 10 If Account Code Entry optional or forced is used
277. format described above refer to the printer s instructions or contact the printer s manufacturer if you need help If SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits Call Accounting Devices You can send call information to a call accounting device such as Lucent Technologies Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus if you want to further analyze call activity The device stores rate table information and processes the information it receives into meaningful reports that can help you optimize your communications system The primary application for call accounting devices is accounting or pricing of the calls The call accounting device connects directly to the SMDR jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and can also print out reports that include summaries by hour line and extension Refer to the manual provided with the call accounting device for instructions on connecting it to your system Contact Closure Devices The Contact Closure Adjunct plugs into a jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module and has two Contact Closures that can be used to control devices such as an el
278. g Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Direct Extension Dial on and off Use Direct Extension Dial Button 113 to program the button You must use Direct Extension Dial Record Playback to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number after the system answers an outside call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call If you use Caller ID make sure Direct Extension Dial Delay is set to 2 rings or more to ensure that Caller ID information is captured The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed If the PC Card has not been installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Direct Extension Dial Record Playback feature to record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message This feature works independently of Line Ringing which determines how an outside call rings at the extension immediately after a 20 second delay or not at all Direct Extension Dial Delay specifies the number of rings a caller hears before the system answers the call 0 9 0 rings answered immediately av
279. g Button See Intercom Auto Dial Button Outside Line See Line Outside Pool See Pool P Park See Call Park PARTNER ACS Processor Module The Lucent Technologies equipment component that provides the software intelligence that controls the system s features This module may be a stand alone unit or it may be installed in the center slot of the 5 Slot carrier or the leftmost slot of the 2 Slot carrier PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Release 1 1 or later An optional voice messaging service provided on a PC Card that allows users to record a greeting and callers to leave messages Provides solutions for after hour calls and backup for the receptionist PARTNER Model Telephones See System Phones PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer See Intercom Autodialer Password A four digit code assigned by the System Manager that users can enter from a PARTNER or MLS model phone to override dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off See also Night Service PC Card A computer card that can be inserted in either of two PCMCIA slots on the PARTNER ACS processor module See a so Backup Restore PC Card Pickup Group A group of extensions for which calls to any extension in the group can be picked up from any extension in the system by dialing a group pickup code Pool Release 2 0 or later A group of outside lines used for making and receiving calls on pooled extensions A pool typically contains lines of a sim
280. g allows the call to continue hunting to other group extensions if it is not answered by the first group extension where it rings If an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call Coverage if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 before it transfer returns If you have a fax machine or an answering machine connected to the system set Transfer Return Rings to a number greater than the number of rings at which these devices answer Doing so prevents a call transferred to a fax or answering machine from returning before it is answered The system does not start counting the number of rings for a transferred call to determine when it goes to the transfer return extension if it is not answered until the transfer originator hangs up 0 9 0 rings no return 4y 5 273 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To
281. g on Transfer is set to Active callers hear ringing as they are being transferred if it is set to Not Active callers hear silence unless Music on Hold is activated and an audio source is connected to the system If this is the case callers hear music while the call is being transferred to the destination extension Once there callers hear ringing until the call is answered or it is sent to the voice messaging system Related Features lf you have an audio source connected to the system set Music on Hold 602 to Active and Ring on Transfer to Not Active so callers hear music as they are being transferred to the destination extension a This procedure has no effect on Direct Extension Dial or Call Park Valid Entries 1 Active v 2 Not Active Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change Ring on Transfer 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H GZ at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 235 Feature Reference Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 Description This System Programming procedure changes the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout You may need to change the length of the timeout if you have any rotary lines and you are having trouble calling out on standard touch to
282. g procedures are identified by a code and three digits Telephone Programming procedures are identified by the feature name only Use the System Planner as a guide when programming The following sections provide an overview of the procedures you use for initial system setup Chapter 5 explains how to use the specific procedures Other programming procedures are optional but are strongly recommended to make the most of your investment See System Programming Options and Telephone Programming Options for details Setting the System Clock After supplying power to the control unit use the following procedures System Date 101 to set the month and day System Day 102 to set the day of the week System Time 103 to set the hour and minutes Assigning Lines Key Extensions 2 4 Use the procedures described in this section to assign individual lines to pooled extensions or assign lines to key extensions In Key mode all extensions are Key extensions in Hybrid mode extension 10 and any extensions set to Key using Line Access Mode 313 are key extensions For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to all system extensions Then use the following procedures as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone a Line Assignment 301 to assign lines to specific extensions if th
283. ge gt NOTE The message may flicker on and off as the batteries approach the low power threshold It is recommended that you change the batteries in the processor module every year even if the system has not yet displayed the ReplaceSysBat W Power On message Choose good quality alkaline batteries See the PARTNER ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION guide for information on changing batteries Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm If you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 and the automatic backup fails a Backup Failure Alarm message appears instead of the default day date time message on the top line of the telephone display at idle extensions 10 and 11 After correcting the problem that caused the failure you can clear the Backup Failure Alarm using the following procedure See Table 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H Q The current setting is displayed 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 6 3 Troubleshooting 2 Press to choose Option 3 Backup Alarm Cleared gt NOTE You cannot use Next Data or Prev Data in this procedure to choose Option 3 3 Exit programming mode gt NOTE Using Option 3 to clear a Backup Failure Alarm does not change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic
284. ght Patterns description of Line Access Restriction 302 Line Assignment 301 default on PARTNER Line Pickup Line Ringing caller ID information effect on display of 5 179 Index description 5 179 SY Line Selection Automatic lines 2 4 Lines Number of 104 Lists MLC 6 phones Modems send and receive Modules MOH see Music on hold Monitoring Call Activity 2 29 5 17 _ _ Monitoring Pool Activity 5 215 Music On Hold 602 as meee myse Name Display 5 76 5 130 Night Service auxiliary equipment with dialing restrictions with Numbering of Lines and Extensions 2 2 ss s s siSYd E O One touch Transfer seg Auto Dial Numbers Optional Equipment 1 17 2 17 4 4 Ordering equipment B 4 S reference materials and books B 4 o Outgoing Call Restriction 401 5 204 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 description 5 light patterns Out of building Extension Requirements 4 3 sid Outside Auto DialNumbers 5 18 Outside Call making an Outside Conference Denial 109 5 209 si Outward Restriction see Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Overriding Dialing Restictons Pe ee Owner line 5 143 P PAGE Jack description 4 2 5 181 S Paging 5 244 o O calling groups loudspeaker 5 18 5241 O O PARTNER model phone 5 145 5 149 simultaneous 5 145 _ _ o PARTNER ACS Processor
285. ght you want to turn on 5 193 Feature Reference Music on Hold 602 Description This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates the Music on Hold jack on the processor module The jack must be active and an audio source must be connected to the jack in order to provide recorded music or messages to callers on hold Related Features Considerations 5 194 You can adjust the volume of Music on Hold using Music on Hold Volume 614 If Ring on Transfer 119 is Not Active and Music on Hold is Active transferred callers hear music on hold until the call is answered If Music on Hold is Active users with system phones with speakers can play Background Music through their phones speakers If Automatic System Answer is on callers hear music on hold while waiting for someone to answer the call If Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the settings for Music on Hold 602 and Ring on Transfer 119 If the receptionist at extension 10 uses the Wake Up Service Button 115 to schedule wake up calls the recipients hear music on hold when they answer their wake up calls lf Music on Hold is Not Active or if no audio source is connected callers on hold hear silence The audio source must be connected to the control unit using an RCA phono plug The Music on Hold input jack accepts a maximum input of 2 Volts at 50 Kohms For more information
286. gin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Assignment 301 Line Assignment 301 Description This procedure applies to key extensions or to individual lines on pooled extensions This System Programming procedure assigns the outside lines that are available at an extension The default order of line assignment to the buttons on a system phone is from left to right starting in the bottom left corner see Figure 5 7 on the next page To put the lines in a different order first use this procedure to remove all assigned lines then assign lines in the desired order Related Features Number of Lines 104 can be used only during initial system setup to assign a subset of lines to all extensions You can use Line Assignment to assign additional lines to specific extensions For example if five lines were assigned to all extensions using Number of Lines 104 and there are eight lines in the system use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 6 7 and 8 to specific extensions After you finish Line Assignment you can use Line Ringing to identify when each outside line assigned to an extension should start ringing If you add a line to the system its factory setting is Immediate Ring You can use Automatic Line Selection to determine the order in which the system selects a line for an extension when the user at that extension lifts the handset or turns on the speaker to make a call If you
287. gn pools to the external hotline extension and Automatic Line Selection to set the extension to select outside lines or pools first If your use of the external hotline requires immediate dialing of the programmed number dedicate a line for use by this extension do not assign the line to any other extension or use the line for any other purpose You can set Line Ringing to No Ring for all lines or pools assigned to the external hotline to prevent incoming calls from ringing at the extension Make sure there are no call or line or pool restrictions assigned to an external hotline because that will prevent the outside number from being dialed See Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Do not use Station Lock at an external hotline because it will prevent the outside number from being dialed Remove external hotlines from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Do not assign Forced Account Code Entry 307 to the external hotline Under certain conditions of heavy telephone usage the external hotline may be unable to dial the programmed number immediately for example if many of the standard devices connected to your system dial out at the same time See Using for more information External Hotline 311 Valid Entries A standard phone without a dialpad is recommended for use as the external hotline You can identify several extensions as external ho
288. gned Ext10 If you want to unassign Direct Extension Dial press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 2 Not Assigned If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to a specific button press 3 The display reads DXD Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 To turn Direct Extension Dial on Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Direct Extension Dial is on If calls are ringing when Direct Extension Dial is turned on the calls will be answered immediately by the system To turn Direct Extension Dial off Press the Direct Extension Dial button at extension 10 The green light goes off and Direct Extension Dial is off Any calls in the process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the recorded message and will be prompted to enter a destination extension 5 101 Feature Reference Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 Release 2 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure specifies the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature Related Features Considerations Valid Entries Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified usin
289. going Call Restriction Button 114 for information You can use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on specific lines Pool Access Restriction 315 to restrict extensions from making or receiving calls on all lines belonging to a specific pool and Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to specify telephone numbers that users cannot dial If you program an extension for Forced Account Code Entry 307 the user at that extension must enter an Account Code before accessing an outside line This feature is not available on standard phones gt NOTE For ACS Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code While procedures that restrict dialing are very effective absolute protection against misuse cannot be guaranteed System phones give you more protection against such misuse than standard phones Therefore we strongly recommend that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important Outgoing Call Restriction 401 Valid Entries If the system
290. gram extension 15 press To assign or unassign Forced Account Code Entry press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 139 Feature Reference Forced Account Code List 409 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify a list of up to 99 account code verification entries for extensions that are forced to enter account codes Once a list is created any user at an extension programmed for Forced Account Code Entry must enter a valid account code one that matches a list entry before being allowed to make an outside call This feature ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Related Features Considerations Valid Entries An extension must be programmed for Forced Account Code Entry 307 for the Forced Account Code List to have any effect Account Code Entry provides instructions for entering forced account codes For ACS Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List If you do not create
291. h the speakers of their system phones by pressing To program a Calling Group button 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 If you want calls to ring the group press left D If you want calls to page the group press left Note that buttons programmed for paging a Calling Group cannot be used to transfer a call to that Calling Group 5 Dial a Calling Group number 1 4 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To use when programmed on a button To ring or page the Calling Group press the programmed bution first then lift the handset lf you ring the group all available extensions in the Calling Group ring Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G If you page the group start talking after the beep Your voice is heard through the speakers of all system phones that are idle or have Do Not Disturb turned off in the Calling Group If someone answers the page you are connected to that person and the rest of the Calling Group no longer hears the page To transfer a call to the Calling Group while on a call press the button programmed for ringing a Calling Group You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring
292. handset 2 Press a button programmed with Direct Line Pickup Active Line then dial the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join or press 6 and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial and the two digit system line number of the line you want to pick up or join Direct Line Pickup ldle Line I8LL Direct Line Pickup lIdle Line I8LL Description This feature allows users to access a specific outside line where LL is a system line number when the line is not in use This feature is useful for accessing a line that is not assigned to the phone Related Features Considerations Programming If a line is in use users cannot access it with this feature they hear busy tone For information about accessing a ringing or held call or joining a call in progress see Direct Line Pickup Active Line If Line Access Restriction 302 or pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Access or In Only for a line assigned to an extension or lines within a pool a user at the restricted extension hears busy tone if Direct Line Pickup is used to access that line to place a call This procedure applies to individual lines If you have a pooled extension and you want to access lines in pools that are not assigned to your extension dial the pool acce
293. hange the pool restriction for this extension press until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page At this point To restrict another pool at this extension press Next item or Prev item until the pool number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To restrict another extension press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Pool Extension Assignment 314 Release 2 0 or Later Pool Extension Assignment 314 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature applies only to pooled extensions in Hybrid mode This System Programming procedure identifies the pools that are assigned to buttons at a pooled extension The system uses two buttons to represent the main pool 880 and one for each auxiliary pool 881 882 883 Up to five pool buttons can be assigned per extension Related Features You should use Pool Line Assignment 207 prior to this procedure to assign lines to or remove lines from pools You can use Line Assignment 301 to assign individual outside lines to buttons on a pooled extension Users must have access to an outside line or pool in order to dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Automatic Line Selection to change the order in which the system selects lines or pools when the user at that extension lifts the handset or presses to mak
294. has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Valid Entries 1 9 2v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension 1 Press System Program System Program H 3 2 2 Enter the extension number The current ring setting displays 3 To set Call Coverage Rings press until the appropriate value displays See Valid Entries 4 To set Call Coverage Rings for another extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 51 Feature Reference Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Description This feature forwards all intercom transferred and outside calls from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is an extension number Users can activate this feature from their own extension Call Forwarding or from any other extension in the system Call Follow Me Related Features Considerations 5 52 An extension s outside calls on lines or pools assigned to the extension are eligible for Call Forwarding only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restricti
295. hat does not support Caller ID A privacy message Priv displays if the caller has blocked transmission of Caller ID information f you use SMDR telephone numbers of incoming calls print on call reports after the call is completed Private and out of area numbers are reported as IN on call reports 5 65 Feature Reference Caller ID Inspect F17 Description This feature allows a user who is active on a call to view Caller ID information for a second call without disconnecting the current call or putting it on hold Users can inspect ringing active or held calls Related Features Considerations Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 66 If you program a Caller ID Name Display button you can toggle between Caller ID name and Caller ID number while inspecting lines Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone The user should make sure the green light next to the Caller ID Inspect button is fluttering before pressing a line or pool button or el
296. he Number field in Figure 4 5 set to hold 24 digits A T character prints as the last digit of a dialed number if the called party hangs up before the system user a prints if the number of digits dialed exceeds the 15 or 24 digits that this field can hold If both of these conditions occur the takes precedence For an incoming call IN appears unless the system is set up to receive Caller ID information In that case telephone numbers of incoming calls on lines with Caller ID service print in this field See Caller ID jon page 5 63 for more information a Duration The duration of the call is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds This is the total time of the call including any time the call is on hold or being handled by the Automatic System Hold or Direct Extension Dial feature If an incoming call lasts less than one second this field contains all zeroes a Line Number This is the outside line used to make or receive the call If the system is set for Hybrid Mode and the call is on a line in a pool the number of the line in the pool prints here not the pooled number Station Extension This usually is the extension that answered or placed the call For redirected incoming calls the last extension on the call is shown on the report as follows For transferred incoming calls the destination extension For transferred outgoing cal
297. he first doorphone is connected and Doorphone 2 Extension 605 to identify the extension to which the second doorphone is connected Related Features Considerations 5 124 You must use Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify the extensions that are signaled when the doorphone button is pressed Each doorphone can signal any number of a ert extensions To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the doorphone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines and or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the doorphone extension Automatic Line Selection for the doorphone extension will be automatically set to select intercom lines first You can use Message Light On with the doorphone for example the doorphone s light flashes as a prearranged signal to a delivery person provided the doorphone is connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or to an R3 0 206 or later module in a system that is equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module You can wire a Contact Closure on the Contact Closure Adjunct to activate an electronic lock on the door with the doorphone Then use Contact Closure Group 612 to assign extensions to control the door lock Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long the Contact Closure remains active when it is activated Users in the Contact Closure Group can use the Contact Closure dial code to activate the Contact Closure or they can program the di
298. held call Anyone who has the line can retrieve the held call Green Flutter short on A call is on Acallona Caller ID Inspectis A call transferred short off exclusive hold at line in the on a Wake Up to the extension ececececeeeeeee YOUr extension pool is on Service call is programmed on and can only be exclusive being scheduled the button is now retrieved from hold at your from extension 10 returning to your your extension extension phone or you are and can be being manually retrieved only signaled by the from your extension extension Red Broken Flutter short on off long off ENE WNE Fax Management only the fax extension is not answering calls may be out of paper Applies to Can also apply to Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back VMS Cover Account Code Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Do Not Disturb Night Service Outgoing Call Restriction Button all of which require programming on a button with lights andCali Forwarding Call Follow Me Call Forwarding Call Follow Me lif any of them are programmed on a button with lights For more information about programming these features see Chapter 5 Learning About Telephones Ringing Patterns System phones have these ringing patterns Release 3 0 or later see Unique Line An intercom call will ring BEEP ring BEEP ring BEEP lf you have a system displa
299. hen use Contact Closure to activate the contact closure device Valid Entries 1 1 Second On 2 3 Seconds On v 3 5 Seconds On 4 Toggle Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To specify the Operation Type for a Contact Closure 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 6 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe Contact Number prompt enter the number 1 or 2 for the Contact Closure For example to specify Contact Closure 1 press Q The display shows the current setting for that contact closure 3 Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value displays or press to return to the default setting 5 94 Contact Closure Operation Type 613 4 To assign the Operation Type for the other Contact Closure press Previtem and repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 95 Feature Reference Copy Settings 399 Description 116 117 301 302 303 304 305 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 This System Programming procedure copies all of the following settings from one extension to another Call Coverage Rings VMS Cover Rings Line Assignment Line Access Restriction Display Language Automatic Extension Privacy Abbreviated Ringing Forced Account Code Entry Distin
300. hines are connected to Night Service extensions you can join a call that was already answered by an answering machine from any system phone If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature the answering machine drops off the call when you join it Programming Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment 1 If extension X and Y are key extensions use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover If extensions X and Y are pooled extensions use Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines A and B from all pools and Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from extensions X and Y Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign only line A to extension X for the fax machine to cover and only line B to extension Y for the modem to cover Set Line Ringing for line A at extension X and for line B at extension Y to No Ring Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Assign a Night Service Button 503 at extension 10 Assign extensions X and Y to the Night Service Group 504 4 27 Using Auxiliary Equipment Voice Messaging Systems Three Lucent Technologies voice messaging systems are compatible with your system You can install one of the three depen
301. hone System phones have several buttons in common volume control buttons and the Feature Conf Ciransf Hold Vic HFAN and Sekr buttons In addition each phone has programmable buttons that can be used for outside lines pools extension numbers outside phone numbers or system features Outside lines and pools as well as some system features require buttons with status lights Programmable buttons without lines or pools assigned to them can be programmed with numbers or features so you can use the feature or dial the number with one touch The number in each PARTNER model name indicates the number of programmable buttons with status lights and two buttons If the PARTNER model phone has a display indicated by a D in the model name users receive messages and prompts when making calls and when programming More information about the display is provided in Chapter 5 JJA system display phone is required for system programming Valid system extensions depend on which release of PARTNER ACS you have Release 1 x extensions are 10 41 Release 2 x or later extensions are 10 49 Throughout this guide all references to system extensions are within these release dependent ranges Valid system lines also depend on which release of PARTNER ACS you are using With System 1 x system line capacities are 01 to 15 With Release 2 0 or later system line capacities are 01 to 19 Throughout this guide all references
302. hones To program a Station Lock button 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button 5 255 Feature Reference 4 Press 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lock an extension when the phone is idle or while active on an intercom or outside call using the handset or speakerphone 1 Press the Station Lock button or press On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 3 Re enter the four digit code If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code entered in Step 2 the extension is locked On a button with lights the green light changes to on steady On a display phone the display shows If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code entered in Step 2 the extension remains unlocked On a button with lights the green light turns off Repeat the locking procedure on the previous page To unlock a locked extension 1 Press the Station Lock button or press On a programmed button with lights the green light flashes 2 Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension If the code entered in Step 2 matches the code used to lock the extension the extension is unlocked On a button with
303. ht Service is activated at extension 10 calls ring immediately at Night Service extensions regardless of how they ring at other times only the lines assigned to an extension will ring Hunt Group Extensions 505 assigns extensions to one of eight Hunt Groups Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax transfer and fax detection A Hunt Group lets users ring or voice signal the first available nonbusy extension in that group If a ringing call is not answered the system tries each available extension in turn until the call is answered If a voice signaled call is not answered the call does not keep hunting Also use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group if you want outside calls to ring directly into a group System Programming Options Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment The following programming procedures help you manage auxiliary equipment See Chapter 4 for more information about auxiliary equipment configurations or refer to Chapter 5jfor details on using the procedure a Fax Machine Extensions 601 identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected The Music on Hold feature uses the following procedures Music on Hold 602 activates or deactivates the Music on Hold jack on the PARTNER ACS processor module When this jack is activated an audio source is connected and Ring on Transfer 119 is
304. ialing restrictions use those instead of the equipment restrictions If you have PBX or Centrex dialing restrictions on a line and also program equipment restrictions both the PBX or Centrex system and Programming equipment restrictions apply However equipment dialing permissions will not override PBX or Centrex system restrictions Speed Dial and Auto Dial Numbers When you program numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system as Speed Dial and Auto Dial numbers include the PBX or Centrex system dial out code 9 on most systems followed by one or more pauses in the stored number System Programming Options This section discusses programming options that involve multiple procedures such as dialing restrictions and auxiliary equipment settings as well as features that can be used throughout your system such as Speed Dialing You can use a combination of programming procedures to set up your system to operate most efficiently taking into account your company s telephone service personnel and equipment as well as the special needs of particular departments This section lists the procedures you can use For details on using a particular procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 Speed Dialing You can program up to 100 frequently dialed phone numbers such as numbers for suppliers repair services customers so that all users in the system can dial them by pressing four buttons or on a standard phone plus
305. ick up transferred or coverage calls before they return to the transfer return extension or are sent to the covering extension If you intercept a call from the answering machine you will hear a click to notify you that the answering machine has turned off Auto Attendant An auto attendant answers calls and directs them to a specified extension Calling Group or Hunt Group based on the digits a caller dials after listening to a list of choices in a recorded greeting For example the auto attendant could answer calls and tell callers to press 1 for Sales 2 for Parts 3 for Service and so on An auto attendant can be set up for immediate call handling or delayed call handling Backup for Receptionist 4 8 A common use of an auto attendant is as a backup for the receptionist If the receptionist cannot pick up a call within a specified number of rings the auto attendant handles it This prevents calls from going unanswered Figure 4 4 shows how the auto attendant would be connected to your system Auto Attendant Receptionist s Desk Figure 4 4 Backup for Receptionist Call Reporting Devices SMDR To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the auto attendant Make sure that the unit is in backup call answering mode When callers call the main number for your company the receptionist normally picks up the call If the receptionist is busy the auto attendant answers and plays a recorded message such as Pl
306. ickup ldle Line to access a line for making an outside call Users can ring or page any of four Calling Groups For more information see Group Calling Ring Page 5 183 Feature Reference a Users can ring any of the seven Hunt Groups or voice signal Hunt Groups 1 6 For more information see Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal a f Station Lock is used at an extension users cannot dial outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 f dialing restrictions are programmed for an extension the system may prevent a user at that extension from placing certain calls For example a user may not be allowed to dial 900 numbers from the extension Or an extension may be programmed to take incoming calls only so the user cannot dial out at all The following features provide dialing restrictions Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 Line Access Restriction 302 Pool Access Restriction 315 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 The following features can be used to override dialing restrictions Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Emergency Phone Number List 406 Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and System Password 403 a Users with system phones can enter account codes to track incoming and outgoing calls For more information see Account Code Entry You also can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify extensions that must enter account code
307. icted numbers If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use Next Procedure or Prev Procedure to do so since entering and a three digit code will be considered data for the telephone number Feature Reference Valid Entries Examples Up to 12 digits including 0 9 and any single digit The examples below show how you would enter telephone numbers for an Allowed Phone Number List in Step 4 of Programming When an Allowed List is assigned to an extension users can dial numbers on that list even if the numbers would otherwise be restricted Specific Telephone Numbers Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it For example to allow calls to the number 201 555 1111 make the following entries Toll Call Prefix required 12015551111 Toll Call Prefix not required 2015551111 a All Telephone Numbers in One Area Code The following list entries allow calls to the 800 area code Toll Call Prefix required 1800 Toll Call Prefix not required 800 Programming 5 12 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1
308. idual line For initial setup only use Number of Lines 104 to specify the number of lines that will be assigned to the main pool Then use the following procedures as needed Dial Mode 201 to identify any rotary lines the default for all lines is touch tone Pool Line Assignment 207 to remove lines from the main pool and assign lines to auxiliary pools Line Access Mode 313 to change a specific extension s operation from Pooled to Key Refer to Key Extensions to assign lines to those extensions Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove the main pool assign auxiliary pools or change the location of the button used to select an auxiliary pool at specific extensions The location of the two main pool buttons cannot be changed Pool Access Restriction 315 to prevent an extension from receiving and or making outside calls on all lines in specific pools Line Ringing Centralized Telephone Programming to specify when a line or pool will start ringing at each extension that has the line or pool By default lines are set to Immediate Ring and pools are set to No Ring For additional information on line ringing options see Programming al Receptionist s Extension 2 5 Programming Automatic Line Selection Centralized Telephone Programming to specify the order in which the system selects an available line or pool when a user at the extension lifts the handset or presses to make a cal
309. if no one in the group answers the call However if a user answers the call at any extension in the group it is not logged as unanswered at any extension If a Caller ID call is answered by the Direct Extension Dial feature and the caller hangs up without dialing an extension the call is not logged at any extension However if a caller dials an extension that is associated with the Caller ID Logging feature the call is logged as unanswered if it is not answered at the extension To prevent unauthorized persons from viewing the log Caller ID calls cannot be viewed at a locked station The date and time of an incoming call is logged from the Central Office Therefore the date and time of the call that a user sees on the system display phone may be different from the date and time reported in the SMDR report for the extension You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Any users who have system display phones and have lines with Caller ID can view and dial the numbers of logged Caller ID calls You cannot use Caller ID Logging and Dialing F23 if Station Lock F21 or Caller ID Inspect F17 is active To view the Caller ID Call Log a Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing button must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights 5 73 Feature Reference Examples The examples below show how unanswered Caller ID infor
310. igned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension p 5 119 SYSTEM RESET PROGRAMMING SAVED p _5 263 settings Use it only if the system fails to function correctly after a power failure or down period L DIAL 728 IMPORTANT Using this procedure disconnects any active cqalls but retains system J ABBREVIATED RINGING DIAL 305 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Active 1 ring Y 2 Not Active repeated ringing PRESS Next Item to program another extension TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION DIAL 308 DIAL a system extension number DIAL number of the extension 10 57 to which call should return if not answered Extension transferring call w PRESS Next Item to program another extension FORCED ACCOUNT COD DIAL 307 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to program another extension DISTINCTIVE RING DIAL 308 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active PRESS Next item to program another extension p 5 120 INTERCOM DIAL TONE DIAL 309 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Regular 2 Machine PRESS Next Item to program another extension p 5 164 AUTOMATIC VMS COVER p _ 5 37 DIAL 310 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another extension E Pro
311. ilar type or purpose WATS FX etc and is identified by a pool access code The system supports four pools a main pool and three auxiliary pools See a so Hybrid Mode Pool Access Code and Pooled Extension GL 8 Glossary Pool Access Code Release 2 0 or later A three digit code used to access outside lines in a specific pool The main pool and each auxiliary pool are known to the system as 880 881 882 and 883 respectively Users can either dial the pool access code or press a pool button representing one of the pools to make a call Pool Button Release 2 0 or later A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific pool for making calls See also Pooled Extension Pool Number Release 2 0 or later See Pool Access Code Pooled Extension Release 2 0 or later An extension in Hybrid mode that has pool buttons or pool and line buttons See a so Hybrid Mode ana Programmable Button A telephone button that does not have a line or pool assigned it can be set up to dial a number or access a feature Programming See Centralized Telephone Programming jExtension Programming and System Programming Programming Extension An extension from which you can program the system this can be either extension 10 or 11 Proprietary Device A telephone or other device that is designed to work with a specific system and requires a special interface to connect to the public telephone network For example system
312. ilt in speaker on a system phone is designed for individual use Standard Telephones 3 8 In addition to system phones you can connect industry standard touch tone or rotary dial phones and even some feature phones which have built in calling features directly to the system You can also combine standard phones on the same extension with system phones or other devices without using expensive adapters or connectors Standard phones can do many of the things that system phones can do and you can save money by using them in certain situations when a system telephone is not needed Follow these guidelines when using standard phones a Use standard phones as power failure backups system phones will not work If you connect standard phones to the first two extensions on the PARTNER ACS processor module users can place and answer outside calls on the first two lines If you connect a standard phone to the first extension on each 206 module users can place and answer outside calls on the first line of each 206 module You can connect standard phones in combination with system phones at power failure extensions or you can simply keep spare standard phones at those extensions to serve as replacements in case of a power failure Standard Telephones To use a system feature press in place of used on system phones followed by its two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For features that use on system phones dial onl
313. imer restarts when the call is answered The call timer is displayed along with the default display Most messages other than the default display and Caller ID display for approximately 15 seconds Marked System Speed Dial Numbers do not display when they are dialed The display contrast can be adjusted by pressing then using the up volume control button to increase the brightness or the down volume control button to decrease the brightness Adjust the contrast while the phone is idle and the handset is in the cradle The angle of the display is adjustable to three positions low medium and high Display Language 303 Display Language 303 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the language in which display messages appear if the extension has a system display phone The language is set for each extension so phones in the same system can display different languages Considerations If SMDR is used the call report header is printed in the language specified for extension 10 Valid Entries 1 English v 2 Spanish 3 French Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Display Language setting for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the ex
314. ine assigned and a flashing red light next to each button that has a pool assigned To remove all existing pool assignments press before selecting a pool Enter the desired pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 For example to select pool 881 press Pool Extension Assignment 314 Release 2 0 or Later 4 At this point If you want to assign the pool to the first available button with lights press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 1 Assigned If you want to remove a pool assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 2 Not Assigned For auxiliary pools only if you want to assign the pool to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Ext Assign 15 P881 3 Select a Button Then press a button with lights to assign the auxiliary pool to that button If you use option 3 after an auxiliary pool has been assigned the auxiliary pool moves from the old button to the new button you select 5 At this point To assign another pool for this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the pool access code shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 219 Feature Reference Pool Line Assignment 207 Release 2
315. ines a 2 Slot carrier can provide a maximum of 16 extensions or a maximum of 7 lines References in this guide are to 40 extensions and to 19 lines even though no system can be configured with both maximums simultaneously Your system does not have to be configured for the maximum of either extensions or lines F represents the button I represents the button XX represents a system extension number G represents a single digit group number and LL represents a system line number 2 Available only on system phones w PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later 4 PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 or later 5 3 Feature Reference AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 Description This System Programming procedure lets you identify extensions where auto attendants are connected to the system Doing so lets the system notify users with display phones when they are receiving a call that has been transferred from the auto attendant This procedure applies only to auto attendants do not use it with the Automated Attendant Service of a voice messaging system Related Features Considerations Valid Entries For each auto attendant extension use Transfer Return Extension 306 to identify the extension to which a call should be routed if the destination extension does not answer Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to Not Assigned for the auto attendant extension if you want to be able to intercept calls routed to the device Chap
316. information or to order materials contact the Lucent Technologies BCS Publications Center at 1 800 457 1235 or 1 317 361 5353 or your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Maintenance Repair and Ordering Information Hardware Components Ordering additional telephones and modules accessories and replacement parts for your system is convenient Table 1 shows where you can buy system components in the continental United States To take full advantage of your system the sources shown below also can provide you with the optional equipment you might want for your system such as Lucent Technologies fax machines answering machines standard phones voice messaging systems modems paging systems doorphones headsets bells lights strobes music on hold systems and printers You can obtain most items from more than one source either directly from Lucent Technologies or from authorized dealers Sources in the U S are Lucent Technologies Catalog Sales This source is Lucent Technologies national phone mail sales center in Cincinnati A Catalog Associate will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it You can charge your order on a VISA Mastercard or American Express card The Catalog Associate can also give you sales advice and mail you the Lucent Technologies SOURCEBOOK CATALOG of systems telephones and accessories Call 800 451 2100 Lucent Technologies Sale
317. ing from extension 10 or 11 see below and Extension Programming from a user s own extension see Using Extension Programming jon page 2 33 Telephone Models Figure 2 6lillustrates a PARTNER 18D set up as a key extension and illustrates a PARTNER 6 phone set up as a pooled extension As you program buttons mark their functions on the phone s labeling sheet see the examples in Figure 2 6land Figure 2 7 2 30 NOTE A PARTNER 6 phone only has four buttons available for lines for lines or pools If four lines are assigned it has no programmable buttons If the main pool is assigned it has two programmable buttons The MDW 9000 phones look just like a PARTNER 6 phone when you program them centrally Using Telephone Programming goo Recal LNR 3 a 3 3 Fax Shop Warehou Line as eae 5 Programmable ae eae MS Cover DND Priv Buttons eo A Any unused fn Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 line button is programmable ont Drop Sales Home 00 00 00 Figure 2 6 Example of PARTNER 18D Phone as a Key Extension PARTNER 6 PARTNER 6 phone Line Pool Programmable Buttons Privacy Any unused line button is o o programmable Intercom Intercom Pool 880 Pool 880 Ext 0 Message
318. ing Options Call Coverage Rings 116 in Release 2 0 or 320 in Release 3 0 specifies the number of times intercom or transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the covering extension VMS Cover Rings 117 in Release 2 0 or 321 in Release 3 0 specifies the number of times intercom and transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at extensions before they are sent to the voice messaging system Transfer Return Extension 306 identifies the extension to which a Call transferred by the voice messaging system should be routed if the destination extension does not answer and does not have voice mail coverage active The transfer return extension for the voice messaging system is typically extension 10 gt NOTE If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 Then f the covering extension does not answer the call is routed after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage m f the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is immediately routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage Backup and Restore Features The PARTNER
319. ing a required account code For an extension identified as an Hotline 603 or Doorphone Extension 604 605 program the extension to select only the intercom with no outside lines in the selection sequence For an extension identified as an External Hotline 311 program the extension to select outside lines or pools first This feature must be programmed from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature directly You should program Automatic Line Selection when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features However if you want to program both Automatic Line Selection and Extension Name Display which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display For standard touch tone or rotary phones or for any phone used mainly to call other extensions program the extension to select intercom first For combination extensions the automatic line selection for both devices including a standard device follows the automatic line selection for the extension You do not need to include all available lines or pools for an extension only the ones you want the system to search through and connect automatically 5 23 Feature Reference Valid Entries Key Extensio
320. ing activity but the line cannot be used to place or receive calls Valid Entries 1 No Restriction calls permitted on that line v 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on that line 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on that line 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can join calls receive transferred calls or pick up calls on hold on that line 5 171 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 172 To restrict an extension from making calls on a specific line 4 Press Feature Q O System Program System Program H 3 A at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the extension number to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press At the Line prompt enter the line number to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict line 2 press The current restriction displays To change the line restriction for this extension press until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries on the previous page At this point To restrict another line at this extension press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Repeat Step 4 To restrict another extension press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and be
321. ing for an extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 16 press To assign or unassign Automatic Extension Privacy press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Automatic Line Selection Automatic Line Selection Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines the line or pool a user is connected to after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker to make a call The system looks for lines or pools in the order specified by this procedure and selects the first available line or pool For example if you specify outside lines or pools first for an extension but all outside lines or pools are busy the user will hear the intercom dial tone after lifting the handset or turning on the speaker Related Features Considerations To copy the Automatic Line Selection setting as well as other system settings to other extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to an extension Automatic Line Selection for that extension does not apply This means the user must manually select a line or pool after enter
322. ing system features Account Code Entry Background Music Caller ID Name Display Caller ID Inspect Do Not Disturb Caller ID Logging and Dialing Feature Exclusive Hold Manual Signaling Privacy Save Number Redial VMS Cover Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back or Voice Mailbox Transfer Users can however use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 and Automatic VMS Cover 310 which are similar to the Privacy and VMS Cover features Do not use Forced Account Code Entry with a standard phone because the phone will not be able to get dial tone and make calls A display on a standard phone will not show Caller ID information system messages or Caller ID Call Logging information A speaker on a standard phone is not a system integrated speaker therefore it cannot receive voice type calls such as a group page A feature phone is a standard telephone that has feature buttons in addition to the regular 12 key dial pad For example there are feature phones that have programmable auto dial buttons last number redial buttons hold buttons and built in speakers You can use most of the system s dial code features from a feature phone and program them onto a feature phone button However there are some limitations to what these phones can do Learning About Telephones The capabilities of a feature phone are in the phone itself For example if you store a number on a feature phone s auto dial b
323. ion Instructions a Use the Direct Extension Dial Record Playback to record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message lt is recommended that you use only one automated answering option for incoming calls either this feature the Automated Attendant Service of the voice messaging system or a PARTNER Attendant a This feature can handle three outside calls simultaneously If you have lines programmed for Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial answers the call first a A Direct Extension Dial button must be programmed on a button with lights on the system display phone at extension 10 This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Direct Extension Dial to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign or unassign a Direct Extension Dial button with lights at extension 10 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H Q O 5 100 Direct Extension Dial Button 113 Release 2 0 or Later Using 2 If you want to assign Direct Extension Dial to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears DXD Button 1 Assi
324. ion This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated do not receive Caller ID information unless the call is answered Users with Automatic VMS Cover 310 Assigned or with VMS Cover turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to their voice mailbox Users with Call Coverage turned on can activate Do Not Disturb to Send All Calls immediately to the covering extension You cannot use Call Screening F25 with this feature turned on This feature requires a button with lights When the Do Not Disturb feature is on the light is also on indicating that the phone will not ring Use this feature when you do not want the auto attendant or the voice messaging system to transfer calls to you Use this feature if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so calls to the Hunt Group will skip your extension and ring immediately at the next available extension in the group To avoid missing calls when this feature is not needed turn it off If Do Not Disturb is active at a doorphone alert extension the person at the doorphone hears signaling but the alert extension is not signaled Unanswered calls that are transferred from an extension with Do Not Disturb active will ring at that extension if they transfer return 5 121 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones
325. ion 10 or 11 This feature lets you unlock a specific user s locked extension Use this feature when a user forgets the code he or she used to lock the extension Related Features Use Station Lock to lock and unlock from an extension Considerations It is recommended that you do not program this feature on a button Using System Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Press 2 2 Dial the extension number or use an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button for the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked If that extension used a Station Lock button with lights to activate the feature the green light goes off Standard Phone From extension 10 or 11 only 1 Lift the handset You hear the intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the number of the extension that you want to unlock The extension is unlocked 5 258 System Date 101 System Date 101 Description This System Programming procedure sets the month day and year The system displays only the month and day on display phones when the phone is idle the month day and year print on SMDR call reports Related Features Programming The System Date is used to date stamp the backup files when you use Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup Programming Manual 124 Backup Programming Automatic 123 uses the System Date to schedule the automatic backups Backup Programming Automatic 123 and Backup
326. ion number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to program another n n CALLER ID LOG ANSWERED CALLS p_5 68 DIAL 317 20 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active Y PRESS Next item to program another extension CALLER ID CALL LOG LINE 20 p 5 70 DIAL 318 DIAL a system extension number DIAL a system line number PRESS Next Item to associate another line with this extension enter a new extension number and repeat above steps m CALLER ID LOG ALL CALLS 20 DIAL 319 Eez DIAL a system extension number CALL COVERAGE RINGS 32 0 DIAL 320 TED DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number of rings before the call is sent to the covering extension 2 rings 9 For Centralized Telephone Programming see previous pages m p 5 215 DIAL 321 B 2289 EDA 315 i m DIAL one digit 1 9 for the number g DIAL a system extension number a of rings before the call is sent m DIAL a pool number 880 881 wm to the voice messaging system m 882 or 883 rt 3 rings m DIAL 1 No Restriction E 2 Outgoing Only v 3 Incoming Only all J 4 No Access m COPY SETTINGS p 5 96 a DIAL 399 m PRESS Next ter to program DIAL a source extension number m DIAL target extension numbers glo ora anot er oxt nsi n m m PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure A enter a new extension number W Factory setting EEEE
327. is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Ay WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade To order auxiliary equipment refer to Product Ordering Information on page B 4 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 4 3 Using Auxiliary Equipment If a Device Has Trouble Two System Programming procedures can be used to adjust the system settings for auxiliary equipment installed at an extension if a device has trouble answering calls or dialing out If a device such as an answering machine does not pick up transferred or intercom calls you can use Distinctive Ring 308 to change the ringing so that all calls ring like outside calls at that extension If an autodialing device such as a modem has trouble autodialing use Intercom Dial Tone 309 to change the intercom dial tone for the extension to Machine outside line dial tone Answering Machines You can use an answering machine to answer calls at night when no one is around or during business hours when no one can get to the phone If you have a Lucent Technologies answering machine with the Call Intercept feature you can pick up a call that has been answered by the answering machine by joining the call from any system phone When you do so the system sends the answering machine a signal that makes it hang up You can connect answering machines to your
328. is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and a dial out code usually 9 is needed to place calls outside the PBX or Centrex system the control unit may not be able to prevent calls for extensions restricted to Local Only If dialing restrictions are needed on Centrex lines use Centrex restrictions instead If you want to restrict the use of star code s include them in the Disallowed Phone Number Lists 1 No Restriction can make toll local and intercom calls v 2 Inside intercom Only 3 Local intercom and local Only Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify the types of outgoing calls that can be made on all lines at an extension 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program 4 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 30 press To change the type of call restriction press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 205 Feature Reference Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system
329. is unanswered the green light next to the Auto Dial button flutters when the call returns to your extension Calls can be transferred to Calling Groups and Hunt Groups Hunt Group calls do not Transfer Return if the call is not answered and if Transfer Return Rings 105 is set to 4 or more rings When you transfer a call from a display phone the number to which you are transferring the call briefly appears on the display If a transferred call is unanswered the number of the extension that is returning the transferred call also appears on display phones If you are using the system behind a PBX or Centrex system the PBX or Centrex system may include a call transfer feature that lets you transfer a call to another Centrex extension so that the line on which the call came in is free to place and receive other calls However to use Centrex transfer you must be able to dial the extension directly using the Centrex extension number if a Centrex line is shared by several extensions you cannot use Centrex transfer to direct the call to a specific extension For more information about such features see the documentation for your PBX or Centrex system When your Centrex or PBX documentation tells you to use a switchhook flash use the system Recall feature instead On a system phone a transferred call rings with an intercom ring ring BEEP until the originator hangs up then it changes to a transfer ring ring BEEP BEEP On a standard phon
330. it is programmed on a button without lights Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Automatic System Answer to that button Programming 5 26 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign or unassign an Automatic System Answer button with lights at extension 10 1 Press Feature O O System Program System Progra H O O 2 If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 1 Assigned Ext10 If you want to unassign Automatic System Answer press until a display similar to the following appears ASA Button 2 Not Assigned Automatic System Answer Button 111 Release 2 0 or Later If you want to assign Automatic System Answer to a specific button press 8 A display similar to the following appears ASA Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Automatic System Answer to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 Using To turn Automatic System Answer on Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 The green light is on steady and Automatic System Answer is on If calls are ringing
331. k Press intercom Press the programmed button To transfer a call to the target extension While active on the call press Tansjr Press the programmed button 5 189 Feature Reference Message Light Off F10XX Description This feature turns off the message light at a specified extension where XX is a system extension number Related Features For instructions for turning on the message light see Message Light On FO9XX on page 5 192 Considerations This feature turns off the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones on page 1 16 for a list of standard phones with message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a PARTNER ACS processor or 308EC module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module in a system equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns off the message light at a subscriber s extension when messages in the mailbox have been deleted If a message light is inadvertently turned off at an extension that has a message in the mailbox the message light is refreshed during the voice messaging system s daily maintenance 3 a m f you use the Message Light On feature to signal someone at a doo
332. ke announcements over the loudspeaker from a system extension Any Lucent Technologies paging system can be connected to the PAGE jack on the processor module in the control unit See a so Simultaneous Paging M Mailbox See Voice Mailbox Manual Signaling A feature that lets a user signal an extension by pressing a programmed button The phone at the target extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed Alternatively the Manual Signaling button can be used to ring or voice signal the target extension See a so Intercom Auto Dial Button Music on Hold System Equipment that lets you play recorded music or messages to callers who are placed on hold A music on hold audio source can be connected to the RCA jack on the processor module in the control unit See a so Background Music N Network Interface Jack A jack generally located in your equipment room that provides access to an outside line coming into your building from your local telephone company A line cord from the network interface jack to a line jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module a 308EC module a 206 module or a 400 mod ule connects the line to your system Night Service A feature that automatically redirects calls received after hours or when a receptionist is not avail able to answer calls This feature also activates night service operation of the voice messaging system See a so Password GL 7 Glossary O One touch Intercom Callin
333. l For extensions with standard phones set Automatic Line Selection to intercom first This enables standard phones to access equipment features including intercom calling When users lift the handsets on standard phones they hear intercom dial tone To access a pool they can dial the pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 or dial 9 to access the first available line or pool in the sequence Customizing Extensions 2 6 In addition to line or pool assignments the following procedures can be used to customize an extension Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line A user at the extension can activate Call Coverage or VMS Cover for the specified line Use Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension or VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to specify the number of times a call should ring at the owner s extension before it is sent to the owner s voice mailbox Caller ID Call Log Line Association 318 to select the lines to associate with extensions for logging unanswered calls Users can view the Caller ID information for unanswered calls on the phone s display panel and autodial the numbers of the unanswered calls Display Language 303 to specify the language English French or Spanish for messages that appear on a system display phone Automatic Extensio
334. l This feature must be primed before or while the call is ringing at the telephone Users cannot create a conference call while screening a call While a call is being screened dial pad button pushes are ignored A user cannot enter program mode while screening a call Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with the feature Press a programmable button with LEDs Press Program another extension or exit programming mode Call Waiting 316 Call Waiting 316 Description This feature applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure specifies standard phone extensions that are eligible for Call Waiting Users who receive a call waiting tone hear two beeps when they are on a call to indicate a second incoming intercom transferred or outside call The user can press the switchhook or Recall or Flash button if available to put the current call on hold and retrieve the second call To return to the first call the user simply presses the switchhook again Related Features a For instructions for using Call Waiting see Answering Calls Call Waiting does not apply to parked calls See Call Park Considerations This feature is distinct from the local telephone company s Call Waiting feature If you use this system feature do not use your local telephone company
335. l or transfer calls to the extension by pressing the button An Auto Dial number can be stored on any programmable button a button with no line or pool assigned on a system phone Related Features Considerations You can use the Auto Dial button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Call Park Message Light On Message Light Off Station Unlock and Voice Mailbox Transfer To set up a Fax Management button program the fax extension number on an Auto Dial button with lights Special light patterns on the Auto Dial button for the fax extension indicate fax machine status Chapter 4 provides more information about using a Fax Management button Identify fax extensions using Fax Machine Extensions 601 You can include special functions such as a Pause in the Auto Dial number See Special Dialing Functions for more information An Auto Dial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 If you program an extension number on a button with lights the lights show calling activity at the extension see Lights jon page 3 4 You can connect an Intercom Autodialer to the system phones at extension 10 and 11 to have Auto Dial buttons for all of the extensions in your system Each user can have only one
336. l Coverage the Caller ID information is not passed to the covering extension Coverage Call for XX appears instead so the user at the covering extension can identify the person for whom the call was originally intended A user at a covering extension who has a system display phone and who is busy on a call can use Caller ID Inspect to view the number of the extension from which a Call Coverage call is being sent If users are not active on acall and multiple coverage calls are ringing they can press line pool and intercom buttons to view the number of the extension from which each coverage call is being sent however if they pick up the handset they will join or answer the call indicated on the display Caller ID information is displayed if you Join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated Caller ID information is displayed if users pick up calls with Direct Line Pickup Active Line Call Pickup or Group Pickup but the restrictions stated previously apply For incoming calls Caller ID information displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extension This means that extensions with Do Not Disturb activated or extensions that have lines with Line Ringing set to No Ring do not receive Caller ID information However Caller ID information is displayed once the call is answered or if the line is preselected Caller ID Type 122 can be set to either USA or Singapore For proper ope
337. l PMVS refer to the PARTNER MAIL VS Installation and Programming Guide Related Features a The person initiating this feature can add additional parties to the conference call until the conference limit is exceeded A user active ona conference call may turn on this feature during the conference A user can put the Record a Call on hold just as if the user were putting a conference call on hold Outside parties will not hear Music on Hold 602 since PMVS is still connected to the call If PMVS detects 15 seconds of silence it will drop off the call A call that is being recorded cannot be transferred The transfer button is ignored Acall that is being recorded cannot receive a Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 call lf the user presses the Recall button while recording an intercom call the entire conversation will be dropped Users cannot join a call that is being recorded You can not use Record a Call with Call Screening F25 Considerations 5 228 A Record a Call button with LEDs must be programmed on a telephone A maximum of two conversations can be recorded at one time per system When two conversations are being recorded the red LED associated with this feature becomes red steady Record a Call F24 Release 3 0 or Later Programming Using 1 arf oO DN If another user attempts to record a call while two others are being recorded and pushes the red steady Record a Call butt
338. l the user turns the feature off by pressing the button again When the feature is primed Call Screening begins once the voice mail system has answered the call While the call is being screened the user is connected to the call in a listen only mode on the speakerphone The user is able to hear both the outgoing announcement and the incoming caller leaving the message One call can be screened at a time at an extension If more than one call is ringing the system uses the ringing line order procedure to determine which of the eligible calls to screen Once Call Screening begins the user can Answer the screened call by going off hook on the handset This causes voice mail to drop off the call Turn the feature off by pressing the call screening button again The telephone drops off the call but the voice mail system will not drop off the call a Answer or place another call This causes the telephone to drop off the call LED Indicators A green steady LED for the button indicates that Call Screening is primed but not currently screening any calls While a call is being screened the button LEDs alternately flash red and green to indicate that the connection has been established Green off red off indicates that Call Screening is not primed 5 59 Feature Reference Related Features Considerations Programming 5 60 1 a A WwW DY Dialable features that will interrupt Call Screening are Last Number Redial
339. lass A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will have to correct the interference at his or her own expense Class B Compliance The Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module configuration and the 2 Slot configuration using a 200 a 206 or a 400 module have been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manuals may cause harmful interference to radio communications FCC Notification and Repair Information This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its rules In compliance with those rules you are advised of the following Means of Connection Connection to the telephone network shall be through a sta
340. leaving a message in the user s mailbox Fax calling tone detection to automatically route incoming fax calls to a fax machine Record a Call to record an active conversation in the user s mailbox PMVS 5 0 or later is required Unique line ringing for a user to differentiate which line is ringing Enhanced Programmable Features Call Coverage Rings VMS Cover Rings VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule Automatic Daylight Savings Time 911 Calls do not require account code entry gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 A WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required Overview System Components Modular hardware design makes the system easy to install and expand The basic system consists of a PARTNER ACS processor module which supports three lines and eight extensions Using these lines and extensions you can add various optional devices and telephones to configure your system to meet your needs To expand the system to include more lines and extensions simply attach additional modules and a carrier to contain them The term control unit is used to refer
341. lect another procedure or exit programming mode Caller ID Name Display F16 Caller ID Name Display F16 Description This feature lets users with system display phones toggle the display between Caller ID number and Caller ID name Caller ID name is an optional feature of the Caller ID service provided by your local telephone company and may not be available in your area even if Caller ID number is available Related Features Considerations Programming To view Caller ID information for a second call while active on a call users can program Caller ID Inspect onto a button Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information This feature has no effect on Call Coverage calls Coverage calls always display the extension number of the user who is sending calls for coverage You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 This feature must be programmed on a button with lights on a system display phone When Caller ID Name Display is on the green light is on indicating that the Caller ID name will be displayed rather than the Caller ID number SMDR reports print only Caller ID number where available If a number is not available it is reported as IN on the call report See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Caller ID Name Display button 1 oF sp IN Press Featur
342. lect another procedure or exit programming mode 6 To remove an existing password repeat steps 1 and 2 and press Remove 7 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Using For more information about administering your system remotely from a PC see the Getting Started Guide which accompanies the PARTNER ACS Release 3 0 Remote Administration Software 5 231 Feature Reference Restore Programming 125 Description This System Programming procedure enables you to reinstate your system and telephone programming except the System Day System Date and System Time to the settings saved on a PC Card at the last system backup manual or automatic This procedure is useful if your system settings become corrupted if you make changes and decide you would rather use the former settings or if you replace your processor module and want to retain the system settings you had on the previous processor module A successful restore takes about five seconds gt NOTE When a restore completes successfully the Restore Complete message displays for two seconds at idle extensions 10 and 11 and then a System Reset Programming Saved 728 occurs disconnecting any calls in progress It is recommended that you warn users before beginning a restore or do the restore during nonbusiness hours Related Features Backup Programming Automatic 123 automatically saves your programmed settings at regular intervals Backup P
343. lection Rings Transfer Return 105 5 273 Rings VMS Cover 117 Rotary dial 5 236 SAC see Send All Calls Safety instructions x Save Number Redial 5 237 0 Self Service Center on the Internet Customer 6 1 si SendAllCalls 5 239 __ o Setup Initial 2 3 o Sharing an Extension 3 12 0 Simultaneous Paging 5 241 __ _ SMDR see Station Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Output Format 610 description SMDR Record Type 608 5 243 5 245 ___ SMDR Talk Time 611 SMDR Top of Page 609 5 249 Speaker on standard phone 3 11 S onsystemphone 3 8 0 Speaker Spkr Button 3 3 0 Speakerphone performance tips using 3 8 CS separate 42 OOOO SOS Special Dialing Functions 5 250 __ Speed Dialing auto dial buttons 5 17 ___ S personal speed dial numbers 5 209 system speed dial numbers 5 265 Standard Devices answering machines auto attendant 4 8 callreportingdevice 4 9 Cd contact closure device 4 138 22222202222 O creditcardscanners 4 15 CS fax machines 4 280 limitations modems 4 23 voice messaging system Standard devices telephones 1 16 00 Standard Phones dial code features display 3 11 feature buttons on feature phones limitations 1 17 3 10 ___ S o message waiting compatibility 5 190 5 192 lt overview 3 8 power failure for use during problems with ringing patterns sp
344. lights the green light turns off If the code entered in Step 2 does not match the code used to lock the extension the extension remains locked On a button with lights the green light remains on steady Repeat the unlocking procedure above Standard Phone To lock a standard touch tone phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press You hear intercom dial tone again 3 Enter a four digit code using digits 0 9 You hear intercom dial tone again 5 256 Station Lock F21 4 Re enter the four digit code If the code entered in Step 4 matches the code entered in Step 3 you hear silence The extension is locked If the code entered in Step 4 does not match the code entered in Step 3 you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains unlocked Repeat the locking procedure above To unlock a standard touch tone phone at Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press m You hear intercom dial tone again Enter the four digit code that you used to lock the extension If the code entered in Step 3 matches the code used to lock the extension you hear silence and the extension is unlocked If the code entered in Step 3 does not match the code used to lock the extension you hear fast busy tone and the extension remains locked Repeat the unlocking procedure above 5 257 Feature Reference Station Unlock F22 Description This feature is available only at extens
345. lines and extensions The system allows up to 15 lines and up to 32 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously Table 1 2 Configurations for Maximum Lines or Maximum Extensions for Release 1 0 and Release 1 1 Configuration Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module Total 3 lines 8 extensions PARTNER ACS processor module Total 8 extensions 3 lines 2 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module One 400 module Total 7 lines 8 extensions One PARTNER ACS processor module One 206 module Total 14 extensions 5 lines 5 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module Two 206 modules Two 400 modules Total 15 lines 20 extensions One PARTNER ACS processor module Four 206 modules Total 32 extensions 11 lines System Components For PARTNER ACS Release 2 0 or later the system allows up to 19 lines and up to 40 extensions however these maximums cannot be achieved simultaneously Table 1 3 Configurations for Maximum Lines or Maximum Extensions for Release 2 0 or Later Configuration Maximum Lines Maximum Extensions Stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module Total 3 lines 8 extensions PARTNER ACS processor module Total 8 extensions 3 lines 2 Slot Carrier One PARTNER ACS processor module One 400 module Total 7 lines 8 extensions One PARTNER A
346. ll is on hold Do not hang up the handset while the call is on hold If you hang up the handset the phone rings Lifting the handset reconnects you to the held call To retrieve a call that you put on hold 1 Hang up The call rings back 2 Lift the handset You are reconnected to the held call To retrieve a call that a person at another extension put on hold 1 Lift the handset 2 At the intercom dial tone dial 8 and the two digit line number To answer a call when you are already on a call you hear a call waiting tone two beeps 1 Press the switchhook The first call is put on hold and you are connected to the new call 2 To return to the first call press the switchhook again 3 You can continue to press the switchhook to move between the two calls Hold Disconnect Time 203 Hold Disconnect Time 203 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the hold disconnect time for an outside line When a caller on hold hangs up the local telephone company may send a special signal to the system to free the line Different telephone companies use different length signals The length of the signal is called the hold disconnect time If you put a call on hold and the caller hangs up but the call does not disconnect within a minute after the caller hangs up the hold disconnect time is probably set too high or set at No Detection Considerations m lf the telephone company does
347. lled party answer the problem is solved m f the problem is not solved call the hotline see page 6 1 Automatically Dialed Calls Beginning with Star Codes Are Misrouted Possible Cause The Star Code Dial Delay setting is not inserting a long enough pause allowing a portion of the phone number to be dialed before the second dial tone from the Central Office is established What to do Use Star Code Dial Delay 410 to increase the Star Code Dial Delay setting Using the Recall Feature Has No Effect Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too short What to do Increase the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds m If the Recall feature works the problem is solved a Ifthe Recall feature still does not work continue increasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Using the Recall Feature Disconnects Call This problem applies when the system is installed behind a PBX or Centrex system or with the local phone company s Call Waiting feature Possible Cause Recall Timer Duration setting is too long What to do Decrease the Recall Timer Duration 107 by 100 milliseconds 6 14 Problems with Combination Extensions u Ifthe Recall feature works properly the problem is solved a lf the Recall feature still disconnects calls continue decreasing the Recall Timer Duration by increments of 100 milliseconds until the problem is solved Pr
348. lls to any of the extensions in Hunt Group 7 which contains the extensions associated with the voice messaging system Call Forwarding Call Follow Me F11 XX XX Atanextension that has Call Forwarding activated if multiple calls are ringing the system forwards them one at a time This means that each subsequent call is not forwarded until the previous call is finished a f you press the Call Forwarding button after a call starts to ring that call will not be forwarded You can program Call Forwarding on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are forwarded When the green light is on your calls are forwarded when the green light is off calls ring at your extension lf the Call Forwarding feature code and optional originating and destination extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Forwarding on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Forwarding is on even if calls are forwarded to a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Forwarding off Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Call Forwarding button 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 En
349. lows you to combine your Personal Computer PC running Microsoft Windows 3 1 or later Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Version 3 11 or later or Windows 95 with your phone You can then use your PC for tasks such as dialing out from an electronic phone list and logging phone calls Music on Hold systems allow you to play recorded music or messages to callers while they are on hold by connecting the audio source to the processor module The system supports the Lucent Technologies Magic on Hold system and most models from other manufacturers The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually Remote Administration Units RAUs allow you to perform System and Centralized Telephone Programming from a remote location Users of Partner ACS Release 3 0 can also perform Remote Programming using Partner ACS Remote Administration software which is available separately Extra alerts help make users aware of incoming calls For example you can use an audible alert chime horn or bell to replace a phone ring ina noisy area such as a factory Similarly you can use a visual alert strobe or light to replace a phone ring in
350. ls the originator extension For pickup calls the extension picking up the call For forwarded calls the extension answering the forwarded call For coverage calls the extension answering the coverage call a Ifthe calling party hangs up on an Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial call before someone at an extension answers this field shows 00 Account Code This is the account code up to 16 digits assigned to the call This code typically is used for charging calls to a specific client project or department Using Auxiliary Equipment Considerations Output Format Talk This is the time a user spends on an incoming outside call from the time the user answers the call to the time the call is disconnected from the system The talk time is shown in hh mm ss format where hh is the hour mm is the minutes and ss is the seconds If the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial feature this field does not include the time the caller listens to the greeting or waits for someone to answer the call For all other calls the time in this field is the same as the time in the Duration field This field is included on the call report only if SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active If a report cannot print because the printer is jammed or out of paper the system will store up to 45 records in its memory until they can be printed Additional calls will not be recorded Befo
351. ls without lifting the handset you can use the speaker and the microphone instead Use these techniques to make calls with the speaker and the microphone 3 6 To make a call without lifting the handset press to get a dial tone then dial the number and you will hear the call ringing When the other party answers you can talk without lifting the handset System Telephones lf you are already on a call you can switch from the handset to the speaker and microphone by pressing and hanging up the handset Conversely if you are using the speaker and microphone and want to switch to the handset lift the handset and the speaker and microphone will turn off To turn off the microphone when you are using the speaker press Wic HFA This will mute your voice so the other party cannot hear you a Use the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature to answer voice signaled calls without lifting the handset see below Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI When you receive a voice signaled intercom call your phone beeps once to indicate that your speaker has been turned on automatically and you hear the caller s voice over your phone s speaker If you leave your microphone on all the time you can start talking when you hear the caller without lifting the handset This feature is called Hands Free Answer on Intercom Any user in the system can make a voice signaled call to an idle system phone by pressing then dialing an ext
352. ly in order for the performance of that music to be lawful it must be licensed annually to the user by the copyright owners or their representatives such as ASCAP or BMI The Magic on Hold system includes the required license for the first year This license must be renewed annually Background Music stops when a user makes or answers a call but resumes when the phone becomes idle again If a system phone and a standard phone with a message waiting light are connected in a combination extension the standard phone s message waiting light will not light if Background Music is on at the system phone You can program a Background Music button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch A button with lights is recommended Call Screening F25 overrides Background Music See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Background Music button 1 af wo DN Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program Altavoz Transfer extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 39 Feature Reference Using 5 40 To turn Background Music on 1 From a system phone with a speaker press
353. m Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press then Gystem Program To move back to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program Using Extension Programming Users can program features or store numbers on buttons from their own phones using Extension Programming Keep in mind the following exceptions Automatic Line Selection Line Ringing and Call Screening F25 always must be programmed using Centralized Telephone Programming If a user has a standard phone Personal Speed Dial Numbers for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming If a user has a standard phone or a non display system phone Extension Name Display for the extension can be programmed only by using Centralized Telephone Programming 2 33 Programming To program at the extension use the following procedure 1 To start programming dial The green lights next to buttons on which lines or pools are assigned for the extension show the current Line Ringing settings Remaining buttons can be programmed with telephone numbers extension numbers or system features 2 To assign a name to the extension press left intercom then enter the character codes See Extension Name Display for the codes 3 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers Auto Dial numbers or sys
354. mM Y _6G HH u Ca FF Next Next Next J7 Procedure Item Data Q Remove o reel Sel OS e ss l procsdure ian 7 baa Enter 7 Q R 5 T cc BB M N o P AA Z G H J K L A B c D E F System Central J J J Program Tel Program a Message MLS 6 Phone 0 a o a o A o B o C a D Intercom Intercom o o Ext o a Volume Vv A OQ Spkr MLS 18D 12D 12 Phone N o o o o oM1 GN aO gP iai o a ol old ok ol o o o BLE gE aG aH o Oo a a oA oB aC gD u Intercom o Intercom a o o Volume Speakerphone Vv A DI Spk Bl Mic HFAI MLS 34D Phone o o o o o o oU oY G_WI gX GLEE GLFF Oo mi E o a a oQ LR oS oT Lec aLBD o o o o o o oM LNI LO LP LAA BB o o o o o o o oLJ d GLK otd aY aZ o o o o 5 E 5 F S G g H iTe Intercom o o o o oA oB oC oP a o Figure D 1 Programming from a PARTNER 34D Phone D 2 Overview
355. machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code To Program olf If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover If extension X is a pooled extension use Line Extension Assignment 314 to assign all the pools to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines to extension X that you want the answering machine to cover Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to Immediate Ring Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 Adjust the answering machine to answer according to your needs For example set the machine to answer on the fourth ring during the day so someone has a chance to pick up the call 4 5 Using Auxiliary Equipment Multiple Answering Machines 4 6 If a single answering machine cannot handle all your calls you can set up two or more machines at different extensions Figure 4 2 so that a call does not go unanswered If one answering machine is busy a second call will be answered by the second machine A setup such as this might be used by a movie theater to announce movie times to people calling for information Figure 4 2 M
356. mail coverage Valid Entries Extension transferring call v Any extension other than the one transferring the call 5 271 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 272 To change the Transfer Return Extension for a specific extension 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 3 at extension 10 or 11 2 Dial the number of the originating extension 3 Dial the number of the extension to which the call should return if it is not answered To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Transfer Return Rings 105 Transfer Return Rings 105 Description This System Programming procedure which applies to all system extensions defines the number of times a transferred call rings before it goes to the transfer return extension Related Features Considerations Valid Entries By default transferred calls return to the originating extension if they are not answered You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different return extension for the extension that transfers a call If you program Hunt Group Extensions 505 make sure this setting is four or more rings This settin
357. make a call you may want to increase the number of touch tone receivers by adding 206 1 receiver 400 2 receivers or 308EC 6 receivers modules to avoid future problems Call the hotline see page 6 1 If you wait 30 seconds and still do not hear a dial tone go to Possible Cause 7 Possible Cause 7 Local phone company line is faulty What to do One at a time unplug each outside line from each 206 308EC 400 and 200 module in the control unit Then plug each line into a standard telephone and try to make a call m Ifthe trouble occurs on the standard phone try another line cord if the trouble persists report it to your local phone company m Ifthe trouble does not occur on the standard phone the trouble is with your control unit Call the hotline see pag Troubleshooting Trouble Making Outside Calls from Pool Buttons on Pooled Extensions 6 12 Trouble making outside calls from a pool button could be one of the following a You hear nothing at all You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial You hear a dial tone and the dial tone cuts off when you try to dial You hear a reorder or busy signal if you try to dial a pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 at intercom dial tone You notice that the red light next to a pool button is on steady most or all of the time indicating that the pool is busy Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension
358. mation is logged Programming Line 6 is associated with extensions 11 and 12 for Call Logging If a Central Office call rings and is not answered on line 6 it is logged as unanswered on extensions 11 and 12 If it is answered it is logged only if the answering extension has been programmed to log answered calls or to log all calls Line 5 is associated with extension 11 for call logging A user at extension 11 answers a call transfers it to extension 12 and the caller hangs up before it is answered The call is logged as unanswered at extension 12 When a call is answered it is not logged unless the system has been programmed to log answered calls using the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 programming procedure or an extension is programmed to answer all calls using the Caller ID Log Line Assignment 318 and Caller ID Log All Calls 319 features See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Call Log Display button 1 3 4 5 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature For example to program extension 12 press Press a programmable button with lights Press o Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using the Call ID Logging and
359. mber but before hanging up To redial a stored number press the programmed button again or press again Send All Calls Send All Calls Description You can use the Call Coverage or VMS Cover with Do Not Disturb buttons to send intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on owned lines immediately to your voice mailbox Related Features Using If Call Coverage is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call and any subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension This allows callers to receive coverage without waiting for the number of rings specified with Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 If VMS Cover is on and a call that is eligible for coverage begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to immediately send that call and subsequent calls to your voice mailbox This allows callers to leave a message without waiting for the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 If Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that coverage call and all subsequent calls immediately to the covering extension If there is no answer at the covering extension the calls go to your voice mailbox after the number of rings specified with VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 Use Line Coverage Extension 208 to identify an extension as the owner of a specific outside line To send a covered call im
360. mediately to the covering extension If Call Coverage is not turned on while the call is ringing press the Call Coverage button The ringing call is sent immediately to the covering extension subsequent calls go to the covering extension after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings If Call Coverage is turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All Covered calls are sent immediately to the covering extension until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send a call immediately to the voice messaging system If VMS Cover is not turned on while the call is ringing press the VMS Cover button The ringing call is sent immediately to your voice mailbox subsequent calls go to your voice mailbox after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 5 239 Feature Reference SS r 5 240 If VMS Cover is already turned on press the Do Not Disturb button All covered calls are sent immediately to the voice messaging system until you turn off Do Not Disturb To send covered calls immediately to coverage when Call Coverage and VMS Cover are both on press Do Not Disturb All calls go to the covering extension If there is no answer the calls go to your voice mailbox Simultaneous Paging I 70 Simultaneous Paging I 70 Description This feature accesses the loudspeaker paging system if you have one connected to the system through the PAGE jack on the prim
361. mes in on a line or pool that is assigned to that user s phone Line or pool assignments for extensions in the Night Service group can vary from one extension to another Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation If you reassign the Night Service button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned 5 197 Feature Reference Valid Entries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select Button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Night Service Button at extension 10 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H at extension 10 2 At this point a f you want to assign Night Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 f you want to remove the Night Service button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 2 Not Assigned f you want to assign Night Service to a specific button press 3 A display similar to the following appears Night Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable butto
362. messaging system mailboxes from fax machine extensions If an automatic fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system the Automated Attendant Service of that system can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines if you have multiple fax machines See the PARTNER MAIL documentation for instructions 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify a Fax Machine extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 6 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the extension to which the fax machine is connected For example to identify extension 30 press To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next Item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 137 Feature Reference Forced Account Code Entry 307 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure identifies specific extensions at which users must enter an account code prior to making outside calls The account code can be used to charge telepho
363. mode 5 29 Feature Reference Automatic System Answer Lines 204 Release 2 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure identifies the lines on which incoming calls should be answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Related Features Considerations 5 30 After a call is answered Automatic System Answer plays a greeting and then either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn this feature on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button Calls that ring on lines programmed with Automatic System Answer are picked up after two rings as a default To change this number use Automatic System Answer Delay 110 You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call If there is no message recorded for Automatic System Answer the caller will be placed on hold immediately after the system answers You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call For callers to hear Music on Hold Music on Hold
364. mpany Related Features This procedure affects the operation of dialing restrictions and permissions For more information see Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Emergency Phone Number List 406 Valid Entries 1 0or 1 required before Area Code and Number v 2 Area Code and Number Only Program See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Toll Call Prefix setting 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 269 Feature Reference Touch Tone Enable F08 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user send touch tone signals on an outside call over a rotary line For example a user may need to dial touch tone digits while on a call to a bank by phone service Related Procedures You must use Dial Mode 201 to identify rotary lines to the system To activate this feature from within a number stored on an Auto Dial button or as part of a Speed Dial number press when storing the number see Special Dialing Functions Considerations a This feature is needed only when dialing on a rotary line a Use Touch Tone Enable only after a call is connected
365. n Outside system lines Left Intercom v Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button 2 Left Intercom Right Intercom v Pools 881 883 individual lines Examples System Phone At key extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an idle outside line in numerical order starting with the lowest line number Then if all outside lines are busy the system searches for an idle intercom line This order can be changed however to accommodate your business needs For example a telemarketing firm with a WATS line line 5 to reduce telephone expenses would set Automatic Line Selection for all telemarketers extensions to 05 01 02 03 04 Intercom This way the WATS line would be selected first At pooled extensions with Automatic Line Selection at its factory setting the system first searches to find an available line in the main pool pool 880 button 1 then button 2 If all outside lines in the pool are busy the system selects an idle intercom line However you can change the order to accommodate a different automatic line selection For example your boss prefers her individual line line 15 to be selected when she lifts the handset then auxiliary pool 881 which is used for making international calls To do this set Automatic Line Selection to 15 881 Intercom Examples Standard Phone If a standard phone user intends to place intercom calls and access system featu
366. n Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a call at the extension This feature is also useful for extensions connected to a modem fax or any device whose function can be disrupted by someone trying to join it Forced Account Code Entry 307 to prevent the extension from making an outside call until a required account code is entered You can also use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes this ensures that only authorized users with valid account codes can make outside calls Call Waiting 316 to identify standard phone extensions that can receive the system not the local telephone company call waiting tone for a second incoming call when active on a call Outgoing Call Restriction 401 to prevent the extension from making certain types of outgoing calls on all system lines Changing Settings after Installation Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more Disallowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to create the lists of outside numbers that extensions cannot dial Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign one or more Allowed Phone Number Lists to the extension Use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of outside numbers that otherwise restricted extensions can dial Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 and Hu
367. n another list To program another extension PRESS Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new extension number and repeat above steps FORCED ACCOUNT CODE LIST DIAL 409 DIAL a list entry 01 99 To add entry DIAL the account code up to 6 digits PRESS Enter PRESS Remove to remove a list entry PRESS Next Item to program another list_entr STAR CODE DIAL DELAY DIAL 410 p 5 252 DIAL 0 0 Seconds Delay 1 Second Delay 2 Seconds Delay 3 Seconds Delay 4 Seconds Delay 5 Seconds Delay Not Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 PRESS Feature o o to enter programming mode PRESS Feature lt DIAL a three digit code 600 699 DIAL the telephone number up to 28 digits including special characters see page 5 250 To mark it to overide restrictions dial before the telephone number To program another number or to change a number repeat PRESS Feature fo to exit programming mode PRESS Feature 0 to enter programming mode PRESS Feature DIAL the System Speed Dial number s code 600 699 PRESS Mic HFAI To remove another number repeat PRESS Feature 0 1 to exit programming mode PICKUP GROUP EXTENSION DIAL 501 DIAL a group number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y PRESS Next Item to assign another extension CALLING GROUP ee E DIAL 502 DIAL a gr
368. n any one of four Calling Groups G is a Calling Group number from 1 4 When paging the caller hears a beep and begins speaking the caller s voice is heard on the speakers of all idle system phones in the selected Calling Group The first extension to answer the call by picking up the handset or pressing Spkr or by pressing to answer a page is connected to the caller Related Features You must use Calling Group Extensions 502 to assign extensions to a Calling Group Extensions assigned to Calling Group 1 can receive Simultaneous Paging Considerations Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group Exclude extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines internal and external hotline phones and doorphones from Calling Groups f some extensions in a Calling Group have standard MLC 6 or TransTalk 9000 series phones those extensions are not signaled for voice paged calls to the group because they do not have built in speakers f a Calling Group is in use a user attempting to page that group hears a busy tone fa user leaves the microphone on for hands free answer on intercom HFAI the microphone is turned off when that phone receives a group page the user must lift the handset or press Wic HFA to answer the page Calls can be transferred to a Calling Group manually or using a button programmed to ring the Calling Group You can program a
369. n the continental U S the mode must be registered with the Federal Communications Commission FCC see FCC Registration later in this section Overview Key Mode When the system operates in Key mode individual outside lines are assigned to users extensions for making and receiving calls At extensions with system phones each individual line Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 etc assigned to the extension is represented by its own line button Users can press any of the available line buttons on their system phones to make outside calls Standard phone users must dial 9 at intercom dial tone to make an outside call since their phones do not have line buttons Key mode enables users to easily join calls since each line button can be labeled using a unique line number For example if you are requested to join a call on Line 2 you simply press the line button labeled Line 2 Key mode also lets users monitor call activity using the lights next to the line button everyone who has a specific line assigned to their extension can tell when an incoming call is ringing on that line when a call on that line is on hold and when that line is in use At installation the system assigns outside lines to the buttons on all system phones from left to right starting with the bottom row of buttons On an extension basis you can change which lines are assigned and which buttons are used to select the lines if desired All extensions
370. n with lights to assign Night Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Night Service button at extension 10 Using To turn Night Service on 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 f a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 f no System Password is programmed the green light is on steady and Night Service is on 5 198 Night Service Button 503 2 Enter the password The green light is on steady Night Service is on To turn Night Service off 1 Press the Night Service button at extension 10 f a System Password is programmed the green light next to the button flashes you must continue with Step 2 f no System Password is programmed the green light goes out and Night Service is off 2 Enter the password The green light goes out Night Service is off 5 199 Feature Reference Night Service Group Extensions 504 Description This System Programming procedure assigns extensions to the Night Service Group When Night Service is on and a call comes in all extensions in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of normal Line Ringing settings Any extensions that would normally ring during the day will also ring Related Features Considerations Valid Entries You must use Night Service Button 503 to program the button that is used to turn
371. name Or if you know the feature by its System Programming procedure code or feature dial code consult the in the following section to find the correct feature name 5 1 Feature Reference Numerical Listing of Procedure Codes and Dial Codes System Programming Procedures Table 5 1 101 System Date 314 Pool Extension Assignment 102 System Day 315 Pool Access Restriction 103 System Time 316 Call Waiting 104 Number of Lines 317 Caller ID Log Answered Calls 105 Transfer Return Rings 318 Caller ID Call Log Line Association 107 Recall Timer Duration 319 Caller ID Log All Calls 108 Rotary Dialing Timeout 320 Call Coverage Rings 109 Outside Conference Denial 321 VMS Cover Rings 110 Automatic System Answer Delay 399 Copy Settings 111 Automatic System Answer Button 401 Outgoing Call Restriction 112 Direct Extension Dial Delay 402 Toll Call Prefix 113 Direct Extension Dial Button 403 System Password 114 Outgoing Call Restriction Button 404 Disallowed Phone Number Lists 115 Wake Up Service Button 405 Disallowed List Assignments 116 Call Coverage Rings 406 Emergency Phone Number List 117 VMS Cover Rings 407 Allowed Phone Number Lists 119 Ring on Transfer 408 Allowed List Assignments 121 Automatic System Answer Mode 409 Forced Account Code List 122 Caller ID Type
372. nce Using 1 Lift the handset of the external hotline After approximately three seconds the programmed phone number is dialed automatically 2 If you do not hear dial tone or dialing noises hang up for about 20 seconds and try again 3 When the call is answered speak into the handset 5 134 Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Release 3 0 or Later Description To use Fax CNG Detection you must have a voice messaging system or ASA DXD You must also have your system configured in one of these ways Partner ACS as a stand alone module 308EC version 2 module in slot 1 any modules in remaining slots 200 206 400 module in slot 1 308EC version 2 module in any other slot Fax CNG Detection will not work if you have a 308EC version 1 module in slot 1 This feature allows voice calls and fax calls to be received on the same line which eliminates the need for a dedicated fax line When the start button on a fax machine is pressed the fax machine sets up to send a fax The sending fax machine sends a special tone called a calling tone or CNG tone This tone is sent while the call is being dialed connected through the network ringing until the call is answered If another fax machine answers the appropriate signals are sent back to the calling fax machine to send the fax transmission When an incoming call is answered by PVM PMVS PARTNER MAIL
373. nce The system is factory set to return a transferred call after it rings four times at the destination extension to the extension that transferred it You can use Transfer Return Rings 105 to change the number of rings for all system extensions You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to program a different extension to which unanswered calls from a particular extension should return If users transfer a call Caller ID information if it is available is passed to the destination extension If you have a voice messaging system you can use Voice Mailbox Transfer to transfer a caller directly to a subscriber s voice mailbox An extension programmed with Call Waiting 316 cannot transfer either of two active calls This feature cannot be used with Record a Call F24 Call Screening F25 and Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 When you press anst the call is put on hold and its associated green light winks A transferred call appears on the destination extension s intercom button unless the destination extension has a line button for the line on which the call was received 5 275 Feature Reference When a call you transferred is answered if you began the call on an individual line the red light goes on next to the line button goes on if you began the call on a line in a pool the call no longer appears on your phone If you transfer a call to an extension for which you have an Auto Dial button and the call
374. nd green light emitting diode LED and two AAA user replaceable batteries The module also provides support for integrated Caller ID information on system display phones The system requires one PARTNER ACS processor module 200 Module has two outside line jacks but no extension jacks This module is an inexpensive way to add lines when you do not need more extensions 206E Module has jacks to connect a maximum of two outside telephone lines and six extensions to the system You can connect telephones and other telecommunications devices such as fax machines and modems to the extension jacks either directly or through your building s modular wall jacks Each 206E module has a green power indicator that shows it is receiving power 400E Module is similar to the 206E module but without extension jacks It has four outside line jacks Like the 200 module this module is an inexpensive way to add lines when you do not need more extensions System Components 206EC 400EC Modules provide the same capabilities as the 206E and 400E modules respectively but add support for Caller ID information on system display phones To get Caller ID first you must subscribe to the service from your local phone company if it is available on a per line basis then connect those lines associated with Caller ID to the line jacks on the 206EC and or 400EC modules Any users with system display phones who receive calls on Caller ID lines will get C
375. ndard Telephones Feature Phones Because there are no line buttons on standard phones users must use Direct Line Pickup ldle Line to select a specific line otherwise the system selects an idle line automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone For information about Automatic Line Selection see Chapter 5 Similarly because there are no pool butions on standard phones users must dial pool access codes at the intercom dial tone to request access to an idle pooled line See Making Calls for instructions on using pool access codes Otherwise the system selects an idle line from a pool automatically when the user dials a 9 at intercom dial tone Unless Call Waiting 316 is assigned to specific standard phone extensions there is no indication of a second call and an inside caller will hear a busy tone if a standard phone is in use If Call Waiting is assigned the user hears a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in for the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated The user can use the switchhook to put the first call on hold and speak to the party on the second call and to switch back and forth between the two parties Users can make a voice signaled call from a standard phone but if users try to make a voice signaled call fo a standard phone it will ring because the standard phone does not have a system speaker Users cannot use the System Password Users cannot access the follow
376. ndard network interface jack USOC RJ11C These USOCs must be ordered from your local telephone company FCC compliant line cords are provided with Line and Line Extension Modules for connecting to the telephone company provided USOC RJ11C jacks Use only FCC compliant line cords and jacks for these connections This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines Notification to the Telephone Companies Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following The telephone number s you will be using with this equipment m The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number REN which can be found on the right hand side of the control unit a The facility interface code which is O2LS2 You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the line s REN Information The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the same telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line as determined by the total RENs contact the local telephone company Repair Instructions If you experience trouble because your equipment is m
377. ndividual lines you want the scanner to use to extension X Set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select the pools and outside lines that the scanner is to use Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension If the scanner has an auto answer feature turn it off For multiple scanners repeat Steps 1 5 for each extension 4 15 Using Auxiliary Equipment Fax Machines This section suggests several ways you can set up fax machines to work with your system It includes instructions for programming and using a Fax Management button on a system phone in order to monitor the status of a fax machine and transfer calls to it with a single touch and for transferring calls to the fax machine extension Preventing Inappropriate Fax Answering When lines appear on a fax extension you will want to make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this a Set the fax machine for delayed pickup a Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to either delayed ring or no ring Recommended Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension Using the Fax Management Feature On any system phone you can program a button with lights to serve as a Fax Management button The lights next to this
378. ne calls to a department or client the account code prints on call reports if you are using SMDR Station Message Detail Recording or a call accounting package Related Features 5 138 Account Code Entry provides instructions on entering forced account codes You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If a forced account code is valid the system provides access to an outside line If a forced account code is invalid the system denies access to an outside line to dial out the user must repeat the procedure for entering a forced account code For Release 2 0 or earlier extensions programmed with this feature are restricted from dialing outside phone numbers on all lines at the extension including numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 until an account code is entered If a Forced Account Code List exists the account code must match an entry on the list for the user to get an outside line For ACS Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List Account codes can be entered manually or using System Speed
379. ne phones For example if users dial slowly and calls are not completed or are connected to wrong numbers lengthen the timeout Related Features Use this procedure only if the Dial Mode 201 for at least one outside line in the system is set to rotary Considerations Do not change this setting unless the system is experiencing problems Valid Entries 1 4 seconds 2 8 seconds v 3 12 seconds Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the length of the Rotary Dialing Timeout 1 Press eature O System Program System Program H C 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 236 Save Number Redial F04 Save Number Redial F04 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature saves into temporary memory the last outside number up to 28 digits dialed from an extension with a system phone Users can use this feature to save a number before they hang up on a busy or unanswered call Once saved the number can be redialed at any time The number stays in memory until a different one is saved Related Features Considerations Programming Unlike Last Number Redial F05 this feature lets the user make other calls before redialing the saved number
380. ned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 38 To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension 1 Press eature O O System Program System Program H 3 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging system For example to program extension 11 press T To assign or unassign Automatic VMS Cover press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Background Music F19 Background Music F19 Description This feature is available only on system phones with speakers This feature provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the recorded material from the Music on Hold audio source Related Features Background Music is available only if Music on Hold 602 is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module Considerations Programming The Background Music feature broadcasts music over telephone lines The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law According
381. new backup information replaces the information in the old MAN mmddvy file on the Backup Restore PC Card and the mmddyy extension now reflects the current date Backup information created during a manual backup does not overwrite any AUTO mmddyy file Go to Step 4 If the backup failed you see one of the following error messages in the display Backup Failed Check Card Backup Failed SystemBus Go to Step 4 and then see Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions 4 Exit programming mode gt NOTE If you exit the procedure before the backup finishes you will not interrupt the backup but you will not see feedback messages on the display 5 45 Feature Reference Call Coverage F20 XX XX Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature redirects all intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership from a user s extension to another system extension where XX is a system extension number for coverage When Call Coverage is activated covered calls are routed to the covering extension after a specified number of rings Callers can then leave a message with the person at the covering extension This feature is helpful for users who want their callers to have personalized service when they are unable to answer calls Related Features 5 46 You must use Line Coverage Extension 208 to designate an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extensi
382. ng mode 5 127 Feature Reference Exclusive Hold F02 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature prevents other extensions from picking up outside calls placed on hold at a specific extension with a system phone Related Features You can use the Hold button to put calls on regular hold any extension can pick up the held call Considerations Programming You can program an Exclusive Hold button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch For system phones if a call is left on hold for longer than one minute the extension at which the call is held generates a short Hold Reminder Tone This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If you put a call on a line or a pool on hold and another user picks up that call it will no longer be available to you To ensure that no one else can retrieve your held call on a pooled line use Exclusive Hold This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Exclusive Hold button 1 Or ee We O 5 128 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Pr
383. ng patterns v 2 Not Active outside intercom and transferred calls all ring using a single ring burst Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Distinctive Ring setting 1 Press eature System Program System Program H 3 8 at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Extension prompt enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 22 press 3 To activate or deactivate Distinctive Ring for the extension press until the appropriate value displays 4 To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 120 Do Not Disturb F01 Do Not Disturb F01 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets a system phone user press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the extension from audibly alerting lights still flash When Do Not Disturb is on outside callers hear ringing while inside callers hear a busy signal This feature is recommended only if someone answers outside calls for your extension when you do not answer them Related Features Considerations Caller ID information for incoming calls displays only when a call is audibly alerting at an extens
384. not send a signal keep the hold disconnect time set to 450 msec the default setting The user must disconnect a held call manually by retrieving the call then hanging it up Shorten the hold disconnect time only if abandoned calls on hold do not disconnect m Lengthen the hold disconnect time only if calls are being disconnected prematurely Valid Entries 00 No Detection 01 50 msec 02 100 msec 03 150 msec 04 200 msec 05 250 msec 06 300 msec 07 350 msec 08 400 msec 09 450 msec v 10 500 msec 11 550 msec 12 600 msec 5 157 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 158 To change the hold disconnect time 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 2 at extension 10 or 11 At the Line prompt enter the two digit number of the line for which you are adjusting the hold disconnect time For example to adjust line 1 press The current hold disconnect time for the line number you specified is displayed For example if line 1 is set to the default setting 09 450 msec shows in the display To change the hold disconnect time press until the appropriate value displays To program the next line press ext item then repeat Step 3 5 Repeat Step 4 for each line in the system Select another
385. ns that can be called at the same time Any user in the system can ring or page all extensions in a Calling Group at the same time or transfer a call to a Calling Group the first extension to pick up the call is connected to the caller This feature is useful for conversing with any individual in a specific group such as a sales pool or for paging all individuals in the group The system can have up to four Calling Groups Related Features Considerations Valid Entries For instructions on making a ringing call or paging call to a Calling Group see Group Calling Ring Page Users can make simultaneous announcements over the loudspeaker paging system and the system phones assigned to Calling Group 1 See Simultaneous Paging Extensions can be in more than one Calling Group In addition you can assign all extensions in the system to one group this is especially useful for making paging announcements to all employees Do not assign extensions that connect auxiliary equipment auto attendants voice messaging systems fax machines answering machines hotline phones or doorphones or extensions assigned as External Hotline phones to a Calling Group 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a Calling Group 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System
386. nsfer beeps Transfer returned calls also ring with the two transfer beeps Standard phones will ring with pattern 1 only Considerations Valid Entries tv Programming 1 You can program standard phones for any ring pattern but they will ring with Pattern 1 only You must program MLC 6 phones with Pattern 1 If they are programmed with another pattern they will not ring Since only one audible alert can be heard at a station at one time the ringing pattern present at that station that has multiple lines alerting is for the line that rang first Once the call is answered the station will begin ringing using the pattern associated with the next alerting line for that station Incoming calls that are ringing at a pool button will ring with the pattern assigned to the line Lines within a pool may be assigned individual ring patterns Press Feature 0 System Program System Program H 2 at extension 10 or 11 At the line prompt enter the number of the line to be programmed with the pattern For example to program line 01 press At the pattern prompt shown below enter a ringing pattern number 1 8 or press until the correct value displays RING PATTERN LXX PATTERN X To set Ring Pattern for another line press Next item or Prev Item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 279
387. nsion 10 This tone sounds once every minute until the held call is retrieved or until the caller hangs up If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold or Disconnect you can intercept a call while the message is playing the light for the call will be steady red To intercept the call press the line button and lift the handset The message stops playing when the call is retrieved If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Ring the line button on which an outside call rings shows green flash continuously even while the system answers the call and plays the Automatic System Answer greeting To answer the call lift the handset If the message was playing it stops automatically 1 Hold v 2 Disconnect 3 Ring Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Automatic System Answer Mode 1 2 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O 0 To change the mode press until the appropriate value displays see Valid Entries Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 33 Feature Reference Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Release 2 0 or Later Description This feature lets you record and play back the message that callers hear when a call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature The maximum length of the message is 2
388. nsion before going to the user s mailbox In addition if the user s extension has Do Not Disturb on calls on the line can go immediately to coverage Each outside line can be assigned to only one Hunt Group Assign only fax extensions to Hunt Group 8 If a Hunt Group that has outside lines assigned receives an outside call and all members of that Hunt Group are busy or have Do Not Disturb on the caller hears ringing which continues until the call is answered 5 143 Feature Reference Examples Here are some useful applications for Group Call Distribution Valid Entries 1 Assigned for hunting to groups 1 6 or to group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 2 Not Assigned v 3 VMS Line Cover available only for Hunt Group 7 Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 144 Place the extensions of employees who work in a department in a Hunt Group and assign one or more outside lines to the group Doing so lets outside callers ring the group directly without having to be transferred by the receptionist For example a mail order company assigns the extensions of its sales representatives to a Hunt Group and assigns a line to the group The company then publishes the number as its customer service number so that a caller can reach a sales representative directly to place an orde
389. nsion number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off 5 191 Feature Reference Message Light On F09XX Description This feature turns on the message light at a specified extension where XX is a system extension number Related Features Considerations Programming For instructions on turning off the message light see Message Light Off F10Xx on page 5 190 You may be able to use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension See Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 jon page 5 124 This feature turns on the message light on system phones and standard phones that have message lights See Standard Telephones on page 1 16 for a list of standard phones that have message lights For message waiting capability standard phones with LED compatible message waiting lights must be connected to a PARTNER ACS processor or 308EC module or to an R3 0 or later 206 module in a system equipped with a PARTNER ACS processor module On a standard phone the message light flashes only when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Do not use this feature for an extension that is covered by the voice messaging system The voice messaging system automatically turns on the message light at a subscriber s extension when a message is left in the mailbox If you use this feature to signal someone at a doorphone extension you must use Message Light Off to t
390. nt ae Extensions 505 to place the extension in any of these groups See Setting Up Groups of Extensions for more information Fax Machine Extensions 601 Doorphone Extension 604 and 605 Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 AA Extensions 607 External Hotline 311 or Hotline 603 to identify the extension as one of these equipment types Setting Up Auxiliary Equipment provides an overview of the procedures you use for setting up devices such as voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Also Chapter 4 provides detailed information and example applications for auxiliary equipment Copy Settings The recommended way to set up your system is to program one extension for each type of phone in the system then use Copy Settings 399 to program other phones of the same type For example you can program one PARTNER 18D phone and then copy its settings to any other extensions that have PARTNER 18D or PARTNER 18 phones See Copy Settings 399 lior a list of the programmed settings that are copied Changing Settings after Installation As your business grows or changes you will probably need to change the way your system was originally programmed This section provides some examples and lists the procedures you would use to change settings after installation For specific details on a procedure refer to the procedure name in Chapter 5 If you are upgrading to PARTNER ACS Release 1 1 or 2 0 or later
391. ntil the appropriate value displays 4 To assign or unassign another extension press Wext ltem or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 201 Feature Reference Number of Lines 104 Description This feature should be used only for initial system setup This System Programming procedure determines in Key mode the number of outside lines that are automatically assigned to all system extensions in Hybrid mode it determines the number of lines assigned to the main pool This number does not have to match the actual number of lines connected at the control unit This feature should be used only for initial system setup Related Features A WARNING Do not use Number of Lines 104 after initial setup This feature should only be used for initial system setup Please read the following information carefully In Hybrid mode do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Pool Line Assignment 207 Pool Extension Assignment 314 Pool Access Restriction 315 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing pools back to factory settings Additionally it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for individual lines back to factory settings To change pool assignments without affecting other set
392. nts compl mitaires dans cette section IC Notification and Repair Information Security Toll fraud the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example persons other than your company s employees agents subcontractors or persons working on your company s behalf can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services You are responsible for the security of your system There may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your telecommunications system You are responsible for programming and configuring your equipment to prevent unauthorized use Your system manager should read all documents provided with this product to fully understand the features that can introduce the risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common carrier telecommunication services or facilities accessed through or connected to it Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance call the Lucent Technologies National Customer Care Center at 1 800 628 2888 Trademarks Magic on Hold MERLIN MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 PARTNER PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS PassageWay and SYSTIMAX are registered tra
393. nually transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press rans 2 Dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension Standard Phone To ring or voice signal a Hunt Group 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone To make a ringing call dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension To make a voice signaled call press and a group number 1 8 After the beep start talking Your voice is heard through the speaker of the first available system phone that is not busy If no one answers the call does not keep hunting 5 151 Feature Reference To transfer a call to a Hunt Group 1 While on a call press the switchhook down once rapidly You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 8 The next available extension in the Hunt Group rings If no one answers within three rings the call hunts to the next available extension However if Transfer Return Rings is programmed for less than four rings the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or t
394. o another user who is busy on a call See also Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back A feature that lets the recipient of a voice interrupt on busy intercom call respond to the originator of that call See also Voice Interrupt on Busy Voice Mail Coverage A voice messaging system feature that provides Call Answer Service when a call is not answered by a covered extension See also Call Answer Service GL 11 Glossary Voice Mail Service A voice messaging system feature that lets users retrieve messages and record greetings Voice Mailbox A storage area for greetings and messages in a voice messaging system Voice Messaging System VMS An optional call routing and messaging device that provides call coverage by answering calls and routing them to caller designated extensions It also lets callers leave messages at unanswered extensions and lets subscribers retrieve their messages The system supports the PARTNER MAIL VS system the PARTNER MAIL system or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card Ww Wake Up Service A special application feature that lets the receptionist at extension 10 schedule wake up or reminder calls for specific extensions GL 12 Index Index Numerics 911 calls and Forced Acccount Code 5 138 5 140 5 204 A AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 5 4 Abbreviated Ringing 305 5 6 Account Code Entr description 5 7 5 138 5 140 _ __
395. o check with your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer to find out if there are others m Ifthe phone is not supported you can use it without message waiting capability lf the phone is supported go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The standard phone is not connected to the proper module What to do Make sure the phone is connected to a PARTNER Advanced Communications System processor module 308EC or a R3 0 or later 206 module in a system with a PARTNER ACS processor module If the problem is not solved call the hotline see pag Other Problems with Phones Trouble Making Outside Calls 6 10 Trouble making outside calls could be one of the following a You hear a dial tone but the dial tone continues as you try to dial a You hear a dial tone which cuts off when you dial but the line does not ring a You hear a busy signal as you dial You hear nothing at all Possible Cause 1 Forced Account Code Entry is assigned to the extension What to do Find out if Forced Account Code Entry 307 is assigned to the extension If it is enter a valid account code If you can make a call the problem is solved f Forced Account Code Entry is not assigned go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Dial Mode is set incorrectly What to do Find out if you have touch tone or rotary service Then set the Dial Mode 201 to Touch Tone or Rotary as appropriate m If you can make a call the p
396. o prevent other extensions from joining calls on a specific extension This is especially useful for answering machines fax machines modems and credit card scanners because trying to join one of these devices could interfere with its operation Users can program Privacy onto a system phone button to allow or prevent others from joining their calls as needed Caller ID information displays if you join a call however you cannot join a call at any extension that has Privacy activated If a line is not assigned to a user s extension and access to that line is not restricted for that extension the user can use Direct Line Pickup Active Line to join a call on that line You can join a call answered by Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial by pressing the line button and lifting the handset The message stops playing when you join the call Pooled extension users can add other parties to a call by pressing pool buttons You cannot join a call by pressing a pool button You cannot join an intercom call or a conference call at another extension You cannot join a call on an extension that has a voice interrupt on busy call in progress You can join a call that is being answered by the voice messaging system but only if Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware If this is the case when you join the call the voice messaging system disconnects automa
397. o that extension s transfer return extension 5 152 Group Pickup I66G Group Pickup 166G Description This feature allows users at any extension in the system to answer any outside intercom or transferred call ringing at an extension in a Pickup Group where G is a Pickup Group number from 1 4 In other words when a call rings at an extension that is in a Pickup Group a user at any extension in the system can answer the call without knowing which extension or line is ringing and without being in the same Pickup Group The system can have up to four Pickup Groups Related Features You must use Pickup Group Extensions 501 to assign extensions to Pickup Groups Considerations Extensions can be in more than one Pickup Group m You can program a Group Pickup button on a system phone to pick up calls in a Pickup Group with one touch Examples Here are some useful applications for a Pickup Group Put all system extensions in a Pickup Group except the boss private extension so anyone on the system can answer a ringing call except calls to the boss Put the extensions of people who work near each other and who can hear each other s phones ring but who don t have each other s lines on their phones in a Pickup Group For example a group of typists work in a large room separated by cubicles and all of their extensions are in Pickup Group 1 When a typist leaves the room and the typist s
398. o the next available extension in the Hunt Group If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks they should turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions so calls hunt immediately to the next available extension For instructions on making outside calls ring directly in a Hunt Group see Group Call Distribution 206 Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover a When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Related Features for Hunt Group 7 This Hunt Group applies only to the voice messaging system For more information see VMS Cover Rings After you assign the extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 you should set the Transfer Return Extension 306 for those extensions to extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller Related Features for Hunt Group 8 a This Hunt Group applies only to transferring and detecting fax calls For more information see Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 Hunt Group 8 should not be used as a standard hunt group since calls are automatically transferred to this hunt group 5 161 Feature Reference Considerations for Hunt Groups 1 6 m Any number of extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group In addition extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group a You can include multiple fax machines or answering machines in a Hunt
399. oblems with Combination Extensions Phone Does Not Work Properly Possible Cause 1 Ringer equivalents are too high for the extension What to do Be sure the total of the two devices Ringer Equivalence Numbers REN does not exceed 2 0 If it does unplug one of the devices m lf the phone works properly the problem is the REN was too high lf the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Auxiliary device such as a fax answering machine or modem is faulty What to do Remove the auxiliary device from the extension Then plug in an auxiliary device that you know works properly m lf the phone works properly the problem is the auxiliary device Replace the auxiliary device lf the phone still does not work properly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Phone is plugged into the wrong jack of the system phone or the bridging adapter What to do Plug the phone into the correct jack see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions m lf the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Wrong bridging adapter is used in combination extension What to do First unplug the bridging adapter from the wall jack Then unplug the phone from the adapter and plug the phone directly into the wall jack m If the phone works there is a problem with the bridging adapter Replace the bridging ada
400. of rings The system plays a brief announcement and places the call on hold continues ringing or disconnects the call See also Direct Extension DialjanajAutomatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial PC Card GL 1 Glossary Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial PC Card Release 2 0 or later A Lucent Technologies proprietary PC Card purchased separately that is used like a floppy disk to store Automatic System Answer Direct Extension Dial messages See a so Automatic System ana PC Card Auxiliary Equipment Telecommunications equipment other than system phones that can be connected to the control unit Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices that can connect directly to the public telephone network such as standard phones or fax machines as well as devices that require the interface provided by the control unit such as a loudspeaker paging system B Background Music A feature that provides background music through the speaker of an idle system phone for a user s work area Background Music plays the pre recorded material from the Music on Hold audio source Backup The system and telephone programming settings can be saved on a Backup Restore PC Card using either of two features Backup Programming Automatic 123 or Backup Programming Manual 124 Backup Restore PC Card A Lucent Technologies proprietary PC Card that is used like a floppy disk to back up system and telephone programming
401. ogram another button for this extension or exit programming mode Exclusive Hold F02 Using While active on an outside call on a system phone 1 Press the programmed button or press to put the call on Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line pool or button flutters At all other extensions the line appears busy steady red 2 To retrieve the call press the line pool or button on which the call is held and lift the handset or press prr You can pick up a call on Exclusive Hold only at the extension at which it was put on Exclusive Hold 5 129 Feature Reference Extension Name Display Description Users can assign a name to their extension up to 20 characters long on PARTNER model phones up to 12 characters long on MLS model phones Then when that extension is used to make an intercom group or transferred call the name appears on the system display phone receiving the call Similarly users receiving a transfer return call see the name of the person assigned to the extension that did not answer the transferred call Related Features Display Language 303 has no effect on this feature This means that the extension name displays exactly as it is programmed Considerations Valid Entries Any extension regardless of the phone type on that extension can be programmed with a name through Centralized Telephone Programming If users want to program their own extension name they must have a
402. om dial tone 2 Dial and a group number 1 4 You can hang up or stay on the line to announce the call All available extensions in the Calling Group ring 5 148 Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G I 77G Group Hunting Ring Voice Signal I77G 1 77G Description This feature lets you distribute call volume among extensions in a group to off load call activity from a single user When an intercom or transferred call is placed to a Hunt Group where Gis a Hunt Group number from 1 8 the system rings or voice signals the first available non busy extension in the group passing over busy extensions or those with Do Not Disturb on in a circular hunt If a ringing call is not answered within three rings it moves to the next available extension and so on until the call is answered or the caller hangs up Fora voice signaled call only the first available extension is signaled if that extension does not answer the call does not keep hunting After an extension receives a Hunt Group call the next call to the Hunt Group will not ring or voice signal that extension first unless all other extensions in the group are busy or do not answer The system supports up to eight Hunt Groups however Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used exclusively for fax machines For more information refer to Voice Messaging Systems jon page 4 28 Related Features You must use H
403. on 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction or In Only If an extension in a Hunt Group 505 activates Call Forwarding the system considers the extension unavailable when a call goes to the Hunt Group If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the Call Forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system If an extension has Call Coverage and Call Forwarding active calls are routed to the Call Forwarding destination extension Call Forwarding takes precedence Calls forwarded and unanswered at both the originating extension and the forwarded extension will be logged as unanswered calls by the Caller ID Logging feature at both extensions If the forwarded call is answered at the forwarded extension it will not be logged unless the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 feature is set to log answered calls Call Forwarding does not apply to parked calls See Call Park You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 You can forward outside intercom and transferred calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions voice signaled calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls coverage calls or transfer return calls Calls cannot be forwarded outside the system The phone at the extension from which calls are being forwarded beeps once each time a call is forwarded unless Do Not Disturb is active Do not forward your ca
404. on PRESS Remove DOORPHONE 2 EXTENSION DIAL 605 DIAL any systern extension except 10 11 or the first 2 extensions of any 206 or 308 modules To remove the doorphone extension PRESS Remove Factory setting gt Button with lights required 20 PARTNER ACS Revision 2 0 or later 30 PARTNER ACS Revision 3 0 or later Auxiliary Equipment FAX MACHINE EXTENSION DIAL 601 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next Item to identify another extension MUSIC ON HOLD DIAL 602 DIAL 1 Active 2 Not Active HOTLINE DIAL 603 DIAL the hotline extension number not ext 10 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308 modules DIAL the alerted extension number not the hotline or z o to paging system To remove the hotline and alert PRESS Remove p _5 159 DOORPHONE ALERT o 5 123 EXTENSIONS DIAL 606 DIAL an extension number except a doorphone extension DIAL 1 Not an alert 2 Doorphone 1 alert 3 Doorphone 2 alert 4 Doorphones 1 and 2 PRESS Next Item to identify another extension up to 48 alert extension per doorphone AUTOMATED ATTENDANT EXTENSIONS 5 4 DIAL 607 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned PRESS Next item to assign another extension SMDR RECORD TYPE DIAL 608 DIAL 1 All calls 2 Outgoing calls only v SMDR O
405. on no other extension can join a callin progress at either a system phone or a standard device However a phone can interrupt a call on a standard device at the same extension For example if a system phone and modem are combined at an extension picking up the handset of the system phone could interrupt a modem transmission even if Privacy is active a While on a call on a standard phone you can use the system phone s dialpad and fixed feature buttons to handle calls For example you can use the system phone to select a specific outside line or pool and conduct the call on the standard phone Or if someone is on a call using the standard phone someone else can put that call on hold by pressing on the system phone To do this it is not necessary to lift the handset of the system phone Held calls do not ring back at a standard phone ina combination extension To retrieve a held call from the standard phone use Direct Line Pickup Active Line A standard phone s message light will not light when Background Music is playing through the system phone s speaker f you have Caller ID only system display phones show the Caller ID information a The ringer equivalence number REN of a standard device or the combined REN of two devices cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN of a system phone is 0 0 Using Telephones Your system provides intuitive operation of basic call handling features plus dial code features that make i
406. on the system ignores it To use this feature you must assign four ports into Hunt Group 7 This requires PMVS Release 5 and an upgrade card which allows the increase from two to four ports Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with the feature Press a programmable button with LEDs Press a Program another extension or exit programming mode Activating To activate the feature a user would press the programmed feature button when active on an intercom or CO call The green LED at the feature button is turned on steady to indicate that feature activation has been initiated When PMVS connects the LEDs become an alternating red and green flash Deactivating One of the following will deactivate Record a Call You press the Record a Call button again You hang up the call PMVS drops the call because the recording time limit was exceeded If silence is detected on the line for 15 seconds call recording will terminate 5 229 Feature Reference Remote Administration Password 730 Release 3 0 or Later Description This feature can be used only from a system phone In order to perform the remote administration the System Administrator must give this password to the remote party This feature prevents unauthorized use of the remote administration capability Related Features a
407. on can activate Call Coverage for that line An extension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 is set to No Restriction or In Only You can use Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 to specify the number of times a covered call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension If Call Coverage and Do Not Disturb are active covered calls are routed immediately to the covering extension without ringing the extension first You can turn on Call Coverage while a call is ringing to send a call immediately for coverage Similarly if Call Coverage is on and a call begins to ring you can turn on Do Not Disturb to send that call immediately for coverage See Send All Calls If an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Then If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call is routed immediately to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage If an extension has Call Coverage active without voice mail coverage covered calls ring at the covering extension for the
408. on system display phones on all phones for which you subscribe to a Caller ID service This feature gives users the ability to view Caller ID information for unanswered Central Office calls and unanswered Central Office calls transferred to an extension Up to 400 call records can be stored for the system Each line that is associated with an extension to log Caller ID calls is guaranteed a minimum of 20 call records In addition users can automatically dial the number stored in the log The call records stored in each user s call log and available for viewing depends on the following a Unanswered transferred calls are logged automatically whether or not the line and extension are associated with the Call Logging features a f Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 is used alone all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension are logged f Caller ID Log Line Association 318 is used alone all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged f both Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 and Caller ID Log Line Association 318 are used all Caller ID calls that are answered by that extension and all unanswered Caller ID calls that ring on a line associated with the extension are logged f both Caller ID Log Line Association 318 and Caller ID Log All Calls 319 are used a answered Caller ID calls and a unanswered Caller ID calls received at any extension on specific lin
409. one number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow m Press the More button to view the caller s name At the Name Display shown in Figure 5 3 the caller s name is shown If the caller s name is not available one of the following messages displays a An Out of Area message displays if the call was dialed from a region that does not support Caller ID APrivacy message displays if the caller blocked transmission of Caller ID information 5 75 Feature Reference ANo Name message displays if no information was received James Jones Next Prev Dial More Figure 5 3 Caller ID Name Display You have several options at the Name Display a Press the Next button to view the next logged call If you have a second call logged it is displayed m Press the Prev button to view the Name Display of the previous log record a Press the Dial button to dial the telephone number and return the call see dialing instructions that follow Press the More button to view the Call Status display At the Call Status display shown in Figure 5 4 you see the following information m At the left of the display you see the date and time of the call and either am or pm to indicate whether the call arrived in the morning or afternoon m The entry in the next column indicates the line that the call came in on The next entry a vertical h
410. ons System Installation guide a Ifthe LEDs light the problem is corrected m Ifthe problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 Poor Transmission Quality on Modem Possible Cause A high speed modem is connected through an extension jack on the control unit to a standard Central Office telephone line but the line quality is not sufficient to generate a clear signal when the modem transmits through the system interface What to do Either connect the modem directly to the network interface jack for a line or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading the line quality m Ifthe device works properly the problem is solved m f the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 6 27 Troubleshooting Other Problems with System 6 28 The following procedure resets the system Use it when you have any problems that are not covered elsewhere in this chapter The procedure disconnects all calls in progress but does not erase any system settings provided that the system batteries are installed and not low on power Possible Cause System needs a hardware reset What to do Unplug the control units power cord from the wall Wait 10 seconds then plug it back in If the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 A CAUTION The power cord should hang straight down from the connector flush against the plastic case for the entire length of the board Do not install the power
411. ons for using system phones PARTNER 34D Programming 847531696 Helps with System Programming from a Overlay PARTNER 34D phone PARTNER 18D Programming 847531688 Helps with System Programming from a Overlay PARTNER 18D phone MDW 9031P Wireless 503 801 166 Explains how to install and use the MDW Pocketphone Installation and 9031P pocketphone Use MDW 9031P Wireless 503 801 165 Contains basic information for using the MDW Pocketphone Quick Reference 9031P pocketphone MLC 6 Cordless Telephone 999 506 143 Explains how to install the MLC 6 cordless Installation telephone MLC 6 Cordless Telephone 999 506 146 Contains basic information for using the Quick Reference MLC 6 cordless telephone Product Ordering Information PC Card Installation Programming and Use Title Order Number Description PARTNER MAIL VS Voice 518 322 521 Provides instructions for installing Messaging System Release 4 programming and maintaining your Installation and Programming PARTNER MAIL VS system PARTNER MAIL VS Voice 585 322 520 Provides the forms needed to plan and record Messaging System Release 4 how your PARTNER MAIL VS system is to be Planning Forms programmed Using the PARTNER MAIL VS 518 322 523 Contains instructions for using the PARTNER Voice Messaging System MAIL VS system Release 4 PARTNER MAIL VS Voice 585 322 532 Provides instructions for installing Messaging Syst
412. ons such as Gysiem Program and Gre on system phones To change the number of times a call rings at an extension before it is sent to the covering extension 1 Press System Program System Program O 2 Enter a different setting 1 9 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 50 Call Coverage Rings 320 Release 3 0 or Later Call Coverage Rings 320 Release 3 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure defines the number of times intercom transferred and outside calls on lines assigned ownership ring at an extension before they are sent to the covering extension Unlike Call Coverage Rings 116 in Release 2 0 Call Coverage Rings in Release 3 0 is programmable on an individual extension basis Related Features a Call Coverage redirects an extension s covered calls to the covering extension You must use Line Coverage Extension 208 to designate an extension as the owner of a specific outside line so the extension can activate Call Coverage for that line f an extension has Call Coverage and VMS Cover active covered calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings Then If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 If the covering extension
413. ons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To copy the programmed settings from one extension to another of the same type 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 9 at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Extension prompt enter the source extension to copy from For example to copy the current settings from extension 18 press 3 Atthe Data prompt enter the target extension to copy to any extension except the source extension is valid For example to copy to extension 22 press 4 Atthis point To copy the same settings to another extension enter the new extension number To copy another extension s settings press Next Item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 97 Feature Reference Dial Mode 201 Description This System Programming procedure identifies individual lines as touch tone or rotary You should check with your local phone company if you are not sure which type of line is being provided to you Related Features If you are having difficulty using touch tone phones on rotary lines you may need to adjust the Rotary Dialing Timeout 108 m Ifthe system has rotary lines you can use Touch Tone Enable to send touch tone signals over a rotary line for example to access bank by phone services a f Dial Mode 2
414. onsiderations a Call Park typically is used for pooled extensions in Hybrid mode because users can retrieve calls without knowing which line the call is on m Itis recommended that you park only one call at a time from your extension to ensure that you know which caller you are talking to when you pick up the parked call Call Park is useful for standard phone users because they can retrieve a parked call without knowing which line the call is on Using System Phone See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To park a call 1 While ona call press and dial your two digit extension number or press the Auto Dial button programmed for your extension 2 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you used an Auto Dial button the green light next to the button flutters 5 55 Feature Reference To retrieve a parked call using Call Pickup 1 Dial 2 Dial the extension number or press an Auto Dial button for the extension where the call is parked Standard Phone To park a call 1 While on a call press the switchhook or Recall The call is put on hold and you hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial your two digit extension number 3 Hang up If the call is not picked up within three minutes it rings back at your extension If you are on another call when the parke
415. ontact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle if a user activates the Contact Closure so that the toggle is On and then a power failure occurs the toggle automatically changes to Off as a security measure a f you plan to use a Contact Closure to control a door lock you may also want to install a doorphone at that door Use Doorphone Extension 604 or 605 to identify the extension to which the doorphone is connected and Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 to identify the extensions that signal when the doorphone button is pressed You can assign some or all of the Doorphone Alert extensions to a Contact Closure Group 612 so that users at those extensions can control the door lock a You can use this feature while using Call Screening F25 Considerations 5 90 It is recommended that users program and or on buttons with lights so that they can monitor the status of the Contact Closures The button s green light will light when the Contact Closure is activated by that user and the red light will light when the Contact Closure is activated by another user in that Contact Closure Group The light will go out when the Contact Closure is deactivated Contact Closure F41 and F42 Programming Using See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Contact Closure button 1 Press Feature System Progr
416. or ASA DXD PARTNER ACS determines if the incoming call is a fax If the system is set up to automatically route incoming fax calls to fax machine s ACS will automatically transfer the call to a fax hunt group Hunt Group 8 Related Features You may want to use Automatic Extension Privacy 304 to prevent other extensions with the same line from joining a fax call at the extension and interrupting it Considerations When lines appear on a fax extension you will want to make sure that the fax machine does not automatically answer outside calls on these lines There are three ways you can do this a Set the fax machine for delayed pickup a Use Line Ringing to change the ring options on the fax extension to either delayed ring or no ring 5 135 Feature Reference Recommended Use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines from the fax extension Other points to consider Programming 5 136 1 Incoming fax detection is activated automatically by assigning extensions to Hunt Group 8 Hunt Group 8 should not be used as a standard hunt group since incoming calls are automatically transferred to this hunt group If a PARTNER MAIL system is connected to the ACS system and fax detection is being done via PARTNER MAIL no extensions should be assigned to Hunt Group 8 on the ACS system If there are no touch tone receivers capable of detecting a CNG tone the call is treated as an incoming voice call It co
417. or example your company s Sales Department has a three digit account code the first digit represents the department and the second and third digits represent the individuals in the department You enter 4 as the list entry The following entries are valid 401 410 499 455555 The following entries are invalid 4 44 5 141 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 142 To create a Forced Account Code List 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 4 O at extension 10 or 11 Select a list entry 01 99 For example to select the third entry press 3 Adisplay similar to the following appears Forced Act Code List 03 Data Enter up to six digits for the list entry 4 Ifthe account code is five digits or less you must press to save the account code in memory At this point To enter other account codes press to select a different list entry and repeat Steps 3 and 4 m To change the account code you just entered press and repeat Steps 3 and 4 To delete the account code you just entered press Remove Select another procedure or exit programming mode Group Call Distribution 206 Group Call Distribution 206 Description This System Programming procedure assigns outside lines to H
418. or TransTalk 9000 series phone or a system phone that is idle has Do Not Disturb turned off and has Voice Interrupt On Busy Not Assigned Your call is not completed until someone answers 5 290 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back F18 Description This feature is available only on system phones This feature lets you program a button that is used to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call while the user is active on another call Related Procedures You must use Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 to identify extensions that can receive an intercom call while busy on another call Considerations Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back must be programmed on a button with lights This feature will not work if it is programmed on a button without lights Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Oe a Using To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the originator s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will he
419. or VMS Cover for that line Related Features Considerations An extension s owned line is eligible for coverage only if Line Ringing is set to Immediate Ring or Delayed Ring and Line Access Restriction 302 is set to No Restriction or In Only Use Call Coverage to redirect an extension s calls on owned lines to the covering extension Use Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the covering extension Use VMS Cover or Automatic VMS Cover 310 to redirect the extension s calls on owned lines to the voice messaging system Use VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 to specify the number of times a call rings at the owner s extension before it is sent to the voice messaging system Users with Call Coverage or VMS Cover turned on can Send All Calls immediately to their covering extension or their voice mailbox by activating Do Not Disturb To use Call Screening F25 the station must be the Line Coverage Extension for that line Only one owner can be assigned to a specific line However multiple lines can be owned by the same extension This feature provides an alternative method of routing outside calls to the voice messaging system for Call Answer Service This feature has no effect on the CO Line Ownership procedure in PARTNER MAIL PARTNER MAIL VS or PARTNER Voice Messaging PC Card 5 177 Feature Reference Valid Ent
420. or coverage calls or forwarded calls Answering Calls How to Answer Calls Ringing at Your Extension System Phone You can answer a call on any line or pool that is ringing or select a specific line or pool if more than one is ringing a When the telephone is ringing lift the handset You are connected to the incoming call If more than one line or pool is ringing you are connected to the line or pool that has been ringing for the longest time If the call is an intercom call and you have a display phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed appear on your display until you pick up the handset or press Gp r To answer a call on a specific line pool or intercom button 1 Press the line pool or button for the line you want to answer 2 Lift the handset or press Spk You are connected to the call m To answer a call when you are already on a call 1 Press Hold The call you are on is placed on hold 2 Press the button for the new call You are connected to the new call 3 To return to the first call put the second call on hold then press the line pool or button for the first call To answer a voice signaled call your phone beeps and you hear the caller s voice lf the microphone is on you can speak after the beep lf the microphone is not on press Wic HFa or lift the handset To respond to a voice interrupt on busy call you hear two beeps and the origina
421. or local Authorized Dealer 6 1 Troubleshooting If you call have the following information ready so that the representative can better help you The kind of system you have for example PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1 0 To determine the release number press at any display phone The number of lines and extensions in your system The type of phone system or standard and the model number if applicable System phone model numbers are located either on the upper right hand corner of the phone or on the dialpad overlay a If you followed a troubleshooting procedure and need more help tell the representative what you did Power Failure Operation When power to the system is cut off the first two lines on the PARTNER Advanced Communications System module or the 308EC module automatically connect to the first two extensions on the module and the first line on each 206 module connects to its first extension This enables you to make and answer calls during a power outage provided you have a standard phone connected to any of these extensions During a power failure standard phones can only make and receive calls other system features are not available The system can stay programmed for a minimum of 45 days and a maximum of six months after it stops receiving power depending on the freshness of the batteries When the batteries are drained all of the system s programmed settings retu
422. or you to manage your system and telephones System display phones provide messages and prompts during programming Two system programming extensions allowing you to program the system from one extension without interrupting call activity at the other programming extension usually the receptionist s extension Modular connections to the control unit making it easy to reconfigure your system or to add lines and or extensions as your business grows a Direct connections for industry standard devices including most standard phones fax machines answering machines modems and credit card scanners a Optional equipment support including doorphones Contact Closure Adjunct for example to release a door lock loudspeaker paging systems Music on Hold call reporting often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording SMDR devices auto attendants extra alerts and PC Cards for Backup Restore or for software upgrades gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Av WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade The performance of music over telephone lines is a public performance under United States Copyright law Accordingly in
423. osure Group v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 92 Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long each Contact Closure remains active when activated If a Contact Closure is used to control a door lock and a doorphone is installed at that door you may want to assign the extensions in the Contact Closure Group to also be the Doorphone Alert Extensions 606 for that doorphone When a user s extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user can then use Contact Closure to activate the contact closure device To assign extensions to a Contact Closure Group 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 Atthe Contact Number prompt enter the number for the Contact Closure 1 or 2 For example to assign extensions to Contact Closure 1 press Q Atthe Extension prompt enter the two digit extension number that you want to assign to this Contact Closure Group For example to assign extension 14 to this group press 4 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays Contact Closure Group 612 5 At this point a To assign or unassign another extension to the same Contact Closure Group press Next item or rev item until the correct extension is dis
424. ou want the fax machine to use to extension X If extension X is a key extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to line A B C If extension X is a pooled extension set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to Pool D line A B C 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools on extension X to No Ring Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned Make sure extension X is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button 4 21 Using Auxiliary Equipment Send and Receive Fax Machines 4 22 If your business has high volume fax traffic you can set up two fax machines one that only sends and the other that only receives For example in Figure 4 10 fax 1 is the send machine fax 2 is the receive machine Line A is the fax line the number of which is published as the fax number If fax 2 doesn t answer line A fax 1 will Figure 4 10 Send and Receive Fax Machines To Use When you send a fax an outside line will be automatically selected Incoming fax calls on the fax line are answered automatically by fax 2 If a f
425. oup number 1 4 DIAL an extension number 10 57 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y PRESS Next Item to assign another extension NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON t DIAL 503 DIAL 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Night Service to that button If you use option 3 after a Night Service button has been assigned the Night Service button moves from the old button to the new button you select NIGHT SERVICE GROUP EXTENSION DIAL 504 DIAL a system extension number DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group PRESS Next Item to assign another extension HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS DIAL 505 DIAL a group number 1 6 7 for VMS 8 for fax detection Rel 3 0 DIAL a system extension number 10 49 DIAL 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group Y PRESS Next item to assign another extension v VMS HUNT DELAY DIAL 506 Release 2 0 and earlier DIAL 1 Immediate 2 Delayed Release 3 0 and later DIAL 1 Day 2 Night DIAL line number DIAL 0 6 2v p 5 284 VMS HUNT SCHEDULE DIAL 507 Release 2 0 and earlier DIAL 1 Always 2 Day Only 3 Night Only p 5 286 Release 3 0 and later DIAL line number DIAL 1 Always 2 Day Only 3 Night Only DOORPHONE 1 EXTENSION DIAL any system extension except 10 11 or the first 2 extensions of any 206 or 308 modules To remove the doorphone extensi
426. our fax extension Tell the other party to wait until he or she hears the fax signal before pressing the Start button on the sending fax machine In addition if you have a PARTNER MAIL system and a fax call comes in on a line covered by the PARTNER MAIL system its Automated Attendant Service can be programmed to automatically transfer the call to a fax extension or if you have multiple fax machines to the extension Hunt Group for the fax machines There are four ways to transfer the call to the fax extension a If you have a Fax Management button simply press the button When the fax machine answers hang up a f you do not have a Fax Management button press plus the fax machine s extension number When the fax machine answers hang up Onastandard phone rapidly press and release the switchhook to place the call on hold then dial the fax extension number and hang up a f you have multiple fax machines in an extension Hunt Group press Transfr then plus the fax extension Hunt Group number When a fax machine answers hang up Setting Up Fax Machines 4 18 There are many ways to set up fax machines The following configurations are basic and easy to use a Single fax machine Good for light or moderate fax traffic This basic setup uses a published fax number a Fax machine line saver Good for light fax traffic with no need for a published fax number a Send and receive fax machines Good for high volume fax tra
427. owed if not line or pool access is denied With Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List 406 2 13 Programming Table 2 1 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Access to a Specific Line Type of Restrictions or Permissions for the Extension Setting for Line Assignment 301 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 Setting for Line Access Restriction 302 and Pool Access Restriction 315 Can receive and place intercom inside calls only All outside lines and pools not assigned No access for all lines and pools Cannot use a specific outside line or pool Outside line or pool not assigned No access for that line or pool Can only monitor call activity and pick up held calls on a specific line Outside line assigned No access for that line Can only receive calls ona specific line or pool Outside line or pool assigned Incoming only for that line or pool Can only place outgoing calls on a specific line Outside line or pool may be assigned Outgoing only for that line or pool 1 If a line or pool is not assigned to the ex
428. p Groups Related Features For instructions on answering calls in a Pickup Group see Group Pickup I66G Considerations An extension can be assigned to as many as four different Pickup Groups Extensions where extra alerts Such as a loud bell are installed can be assigned to a Pickup Group to enable anyone who hears the alert to answer the call Valid Entries 1 Assigned to group 2 Not Assigned to group v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign extensions to a Pickup Group 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H G at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 4 For example to select group 1 press T A display similar to the following appears Pickup Group 1 Extension 3 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to select extension 29 press 4 To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays 5 213 Feature Reference 5 At this point To assign or unassign another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure and enter a new group number Then repeat Steps 3 and 4 6 Select another procedure or
429. p call for a specific extension 1 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 The green light next to the Wake Up Service button flutters Wake Up Service is activated and the display reads Wake Up Call Dial the two digit extension number of the desired extension or use an Auto Dial button For example to schedule a wake up call for extension 32 press 3 2 A display similar to the following appears Wake Up Call 32 Wake Up Service Button 115 3 Enter the wake up time in 24 hour notation For example to set the time to 2 15 p m press When you have finished entering the time the display reads Wake Up Call 32 14 15 The wake up call is scheduled and the green light next to the Wake Up Service button turns off To review a scheduled wake up time for a specific extension ate 2 3 4 5 Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Review the displayed wake up time and target extension number Press the Wake Up Service button to exit Repeat Steps 1 through 4 to review wake up times for other extensions To cancel a scheduled wake up call 1 AUN Press the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 Dial the two digit target extension number or use an Auto Dial button Press Repeat Steps 1 3 to cancel a scheduled wake up call for another extension 5 297 EE Troubleshooting
430. pair 4 wire star home run not loop Other standard telecommunications equipment single line phones fax machines answering machines etc 1 pair 2 wire mounting cords Lucent Technologies D2R mounting cords recommended Bridging adapter Lucent Technologies 267F2 Range 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices Safety Requirements U S Meets UL 1459 Issue 2 Class 2 power standards UL 1012 Standard for Safety Power Supplies UL 1310 Standard for Safety Direct Plug in Transformers UL 1585 Standard for Safety Class 2 and Class 3 Transformers Canada Meets CSA C22 2 No 0 7 M1985 All other countries Meets IEC950 Second Edition and EN60950 Second Edition Specifications Government Approvals and Local Phone Company Information e U S FCC Part 68 Key System registration FCC AS5USA 61630 K F E FCC Part 68 Pooling and Hybrid System registration FCC A55USA 21213 MF3 Class A 5 Slot Configuration 2 Slot Configuration with 308EC or PARTNER MAIL VS Class B PARTNER Advanced Communications System Stand alone Configuration 2 Slot Configuration with 200 206 or 400 module plus ACS processor module REN outside line jack 0 9A per line jack Jack type RJ11C Loop start lines e Canada IC CP01 Issue 7 IC registration number Canada See the label on the side of the control unit IC CS03 Issues 6 amp 7 Load Number 7 Loop
431. personalized service if the receptionist transfers a call to extension X or Y and that extension does not answer the call returns to the receptionist The receptionist can then take a message or send the call to the extension s mailbox if the caller prefers Voice Messaging Systems PARTNER MAIL VS System the PARTNER MAIL VS System _ Ext not automatically covered by YF Ext Y Ext 10 Receptionists Desk Figure 4 14 Delayed Call Handling To Use Follow the instructions packaged with the PARTNER MAIL VS system to install it During normal business hours the PARTNER MAIL VS system uses generic rings for handling the receptionist picks up all calls at extension 10 If the receptionist cannot answer within the specified number of rings the system routes the call to the PARTNER MAIL VS system where the day menu plays to the caller Outside of business hours when Night Service is activated at extension 10 outside calls are answered directly by the PARTNER MAIL VS system Any user who is in the office can pick up calls before the PARTNER MAIL VS system answers To Program The following list summarizes the PARTNER Advanced Communications System programming procedures you use to implement the previous example 1 Use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign all outside lines to Hunt Group 7 the VMS hunt group to provide Automated Attendant Service on these lines 2 Use Transfer Return Extension 306 for
432. phone as long as the REN of the two devices together does not exceed 2 0 System phones have 0 0 REN For example you can connect a standard phone and an answering machine to the same extension An extension with two devices connected to it is called a combination extension You cannot connect two system phones on one extension The PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide provides installation instructions 1 REN is a measure of the power it takes to ring a phone The typical home phone line supports 4 0 5 0 RENs each extension jack in your system handles up to 2 0 RENs Programming Overview After the system hardware is installed you can customize the system and individual telephones This chapter explains how to use programming to accomplish that There are two types of programming System Programming bllows you to customize the system to meet the needs of your business When the system is first installed it uses factory settings that reflect the most commonly used options You can change system settings as needed You can perform System Programming from either extension 10 or 11 Because an extension cannot be in programming mode and handle calls at the same time consider using extension 11 for programming Doing so gives you the ability to program without disrupting call handling by the receptionist at extension 10 Telephone Programming allows telephones to be customized to meet individ
433. played Then repeat Step 4 To assign extensions to the other Contact Closure Group press Next Procedure or Prev Procedure and begin at Step 2 6 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 93 Feature Reference Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Description This System Programming procedure specifies how long the Contact Closures remain active when they are activated A Contact Closure can be activated for 1 3 or 5 seconds or the Contact Closure can be set to toggle If a Contact Closure that controls a door lock has a Contact Closure Operation Type of 5 Seconds On for example the door lock is released for 5 seconds when a user activates the Contact Closure If the Contact Closure has a Contact Closure Operation Type of Toggle the Contact Closure must be activated and deactivated One user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure or the same user can both activate and deactivate the Contact Closure For more information about Contact Closure devices see Contact Closure Devices jon page 4 13 Related Features Before a user can activate a contact closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure m When auser s extension is included in the appropriate Contact Closure Group the user can t
434. pools assigned at each user s extension to Immediate Ring No Answering f some lines should not be picked up by the receptionist at all either set Line Ringing for those lines at extension 10 to No Ring or simply use Line Assignment 301 to remove those lines from extension 10 In either case set Line Access Restriction 302 to No Access for those lines at extension 10 to prevent the receptionist from using Direct Line Pickup to access those lines Backup Answering Options To assist the receptionist in handling calls consider the following features Automatic System Answer Useful during peak calling periods to answer outside calls while the receptionist is busy on other calls When activated this feature answers incoming calls after a specified number of rings and plays a customized greeting Then depending on how Automatic System Answer Mode 121 is programmed the system either places the call on hold at extension 10 the light next to the line button winks green at extension 10 and winks red at all other extensions that have the line the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available continues to ring all extensions that have access to the line the green light next to the line button at those extensions flash the outside caller hears Music on Hold if it is available disconnects the call The first two options provide audible and or visual indication of incoming calls waiting to be answered
435. procedure or exit programming mode Hotline 603 Hotline 603 Description This System Programming procedure identifies an internal hotline extension and its alert extension When a user lifts the handset of the hotline phone the alert extension rings You can set up several hotline and alert extension pairs The alert extension can be the same or different for multiple hotline extensions We recommend using a standard phone as the hotline phone since this feature makes use only of the phone s intercom The alert extension can be any type of phone or it can be the loudspeaker paging system so the hotline phone can be used to make announcements over the loudspeaker Related Features To prevent outside calls from being made or received on the hotline phone use Line Assignment 301 to remove all outside lines or Pool Extension Assignment 314 to remove all pools from the hotline extension a Set Automatic Line Selection for the hotline extension to intercom only Remove hotline extensions from Night Service Group Extensions 504 Calling Group Extensions 502 and Hunt Group Extensions 505 Use External Hotline 311 to identify an extension that automatically dials a programmed outside number when a user lifts the handset Considerations The same extension cannot be assigned as both a hotline anda doorphone Assigning a doorphone extension as a hotline extension cancels the doorphone setting
436. pter use only a Lucent Technologies 267F2 bridging adapter If the problem persists call the hotline see page 6 1 a Ifthe phone still does not work properly call the hotline see page 6 1 6 15 Troubleshooting Problems with Standard Devices Standard Device Does Not Answer Possible Cause A standard device such as a fax machine or answering machine does not answer intercom calls or transferred calls because it does not recognize the distinctive ringing pattern used by the system What to do Change the extension s setting for Distinctive Ring 308 to Not Active so the extension uses the same ringing for intercom and transferred calls as it does for outside calls m Ifthe device works properly the problem is solved If the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 Standard Device Does Not Dial Out Properly Possible Cause A standard device with autodialing such as a modem does not recognize the intercom dial tone generated by the system What to do Change the setting for Intercom Dial Tone 309 for the extension to Machine so the system generates outside line dial tone for the extension m If the device works properly the problem is solved If the problem remains call the hotline see page 6 1 Call Records Wrap on SMDR Printout 6 16 Possible Cause SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits causing the combined length of the field
437. r If you install a voice messaging system assign the system extensions associated with the voice messaging system hardware to Hunt Group 7 Then use this procedure to assign outside lines to Hunt Group 7 for Automated Attendant Service Callers hear a greeting and are prompted to enter digits to transfer to a specific extension or group without the assistance of the receptionist To set up lines for Group Call Distribution 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 2 at extension 10 or 11 At the Group prompt enter a group number 1 6 7 for the voice messaging system For example to select group 1 press Q Atthe Line prompt enter the desired line number For example to select line 1 press To assign or remove a line for groups 1 6 or to assign or remove a line or use VMS Line Cover for group 7 press until the appropriate value displays At this point To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 4 To program another group press Next Procedure Prev Procedure enter a new group number and repeat Steps 3 and 4 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Group Calling Ring Page I7G I 7G Description This feature allows users to ring page or transfer calls simultaneously to all of the extensions i
438. r Description This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10 This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn Direct Extension Dial DXD on and off This feature permits an outside caller to dial an extension or Hunt Group directly without the aid of the receptionist With Release 3 0 or later DXD calls also can be transferred directly into a Calling Group It is ideal for outside callers who frequently talk with specific employees or service groups and know the extension number they are trying to reach When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Direct Extension Dial the system picks it up after a specified number of rings and plays a short message prompting the caller to dial the digits of the designated extension Hunt Group or Calling Group Related Features Do not use this feature in places where Hold Disconnect Time 203 is not recognized because if a caller hangs up after Direct Extension Dial answers the line will appear to be busy The Direct Extension Dial button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Direct Extension Dial affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Direct Extension Dial Lines 205 Calls that ring on Direct Extension Dial lines are picked up after two rings as a default To change the number of rings use Direct Extension Dial Delay 112 You must use Direct Exten
439. r If the number is busy or does not answer hang up and the first party rings back To add an inside party dial the two digit extension number If the extension is busy or does not answer press the switchhook down once rapidly and you are reconnected with the first party When the second party answers press the switchhook down once rapidly You are now connected with both parties gt NOTE Standard Phones are limited to three way conferencing Conference Drop F06 Conference Drop F06 Description This feature drops the last outside party added to a conference call without disconnecting the other parties Related Features Considerations For instructions on setting up conference calls see Conference Calls You can use Outside Conference Denial 109 to disallow conference calls with multiple outside parties This feature cannot be used with Call Screening F25 You can program a Conference Drop button on a system phone to use the feature with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Conference Drop button 1 a o o N Using Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Prog
440. r answering a call Off steady off Line is idle not being used Feature is off Extension programmed on the button is idle not being used Flash long on long off LE A call is ringing on the line Green flash means a call is ringing at your extension Red flash means a call is ringing on the line but not at your extension A user is entering a four digit code to lock or unlock his or her extension Green flash means someone at the extension programmed on the button is calling you Alternating Red Green Flash red on green on red on green on mp A Alternating green Also for Call and red flash Screening and appears at both Record a Call extensions in a joined call and at any extension connected in a conference call Also for Call Screening and Record a Call 3 4 System Telephones Eee ee ee Table 3 1 Light Patterns for System Phones Continued Intercom Auto Light Pattern Line Button Pool Button Feature Button Dial Button Wink long on short off A call on the line Green wink ma IS Cither on hold means the or parked Green call is either wink means the on hold or call is on hold or parked at parked at your your extension Red extension wink means the Anyone who call is on hold or has the line parked atanother can retrieve extension the
441. r Delay 110 You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Automatic System Answer this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call For callers to hear Music on Hold Music on Hold 602 must be Active and an audio source must be connected to the primary processor module Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Release 2 0 or Later Valid Entries Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold calls are placed on hold at extension 10 however any extension with access to the line on which the call is held can retrieve the call If Automatic System Answer Mode is set to Hold and a call is placed on hold for longer than one minute the system generates a short Hold Reminder Tone at exte
442. r another extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 5 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Account Code Entry F12 Account Code Entry F12 Description This feature can be used only from a system phone This feature lets a user enter an account code up to 16 digits for an outside call incoming or outgoing An account code typically is used to identify a department project or client for charge back or tracking purposes Related Features Considerations You can use Forced Account Code Entry 307 to identify system phone extensions that are required to enter an account code prior to dialing any outside number including those on the Emergency Phone Number List A forced account code must be entered at the beginning of a call however a different account code can be entered any time during the call gt NOTE With Release 3 0 or later users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List 406 You can use Forced Account Code List 409 to create a list of valid account codes which should be distributed to the appropriate users If a Forced Account Code List exists the system checks the list whenever a user enters a forced account code If the code is valid the system provides the user access to an outside line If the code is invali
443. r return extensions The transfer return extension for any extensions associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware should be extension 10 or another extension with a person who can assist the caller AA Extensions 607 is used to identify the extensions associated with auto attendant hardware and Hunt Group Extensions 505 is used to identify the extensions associated with voice messaging system hardware f an extension has VMS Cover active unanswered calls to that extension are routed to the voice messaging system rather than to the transfer return extension a For transferred calls that are sent to a covering extension with Call Coverage if the covering extension does not answer within the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 the call rings the specified number of Transfer Return Rings 105 before it transfer returns If the covering extension has Do Not Disturb active the call rings one more time after the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 before it transfer returns Considerations An unanswered transferred call returns to the transfer return extension identified for the extension transferring the call not the extension receiving the call Do not designate an extension associated with auto attendant or voice messaging system hardware as the transfer return extension for any user extension Transfer return calls do not receive call coverage or voice
444. ram the instructions in the box for the next feature PRESS mora DIAL the extension number to be programmed TO CHANGE SETTING FOR Buttons on to which lines or pools are assigned light up ANOTHER EXTENSION TO END PROGRAMMING MODE to show the current Line Ringing setting remaining buttons can be programmed with Auto Dial numbers or PRESS ental Tel Program PRESS Feature 0 fa features DIAL the new extension s number NOTE Program Automatic Line Selection or Extension Name Display first v v AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION EXTENSION NAME Fp 5 730 PRESS x x p 5 23 PRESS left intercom 0 5 130 PRESS the line pool intercom 29 Enter the character codes for the buttons in the desired order f name See Table 5 3 Character PRESS x Codes on p 5 131 Key Extension Outside lines left Intercom v Pooled Extension Pool 880 button 1 button a left Intercom right Intercom v Pools 881 883 individual lines PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PRESS Feature DIAL the phone number up to 28 g DIAL a two digit code l A a 38550 Specia AUTO DIAL NUMBERS OUTSIDE AND INSIDE PRESS a programmable button To program an extension nume To program an outside number PRESS left intercom DIAL the phone Number mup to28 DIAL the extension number to digits including special ring the extension orf functions see Special plus the extension number Dialing Functions p 5 250 to voi
445. ram another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone Press the programmed button or press The last added outside party is dropped from the conference Standard Phone Press the switchhook down once rapidly The last added party inside or outside is dropped from the conference 5 89 Feature Reference Contact Closure F41 and F42 Description The system can drive an optional Contact Closure Adjunct with two Contact Closures to operate auxiliary devices such as electronic door locks You can assign one or more extensions to a Contact Closure Group for each of these Contact Closures Only these extensions can control the activation of the Contact Closures by using for Contact Closure 1 and for Contact Closure 2 or by programming these dial codes onto buttons on their phones See Specifications in Chapter A for information about electrical requirements for the Contact Closure Adjunct Related Features Before a user can activate a Contact Closure you must assign the user s extension to the Contact Closure Group 612 for that Contact Closure Use Contact Closure Operation Type 613 to specify how long the Contact Closure remains active when activated If the Contact Closure Operation Type is set to Toggle one user can activate the Contact Closure and another user can deactivate it provided both users are included in the Contact Closure Group for that Contact Closure When the C
446. rammed on a button with lights This feature does not work if it is programmed on a button lights The system considers extension 10 busy while you are using the Outgoing Call Restriction button and the phone acts as if it is in System Programming mode You cannot use other features or handle calls at extension 10 until you are through using the feature You cannot use the Outgoing Call Restriction button to change an extension s setting while extension 11 is in System Programming mode Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 Valid Entries 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button with lights to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to that button Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program an Outgoing Call Restriction button at extension 10 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H Q O at extension 10 2 At this point a f you want to assign Outgoing Call Restriction to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 1 Assigned Ext10 f you want to remove the Outgoing Call Restriction button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Outgoing CallRstr Button 2 Not Assigned If you want to
447. ransfer calls to the fax modem or answering machine When Night Service is off you can use the auxiliary equipment lines for normal business purposes so that lines are dedicated to auxiliary equipment only after hours By putting auxiliary equipment in the Night Service Group as described in this section auxiliary equipment can start ringing and answering calls whenever you turn Night Service on In other words the Night Service button at extension 10 acts like a switch turning auxiliary equipment on and off as well as putting the system into Night Service gt NOTE If you have a voice messaging system turning Night Service on also activates Night Service operation of the voice messaging system Figure 4 13 shows a system with a fax machine and a modem connected to separate extensions Line A is published as the fax line and line B is published as the modem line CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 13 Night Service with Fax Machine and Modem Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment Using Night Service with Auxiliary Equipment During the day lines A and B do not ring at extensions X and Y When you turn Night Service on calls on line A ring immediately at the fax extension X Since that line is not assigned to any other extension in the Night Service Group only extension X receives fax transmissions Likewise with Night Service on calls on line B ring immediately at the modem extension Y gt NOTE If answering mac
448. ration in the United States leave the default setting USA Users can view Caller ID information for unanswered central office calls on predesignated lines and unanswered directed calls using the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing F23 feature Users can also program this feature to log answered calls using the Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 programming procedure Caller ID Log Answered Calls can be used while using Call Screening F24 Subscriptions to Caller ID service are on a per line basis Caller ID a The lines associated with Caller ID must be connected to a line jack ona PARTNER ACS processor module 206EC module 308EC module or 400EC module For more information refer to the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide a Caller ID information is passed to an extension between the first and second ring To receive Caller ID information wait until the second ring before answering the call Individuals with Call Waiting from the local telephone company will not receive Caller ID information for the second call Notall calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local phone company When Caller ID information is not captured the system date and day default displays instead The incoming telephone number replaces the system date and time display on system phones for the duration of the call An out of area message displays if a call is being dialed from a region t
449. re including the Talk field on call reports or changing the output format to 24 digits check the documentation shipped with the call accounting device to verify that these options are supported If SMDR Talk Time 611 is set to Active and SMDR Output Format 610 is set to 24 digits the combined length of the fields for a call record will be greater than the 80 characters supported by most printers If call records wrap around to the next line reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer If necessary change the SMDR Output Format back to 15 digits In the event of a power failure records of any calls in progress are lost Inside intercom calls are not recorded If you place a call on hold and the caller hangs up the call is considered complete and the record is sent to the call reporting device Conference calls appear as two outside calls This means two records are generated on the report The following RS 232 serial transmission protocol is used for SMDR records 1200 baud No parity 8 data bits 2 stop bits The call reporting feature also supports XON XOFF protocol carriage returns and line feeds 4 12 Contact Closure Devices Serial Printers Use a 355A adapter which converts a modular jack interface to an RS 232 25 pin connector to connect a serial printer to the PARTNER ACS processor module If you connect a printer make sure the printer can receive SMDR data in the
450. red Calls 317 programming 5 69 _ oo O Caller ID Name Displa description 5 81 _ ___ S Caller ID Type 122 5 83 S Calling extensions simultaneousl with 5 65 0 15 85 5 145 2 Slot Centralized Telephone Programming Changing System Settings 2 1 2 3 2 7 2 11 J2 12 Clock changing system 2 4 2 9 5 259 4 5 260 5 268 CO Line Hunting see Group Call Distribution 206 Combination Extension problems with Components batteries 1 8 modules 1 6 _ __ S O PC Card slot 1 8 _ __ o telephones 1 14 7 16 00 Components System description 1 4 Conference IN 2 call making a conf button Contact Closure settingup 413 0 Contact Closure Adjunct description 2 17 4 13 o Contact Closure Device 4 13 S O Contact Closure Group 612 Contact Closure Jack description Contact Closure Operation Type 613 Contact Closures description 5 90 _ S U O O Control Unit definition illustration 1 5 S U O Copy Settings 399 2 7 5 96 Cd Cordless Phones 1 15 Cis Coverage 2 Covering Calls 5 46 CreditCardScanners 4 15 CS Customer Self Service Center on the Internet Cycle Programming Method 2 23 0S D Date System 101 Day System 102 Dial Mode 201 Dial Tone Dial code Features 3 14 0 Dialing Restrictions and Permissions disallowed phone numbers 5 113 5 114 ss emergency phone numbers faxmachine for 4 19 o lineaccess 5 17
451. remove Backup Restore PC Cards Display Shows Empty File in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You selected a file named AUTO or MAN for the restore The file is empty no backups have been stored in it yet What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again using a file created during a backup procedure Remember to power down the system before you insert or remove Backup Restore PC Cards 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 6 22 Problems with System Restore Display Shows Incompatible Versions in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted to restore a file that was created with an incompatible software release What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again using a backup file that was created with the current software release gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Display Shows Restore Failed Try Again for Two Seconds in System Programming Mode gt NOTE This display indicates that all system and telephone programming has reverted to the default settings Possible Cause 1 The Backup Restore PC Card was removed while the restore was in progress What to do Check to see whether the P
452. rence of 2 00 a m After that backups will be done at 2 00 a m on the first day of each month until the setting is changed back to Not Active gt NOTE Although you can change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 123 without having a Backup Restore in the PC Card slot you must have a PC Card in the slot before a backup can take place It is recommended that you leave the Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a backup begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the AUTO mmddyy file only where mmddyy represents the date of the backup in month day year format anda manual backup replaces the MAN mmadyy file only Restore Programming 125 asks you to specify which backup file you want to use Calls will continue to be handled normally during an automatic backup 1 Active 2 Not Active v 3 Backup Alarm Cleared See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Backup Programming Automatic 123 Changing the Setting To change the setting for Backup Programming Automatic 1
453. res Automatic Line Selection for his or her extension should be set to intercom first for proper operation For example the setting for a standard phone in a lobby used for internal calling or making local calls on line 1 would be Intercom 1 Programming 5 24 See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program Automatic Line Selection for an extension 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed for Automatic Line Selection 3 Press amp 4 Press the line pool or buttons in the desired order For each button pressed a display similar to the following appears Automatic Line Selection 5 To exit Automatic Line Selection press amp 6 Press and enter a new extension number or exit programming mode Automatic System Answer Button 111 Release 2 0 or Later Automatic System Answer Button 111 Release 2 0 or Later This feature is available only on the system phone at extension 10 This System Programming procedure identifies a button to be used to turn Automatic System Answer ASA on and off This feature helps the receptionist answer calls during busy periods When an outside call rings on a line programmed with Automatic System Answer the system answers it after
454. ress left intercom For extension 12 the display reads 12 Enter Extension Name If a name was assigned previously to this extension that name displays instead Enter the two digit code for each character you want to enter See Table 5 3 for codes For example to enter the name Andy press OJO 9 3 The display reads 12 ANDY If you make a mistake you can press wic HFA to clear the display Repeat Step 4 to enter the correct name Program a button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 131 Feature Reference External Hotline 311 Description This procedure applies only to standard phones This System Programming procedure identifies an external hotline extension When a user lifts the handset of an external hotline a predetermined outside number is dialed automatically The external number might be for example a frequently called service bureau The external hotline must be a standard phone not a system phone After you identify an external hotline extension you must store the external phone number for the hotline extension as Personal Speed Dial code 80 Both procedures are included in Programming jon the next page Related Features Considerations 5 132 302 Jand Use Hotline 603 to identify an internal hotline extension Use Line Assignment 301 to assign outside lines to the external hotline extension Pooled Extension Assignment 314 to assi
455. revent calls to a specific telephone number or to categories of numbers such as international numbers Use this procedure to create up to eight lists of up to 10 telephone numbers each Related Features Considerations Valid Entries After completing this procedure you must use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign the Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Numbers Emergency Phone Numbers and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers override the Disallowed List The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active the system checks for allowed and disallowed phone numbers again beginning with the first digit after the star code Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display When a user dials a number that is on a Disallowed List for the user s extension the user hears a reorder tone fast busy signal after dialing the part of the number that is stored in the list for example an area code If you want to go to another programming procedure when entering phone numbers in a list you must use
456. revents calls to area codes with 1 as the second digit such as 212 International Long Distance To prevent international calls enter the international prefix number 011 All Star Codes To prevent the use of all star codes enter for touch tone phones and 11 equivalent to a on rotary phones 5 115 Feature Reference Specific Star Codes To prevent the use of a specific star code for example 67 to block Caller ID information enter the plus the 2 or 3 digit code for touch tone phones and 11 equivalent to a on rotary phones plus the 2 or 3 digit code For touch tone phones 67 Prevents use of 67 to block Caller ID information For rotary phones 1167 Prevents use of 1167 to block Caller ID information Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H 4 at extension 10 or 11 2 Atthe List Number prompt enter a list number 1 8 For example to select the first list press 3 Atthe Entry prompt select a list entry 01 10 4 Atthe Data prompt enter the first telephone number 5 To save the telephone number in memory you must press nie 6 At this point To add other phone numbers to this list press to select a different list entry an
457. rgency services numbers Related Features Considerations Valid Entries With Release 2 0 and earlier if an extension is programmed for Forced Account Code Eniry 307 a user at the extension is required to enter an account code before dialing a number in the Emergency Phone Number List With Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List The entries you must make to permit or restrict toll calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when you make toll calls Each telephone number can include up to 12 digits When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers you should 1 remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up and 2 perform such activities in the off peak hours such as early morning or late evening Up to 12 digits 0 9 Examples The examples below show how to enter telephone numbers for the Emergency Phone Number List in Step 3 of Programming 5 126 911 To allow 911 calls from any extension that has an outside line
458. ries System line number System extension number No lines owned by an extension v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 178 To change the Line Coverage setting for an extension 1 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 2 at extension 10 or 11 Enter the desired line number For example to program line 12 press 3 Enter the number of the extension to be assigned ownership of the line 4 At this point To delete the current setting press Remove To program another line press Next item or Prev item until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode Line Ringing Line Ringing Description This Telephone Programming procedure determines how each outside line or pool assigned to an extension rings A line or pool can ring immediately ring with a 20 second delay or not ring at all Delayed Ring is useful for backup coverage on shared lines or pools such as for secretaries who cover each other s lines No Ring is useful for all extensions except 10 when a receptionist answers all calls or for phones with no regular users such as those in conference rooms Related Features Considerations To copy the Line Ringing settings as well as other system settings to o
459. riginal PC Card is corrupted See Table 1 on page B 7 for the information about ordering a new Backup Restore PC Card Display Shows Backup Failed SystemBusy in System Programming Mode Possible Cause Changes were being made to system programming or central telephone programming while a backup was in progress What to do Try Backup Programming Manual 124 later when the system is idle or during nonbusiness hours 6 21 Troubleshooting Problems with System Restore Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a restore using Restore Programming 125 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Display Shows Bad File Try Again in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You attempted a restore and the file was corrupted What to do Try Restore Programming 125 again with a different backup file Remember to power down the system before you insert or
460. rking order Repair or replacement parts may be new or refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis If Lucent Technologies determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability will remove the system and at your option refund the purchase price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of another Lucent Technologies system If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage you selected A written explanation of Lucent Technologies types of maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling 1 800 247 7000 in the continental U S only If you purchased your system from a Lucent Technologies authorized reseller contact your reseller for the details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system caused by power surges Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent Technologies Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited warranty for damages resulting from Failure to follow Lucent Technologies installation operation or maintenance instructions Unauthorized system modification movement or alt
461. rminals per Contact Closure providing a normally open and normally closed function for each Contact Closure Maximum contact voltages and current 30 VAC 1 Amp 50 VDC 1 Amp SMDR Output Format 1200 baud 8 data bits XON XOFF protocol Line feeds No parity 2 stop bits Carriage return Environmental Requirements Control Unit Mount on a wall at least 2 feet 0 6 meters from the floor wall mounting required Locate within 5 feet 1 5 meters of the network interface jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not controlled by a switch using supplied 7 foot 2 1 meter cords Operating temperature 32 to 104 F 0 to 40 C not in direct sunlight Humidity 15 90 noncondensing For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules provide the following minimum clearance around the control unit 5 Slot carrier 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the top and sides and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the front and bottom 2 Slot carrier or Stand alone ACS processor module 1 foot 0 3 meter clearance at the front top and right side and 2 feet 0 6 meter at the bottom and left side Locate in an area free of excess moisture corrosive gases dust and chemicals Electrical Requirements Control Unit U S and Canada 90 264 VAC 47 63 Hz 3 prong outlet separate ground separately fused at 15 Amps Other countries 90 264 VAC 220 VAC fused at 10 Amps Grounding to comply with Underwrite
462. rn to the factory settings It is recommended that you install fresh batteries every year See Battery Replacement on page 6 2 for more information Battery Replacement 6 2 A CAUTION Do not turn off the power or remove the processor module before replacing the batteries If you do all settings for system and telephone programming will revert to the default settings If you have a Backup Restore PC Card it is highly recommended that you do a backup before changing the batteries Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 The PARTNER ACS processor module uses two user replaceable AAA alkaline batteries These batteries provide enough power to retain the system programming settings during a power failure for 45 days to six months depending on the freshness of the batteries When battery power is getting low the system displays a ChgBat W PowerOn or ReplaceSysBat W Power On message on the top line of display phones at extensions 10 and 11 in place of the default day date time message Users at these extensions should be instructed to notify you when they see this message You should replace the batteries within 45 days of seeing the messa
463. roblem is solved lf the Dial Mode is set correctly go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting for the extension Other Problems with Phones What to do If calls could be made without trouble before find out if someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction 401 for the extension f someone changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting verify that the change was an appropriate one m f no one changed the Outgoing Call Restriction setting go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Station Lock was used to lock the extension What to do Use Station Unlock from extension 10 to unlock the extension If you can make a call the problem is solved lf the extension was not locked go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Local phone company is not accurately receiving the dialing signals What to do Isolate the problem Use the telephone to make calls on different lines Then make calls on different phones using the same line a If you cannot make calls from one phone on all lines follow the procedure for System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 2 f you cannot make calls using different phones go to Possible Cause 6 Possible Cause 6 Too many standard devices are trying to dial simultaneously If the problem is on a system phone go to Possible Cause 7 What to do Stay on the line and wait for dial tone or try to call later If you can
464. rocedure you must use Allowed List Assignments 408 to assign the Allowed Phone Number Lists to specific extensions Allowed Phone Number Lists override Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 and Outgoing Call Restriction 401 but not Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Resiriction 315 or Night Service Button 503 with a System Password 403 There are other ways of overriding restrictions see Marked and for more information The entries you must make to permit or restrict long distance calls differ depending on the setting for Toll Call Prefix 402 This setting tells the system whether a 0 for operator assisted calls or 1 for direct dial calls is required when users make long distance calls If Star Code Dial Delay 410 is active after a valid star code is dialed the system resets the dialing restrictions to check the number beginning with the first digit after the star code II amp starcode v Each list entry can include up to 12 digits You can use the wildcard character by pressing the button on a system phone to match any single digit it appears as on the telephone display If you are restricting an extension from placing long distance calls do not place numbers beginning with a 0 on an Allowed Phone Number List for the extension Once a user is active on an operator assisted call the user will be able to avoid dialing restrictions by asking the operator to dial restr
465. rogramming Manual 124 is a manual procedure that you can perform at any time to back up your system and telephone programming settings a System Reset Programming Saved 728 automatically occurs following a successful restore The reset disconnects any calls in progress Considerations u Ifthe restore is not successful the display shows Restore Failed or Restore Failed Try Again for two seconds All calls that were in progress are disconnected and all of the system and telephone programming settings revert to the default settings The PC Card in the PC Card slot must be a PARTNER ACS Backup Restore PC Card which can be purchased from Lucent Technologies gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 5 232 Restore Programming 125 Valid Entries PC Card Slot 2 is recommended for the Backup Restore PC Card however either slot can be used If the system detects Backup Restore PC Cards in both slots when a restore begins the first slot is used and the second is ignored 1 MAN mmddyy v where mmddyy the month day and year 2 AUTO mmddyy Using See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of
466. rphone extension you must use this feature to turn the light off You can program a Message Light Off button on a system phone to turn the message light off at a specific extension with one touch Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Message Light Off button 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button 4 Press 5 190 Message Light Off F10XX 5 Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button 6 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To turn off the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes off Skip Step 2 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn off or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn off the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the exte
467. rs Laboratories UL 1459 A An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors except that it is green with or without one or more yellow stripes is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the product or system B The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be connected to ground at the service equipment C The attachment plug receptacles in the vicinity of the product or system are all to be of a grounding type and the grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at the service equipment Requirements for Out of Building Installations Installation of a telephone or other standard tip ring device in another building requires the following In Range Out Of Building IROB protectors to protect the control unit and device from electrical surges System phone two Lucent Technologies IROB protectors Standard phone two Lucent Technologies IROB protector plus one carbon block protector Installation of a Contact Closure Adjunct controlled device outside the building requires a Lucent Technologies 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 to protect the control unit from electrical surges Wiring System phones Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Nonplenum DIW cable Lucent Technologies SYSTIMAX Bulk Plenum HALAR HALAR cable or at least 2
468. rt Caller ID What to do Make sure lines with Caller ID service are connected to a PARTNER ACS processor module or 206EC 308EC or 400EC modules If Caller ID lines are not connected to one of these modules install the appropriate modules and or make the appropriate connections Possible Cause 3 Someone activated Call Coverage What to do Check the system phone display m If Coverage Call for XX where XX is the extension that activated the Call Coverage displays the call is a coverage call Call Coverage displays the extension number of the person who activated the feature rather than Caller ID information Problems with System Phones m IfCoverage Call for XX does not display call the hotline see Priv Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The caller used a star code 67 to block Caller ID information or has instructed their telephone company to block Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is the normal operation for these conditions rs Is Displayed Instead of Caller ID Information Possible Cause The call originated outside the area for which the phone company can provide Caller ID information What to do Nothing this is normal operation for the Caller ID service Some Caller ID Information Does Not Display Possible Cause Not all calls on Caller ID lines are displayed This varies by local phone company What to do lf Caller ID information for a large number of
469. rt far end disconnect What to do Call your local phone company and find out whether they support far end disconnect If the local phone company does not support far end disconnect you should not set the Automatic System Answer Mode 121 to either Hold or Ring and you should not use the Direct Extension Dial feature If the local phone company supports far end disconnect but the problem still occurs call the hotline see page 6 1 Calls on Hold Are Disconnected 6 24 Possible Cause Hold Disconnect Time setting is too short What to do Change Hold Disconnect Time 203 to a longer interval f calls on hold no longer disconnect the problem is solved a f calls on hold still get disconnected or the Hold Disconnect Time was already set to the longest interval call the hotline see page 6 1 System Problems An ASA DXD Missing Card Error Message Appears Possible Cause You are attempting to record an Automatic System Answer message 1891 or a Direct Extension Dial DXD message 1892 and an ASA DXD PC card is not installed in the processor module What to do To clear the message at extension 10 program an Automatic System Answer 111 button if you used 1891 to attempt to record the greeting or a Direct Extension Dial 112 button if you used 1892 to attempt to record the greeting Press the programmed button to turn the feature on then press the programmed button to turn it off again After you turn the feature off
470. rt while programming However you must call before you enter programming mode and you must use the handset to talk not the speaker and microphone 2 23 Programming PARTNER 34D Phone 00 00 OOF OOF oO OO 00 OOF 00 O0 OO 00 00 O00 00 Qa o o o a o a Oo o o im o Oo mi o o o mi o o o mi o m x lt r Message Intercom Intercom PARTNER 18D 18 Phone q Qo 0 Message o o Intercom Intercom PARTNER 6 Phone Intercom Ext Figure 2 4 Button Locations on PARTNER Model Phones 2 24 Upgrading the PARTNER ACS Changing Programming Type When you are in programming mode you can move between System Programming and Centralized Telephone Programming To change to Centralized Telephone Programming when you are in System Programming press Central Tel Program TO move back to System Programming when you are in Centralized Telephone Programming press Central Tel Program then System Program Remote Programming The system permits programming from a remote location using an auxiliary device called the Remote Administration Unit RAU Remote programming requires the
471. rts MLC 6 Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Unique Line Ringing 209 has been set to a pattern other than 1 Release 3 0 or later What to do For MLC 6 phones you must always set the ring pattern to Pattern 1 Problems with Standard Phones Standard Phone Does Not Ring Possible Cause 1 Ringer is turned off What to do Turn on the ringer m If the phone rings the problem is solved lf the phone still does not ring go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Call Forwarding is turned on What to do Check to see if Call Forwarding is turned on a If Call Forwarding is turned on turn it off a f Call Forwarding is not turned on go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 Line Ringing is programmed for No Ring or Delayed Ring What to do Check the Line Ringing setting for the extension a f Line Ringing is set for No Ring or Delayed Ring change the setting if appropriate 6 8 Problems with Standard Phones a f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and this phone is part of a combination extension see Problems with Combination Extensions page 6 15 n a f Line Ringing is set for Immediate Ring and the phone is on an extension by itself go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 Phone is faulty What to do Unplug the problem phone Plug in a standard phone that you know rings properly lf the replacement phone rings properly the problem phone is defective Replace it a If
472. s Auxiliary Equipment Auxiliary Equipment You can connect many types of telecommunications devices to your system without expensive adapters or additional phone lines for example answering machines credit card scanners and fax machines Many industry standard single line devices will work with the system regardless of the manufacturer For more information refer to the list in Chapter 4 or contact your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer Also see Chapter 4 for advice on setting up auxiliary equipment to work effectively with the system Requirements An industry standard device must meet the following conditions a It must be nonproprietary that is it cannot be made specifically for use on a particular telephone system For example you cannot connect a Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Communication System phone because itis specifically designed for use on a MERLIN LEGEND Communication System ts Ringer Equivalence Number REN cannot be greater than 2 0 The REN is shown on a label on the device usually on the bottom You can connect a standard two line device to the system but for best results it should be installed and used as if it were a single line device Connecting Standard Devices You can connect a standard device so that it is on an extension by itself or so that it shares an extension with another piece of equipment either another standard device or a system
473. s to identify your extension as the signaling extension You can signal the target extension while you are on an outside call This does not initiate a one touch transfer Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using A Manual Signaling button does not initiate an intercom call unless you lift the handset or press p r press intercom and then press the Manual Signaling button To respond to a signal the target extension must place an intercom call to the person signaling To program a Manual Signaling button Press eature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press B Dial the two digit extension number of the target extension For example to identify extension 22 as the target extension press Enter before the extension number if you want to use the button for voice signaling Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode To beep the target extension While the handset is in the cradle press the programmed button The extension beeps for as long as the button is pressed To ring or voice signal the target extension Lift the handset or press p
474. s Offices Sales offices to serve the small business customer are located throughout the country To contact the office closest to you call 800 247 7000 A representative will place your order including Lucent Technologies installation if you need it Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealers You can also buy most items from one of Lucent Technologies authorized dealers Check your local telephone directory s yellow pages for the Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer nearest you Lucent Technologies National Parts Sales Center This national sales center located in Little Rock stocks replacement parts Telephone orders can be placed by calling 1 800 222 7278 In Canada order these items from Lucent Technologies Canada Eastern Canada and Ottawa 514 335 7200 Ontario 416 756 5236 Central and Western Canada 800 561 5165 Table B 1 Product Ordering Information To use Table B 1 first locate the item you want A triangle s indicates where you can obtain it Sources of Additional Equipment and Replacements Parts U S System Modules and Wiring SOURCE U S Lucent Direct Catalog Sales 1 800 461 2100 Lucent Technologies Sales Office 1 800 247 7000 Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer Lucent Technologies National Parts Sale Center 1 800 222 7278 PARTNER ACS Processor Module Includes module three 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Line Extension module 206E Incl
475. s and want immediate call handling should set this option to at least 2 rings This allows the ICLID information to be detected before the call is sent to the Automated Attendant Valid Entries For Release 2 0 and Earlier Immediate v Delay 5 284 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Valid Entries For Release 3 0 or Later Mode 1 Day 2 Night Number of Rings 0 6 av Programming For Release 2 0 or Earlier See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode For Release 3 0 or Later See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant service 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 Select Day or Night mode by entering or respectively 3 Enter the line number The current setting displays 4 To set VMS Hunt Delay press until the appropriate value displays See Valid
476. s for a call record to be greater than the 80 characters supported by your printer What to do Reduce the font size or increase the characters per inch setting for the printer a If the call records print without wrapping to the next line the problem is solved a Ifthe problem remains change the output format back to 15 digits Problems with Automatic Backup Problems with Automatic Backup Display Shows Backup Failed Insert Card at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card while trying to do an automatic backup What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system The backup is rescheduled for the next day at 2 00 a m gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Enter Backup Programming Automatic 123 and select Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 Display Shows Backup Failed Write Prot at Idle Extensions 10 and 11 Possible Cause The Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected and an automatic backup was
477. s phone A user can program the Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back feature on a button with lights to respond to a voice interrupt on busy call Also see Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 You can use Call Waiting 316 to specify standard phone extensions that can receive a call waiting tone and a second incoming call Calls that are answered by pressing a pool button can be held conferenced or transferred however pool buttons cannot be used to join calls There are several ways to access a line for answering calls On either a system phone or a standard phone lift the handset to answer a ringing call if more than one call is ringing at a system phone you get the call that has been ringing for the longest time On a system phone press a specific line pool or button You can also use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call by dialing and the two digit line number On a standard phone you can use Direct Line Pickup to pick up a ringing or held call or to join an active call on a specific line at intercom dial tone dial and the two digit line number For system phones and most standard phones the user can identify the type of call by the system s ringing patterns System display phones can also show in the display the type of call that is ringing at the extension See Ringing Patterns jon page 3 6 Note that there are no unique ringing patterns f
478. s prior to dialing outside phone numbers including those on the Emergency Phone Number List a Users can signal then speak to system phone users who are already active on a call to alert them of important business matters provided Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 is Assigned for the recipient Considerations The following instructions assume that system phones are set using Automatic Line Selection to automatically select outside lines first and standard phones are set to select intercom first This means that when a user with a system phone lifts the handset the user hears outside dial tone if an outside line is available but when a user with a standard phone lifts the handset the user hears intercom dial tone How to Make an Outside Call 5 184 System Phone 1 Lift the handset or press Sekr The green light next to a line or pool button is on steady and you hear the outside dial tone 2 Dial the phone number On a system display phone the dialed number appears on the display If you are using a PBX or Centrex line you also may need to use a dial out code usually 9 before you dial a number outside the system Making Calls To make an outside call on a specific line 1 Press the idle line button red and green lights are both off or dial plus the two digit line number 2 If desired lift the handset 3 Dial the phone number To make an outside call using a specific pool 1 Press the idle pool
479. s to be available to you your company must subscribe to those features For specific information about using Centrex see the Centrex documentation provided by your local telephone company Some of the issues you should consider when setting up your system to work effectively behind a PBX or Centrex system are discussed below Chapter 5 explains how to use the programming procedures discussed here Recall Setting To set up your equipment to work properly with a PBX or Centrex system first set Recall Timer Duration 107 to match the setting used by your PBX or Centrex system usually 800 msec or 32 This setting affects the length of a Recall signal sent by the control unit to access PBX or Centrex services Dialing Restrictions Outgoing Call Restriction 401 is an equipment restriction intended to limit an extension s dialing to inside calls only using the buttons on system phones or to inside and local calls only allowing calls within the PBX or Centrex system and local calls outside the PBX or Centrex system However if users in your system use a dial out code 9 on most PBX or Centrex systems before dialing numbers outside the PBX or Centrex system the equipment will not be able to prevent toll calls for extensions restricted to inside and local calls only unless you use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to prevent dialing to specific classes of numbers If your PBX or Centrex system includes d
480. se the call the user is active on is disconnected and the user is connected to the call on the line or pool button that was pressed The user can inspect outside calls that appear on intercom buttons If the call is an intercom call the default display is shown If users are not active on a call they can press line pool and intercom buttons to view Caller ID or Call Coverage information for those lines however if they pick up the handset they will join or answer the call shown on the display To program a Caller ID Inspect button 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button with lights Caller ID Inspect F17 4 Press D 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using 1 While active on a call press the programmed button The green light flutters Caller ID Inspect is activated 2 Press a line pool or intercom button The Caller ID or Call Coverage information for the selected line pool or intercom displays 3 Press the programmed button to deactivate the feature The feature is deactivated automatically if you hang up the handset or press any button other than a line pool or intercom button The green light is off when the feature is deactivated 5 67 Feature Reference Caller I
481. set to Night Only and Night service is turned off in Day mode calls coming in on lines assigned to the hunt group will not be sent to the hunt group If Night Service is turned on in Night mode incoming calls will go to the Hunt Group Valid Entries 1 Always v 2 Day Only 3 Night Only 5 286 VMS Hunt Schedule 507 Programming For Release 2 0 or Earlier See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 2 3 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 Press until the appropriate value displays Select another procedure or exit programming mode For Release 3 0 or Later See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 Enter the line number The current setting displays To set VMS Hunt Schedule press until the appropriate value displays See Valid Entries above To set VMS Hunt Schedule for another line press Next item or Prev i
482. since there is no default message You should record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message If you do not record a message for Automatic System Answer calls will be placed on hold continue to ring or be disconnected immediately after the system answers depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Automatic System Answer Record Playback 1891 Release 2 0 or Later Programming You must record the Automatic System Answer message from the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 You cannot record or play a message while Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed The message must be at least eight seconds to use the Fax CNG Detection 505 Group 8 feature The system takes seven seconds to determine if the incoming call is a fax See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To record an Automatic System Answer message 1 The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Turn off Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial and wait for any
483. sing a button The doorphone includes a speaker and microphone to allow two way conversation between the doorphone and the phone that answers Do Not Disturb A feature that prevents incoming calls from ringing at an extension See a so Send All Calls E Extension An endpoint in the system that connects telephones or standard devices which can be dialed using the button See also Programming Extension Extension Jack The location on a PARTNER ACS processor module 206 modules and 308EC modules that allows you to connect extension wiring to the control unit for phones or other telecommunications devices Extension Number The number assigned to each extension jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module or a 206 module Extension numbers are used for intercom calling Extension Name Display A feature that lets users assign a name to their extension The name appears along with the exten sion number on system display phones when users make an intercom call or a group call or trans fer a call Extension Programming A method of telephone programming that lets users program their own extensions from their sys tem phones See also Centralized Telephone Programming External Hotline A standard phone that is programmed to dial a predetermined outside number when a user lifts the handset See also Hotline Phone GL 4 Glossary F Fax CNG Detection Release 3 0 or later When an incoming call is answered by PVM PMVS PA
484. sion Dial Record Playback to record a message to prompt callers to dial an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number after the system answers an outside call If Direct Extension Dial is on callers hear ringing when the call is transferred regardless of the Music on Hold 602 or Ring on Transfer 119 setting By default unanswered calls return to extension 10 You can use Transfer Return Extension 306 to specify a different Transfer Return Extension for extension 10 In this case all unanswered Direct Extension Dial calls return to the specified extension as do unanswered calls manually transferred by extension 10 If Do Not Disturb F01 is active at a directly dialed extension the call returns to extension 10 or its transfer return extension unless Call Forwarding F11 Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 or VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 is used 5 99 Feature Reference You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outside call answered by Direct Extension Dial this field shows the call duration minus the time the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call a Automatic System Answer 121 is an alternative system answering feature that aids the receptionist during busy periods Considerations a The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installat
485. sor module This setting is system wide Related Features Music on Hold 602 activates or deactivates the Music on Hold jack on the processor module Considerations Changes to the Music on Hold Volume setting will have immediate effect on all calls currently receiving Music on Hold treatment Valid Entries 1 E lowest volume 2 EE 3 EEE 4 EEEE Y 5 EEE 6 EEE 7 mmuemem highest volume Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the Music on Hold Volume setting 1 Press Feature O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 The display shows the current setting 2 To change the setting press the number of the setting on the dialpad or press Next Data or Prev Data until the correct setting is displayed 3 If you want to return the volume to the default setting press Remove 5 196 Night Service Button 503 Night Service Button 503 Description This System Programming procedure identifies a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used to turn Night Service on and off When Night Service is on all lines and pools assigned to the phones of the users in the Night Service Group ring immediately regardless of their normal Line Ringing settings Night Service is useful if you want phones
486. special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To initiate a restore 1 If you have a Backup Restore PC Card installed skip to Step 2 If you do not have a PC Card installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H GZ at extension 10 or 11 The top line of the display shows Sys Set Restore or System Settings Restore If no PC Card is present in the PARTNER ACS processor module the error message Insert Valid Card is displayed Install a new PC Card using the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Then repeat this procedure from Step 2 You must power down the system before removing or inserting a Backup Restore PC Card You are prompted to choose the backup file you want to use for the restore The bottom line of the display shows 1 MAN mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the manual backup on this card To change to the file created by an automatic backup press 2 The bottom line of the display shows 2 AUTO mmddyy where mmddyy represents the date of the automatic backup on this card gt NOTE If the date of the file AUTO mmddyy or MAN mmddyy indicates that this is not the file you intended to use refer to the instruction package with the PC Upgrade card for complete instructions on how to install the Backup Restore PC Card If the Backup Restore PC Card is fresh from the f
487. ss code at intercom dial tone You can program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button on a system phone to pick up a line by pressing the button then dialing the two digit line number See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Direct Line Pickup ldle Line button 1 aor o N Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press left Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 111 Feature Reference Using 5 112 System Phone 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button and dial the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access or press and the two digit line number If you did not lift the handset the speaker comes on automatically Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Dial and the two digit system line number of the idle line you want to access Disallowed List Assignments 405 Disallowed List Assignments 405 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Disallowed Phone Number Lists to specified extensions Related Features You must use Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 to
488. stem Time 103 must be set correctly to ensure accurate call reports A call reportis a page of information that begins with a header The header includes field names that describe the information in each call record The call record is a line of information that includes the fields shown in Figure 4 5 DATE C 04 26 97 C 04 26 97 I 04 26 97 I 04 26 97 TIME NUMBER DUR LINE STN ACCOUNT 11 11 1028812015558014 00 01 40 08 18 11 34 1023319085556036 00 04 28 02 32 1725 L339 IN 00 02 12 01 10 13 38 9085559111 00 01 22 12 15 Figure 4 5 Sample Call Report Each page includes 59 records The report has the following fields 4 10 Call Type C indicates outgoing calls indicates incoming calls SMDR Record Type 608 defines whether incoming calls are reported Call Reporting Devices SMDR a Date The date of the call is shown in mm dd yy format where mm is the month dd is the day and yy is the year The system uses the date set with System Date 101 Time The time of the connection is shown in hh mm format where hh is the hour and mm is the minute The system uses the time set with System Time 103 and is shown in 24 hour military time a Number For an outgoing call this is the dialed number or the speed dial code of a Marked System Speed Dial Number preceded by an F This field holds a maximum of either 15 or 24 digits depending on the setting of SMDR Output Format 610 T
489. stem features Extension Numbers Auto Dial buttons are programmed for extensions 11 through 28 The receptionist can use these buttons to dial or transfer calls to the extensions with one touch In addition the lights of these Auto Dial buttons show the status of the extension so the receptionist can tell whether the phone at the extension is idle no lights on busy red on calling the receptionist green flash sending coverage calls to or manually signaling the receptionist green flutter or ringing back after the receptionist transferred a call green flutter Manual Signaling A Manual Signaling button labeled MS Bill is programmed to signal the target extension When the button is pressed the user at the target extension will hear a tone for as long as the button is pressed This feature is typically used by a receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call when the boss is already on a call The lights of a Manual Signaling button work like an Auto Dial button to show the status of the target extension Additionally a Manual Signaling button can be used to place intercom calls Manual Signaling applies only to system phones See Manual Signaling F13XX or F13 XX for more information gt NOTE You can have only one button for a target extension per extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button for intercom ringing or voice signaling Fax Management A
490. system display phone at their extension Only extension numbers not names are printed on SMDR reports You should program Extension Name Display when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming before programming any other features If you want to program both Extension Name Display and Automatic Line Selection which also must be programmed when you first enter Centralized Telephone Programming first program Automatic Line Selection then exit and re enter Centralized Telephone Programming to program Extension Name Display Up to 20 characters including letters A Z numbers 0 9 and blank spaces See Table 5 3 for the corresponding codes Note that only the first 12 characters appear on MLS model phones 5 130 Extension Name Display Table 5 3 Character Codes Letters Numbers A 21 N 62 blank 11 B 22 O 63 0 00 C 23 P 71 1 10 D 31 Q 72 2 20 E 32 R 73 3 30 F 33 S 74 4 40 G 41 T 81 5 50 H 42 U 82 6 60 43 V 83 7 70 J 51 W 91 8 80 K 52 X 92 9 90 L 53 Y 93 M 61 Z 94 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To assign a name to an extension 1 Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 12 press P
491. system display phones on all lines for which you subscribe to Caller ID service Caller ID information is the caller s telephone number or name if available When active on a call a user automatically receives Caller ID information for the duration of the call When an extension is idle a user receives Caller ID information for the call the user will be connected to when the handset is lifted This feature requires no special programming however you must subscribe to Caller ID service if it is available on a per line basis from your local telephone company and connect Caller ID lines to the appropriate system modules Related Features m Any users who have access to Caller ID line s will receive Caller ID information on their system display phones You can restrict users from viewing Caller ID information using the following procedures For ringing calls you can block Caller ID from displaying at specific extensions by restricting access to the Caller ID lines Use Line Access Restriction 302 to restrict access to lines Pooled Access Restriction 315 to restrict access to all lines within a specific pool or both procedures for pooled extensions that have pools and lines For active calls you can activate Privacy at your extension to prevent other users from joining your calls and from accessing the Caller ID information displayed at your extension For held calls use Exclusive Hold rather than Hold to prevent o
492. system in the following ways Single answering machine This basic setup can cover all the lines in the system Anyone on the system can call the machine to retrieve messages Multiple answering machines lf you get too many calls for one machine to cover connect two or more machines to cover all calls a Personal answering machine An answering machine can share an extension with a phone in order to answer calls to that extension gt NOTE If you have an answering machine and a system phone on the same extension the answering machine will be able to answer calls only when the phone is idle Single Answering Machine 4 4 The single answering machine setup Figure 4 1 serves the entire system The answering machine is connected to its own extension and can cover all the lines in the system or as many lines as you assign to it You can install the answering machine on an extension by itself or combine it with a system phone or a standard phone on the same extension see Combination Extensions in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide Answering Machines Telephone optional I Figure 4 1 Single Answering Machine To Use Go to the machine to manually play back messages From any system extension make an intercom call to the answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the
493. t a Ifthe name is not supplied either Priv or is displayed Related Features a The Caller ID Name Display feature affects whether the caller s name is displayed if available instead of the caller s number a Caller ID Inspect enables you to view Caller ID information for a second line while remaining active on the first call Refer to Caller ID for details on Caller ID information Considerations The Caller ID Type you set applies to the entire system Achange to the Caller ID Type setting takes effect when the next Caller ID call comes into the system Valid Entries 1 USAv 2 Singapore Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 83 Feature Reference SS r 5 84 To change the Caller ID Type setting 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H Q at extension 10 or 11 The system shows the current setting Press Next Data or Prev Data until the appropriate value displays or press to return to the default setting Select another procedure or exit programming mode Calling Group Extensions 502 Calling Group Extensions 502 Description This System Programming procedure identifies the extensions in a Calling Group a group of extensio
494. t les entreprises de t l communication ne permettent pas que l on raccorde leur mat riel des jacks d abonn sauf dans les cas pr cis pr vus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises Les r parations du mat riel homologu doivent tre effectu es par un centre d entretien canadien autoris d sign par le fournisseur La compagnie de t l communications peut demander a l utilisateur de d brancher un appareil a la suite de r parations ou de modifications effectu es par l utilisateur ou a cause d un mauvais fonctionnement Pour sa propre protection l utilisateur doit s assurer que tous les fils de mise a la terre de la source d nergie lectrique des lignes t l phoniques et des canalisations d eau m talliques s il y en a sont raccord s ensemble Cette pr caution est particuli rement importante dans les r gions rurales AY AVERTISSEMENT L utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui m me il doit avoir recours un service d inspection des installations lectriques ou a un lectricien selon le cas L indice de charge IC assign a chaque dispositif terminal indique pour viter toute surcharge le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut tre raccord e a un circuit t l phonique boucl utilis par ce dispositif La terminaison du circuit bouci peut tre constitu e de n importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l ensembl
495. t Option 3 to clear the alarm display see Clearing a Backup Failure Alarm jon page 6 3 1 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required 6 19 Troubleshooting Problems with Manual Backup Display Shows Insert Valid Card in System Programming Mode Possible Cause The system did not detect a valid Backup Restore PC Card when you tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming Manual 124 What to do Power down the system insert a valid Backup Restore PC Card in PC Card Slot 2 of the PARTNER ACS processor module and reapply power to the system Restart the procedure gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card that can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Display Shows Card is Write Protected in System Programming Mode Possible Cause You tried to do a manual backup using Backup Programming Manual 124 but the Backup Restore PC Card in the PC Card slot is write protected What to do Using the end of a paper clip or another pointed object gently push the write protect tab upward to the nonprotected position see Figure 6 2 and try the procedure again You do not need to remove the card from the processor to slide the write protect tab up t
496. t Technologies telephones that are specifically designed for use with PARTNER sys tems Models include the PARTNER 34D PARTNER 18D PARTNER 18 PARTNER 6 MLS 34D MLS 18D MLS 12D MLS 12 MLS 6 MLC 6 MDW 9000 MDW 9010 and MDW 9030P phones GL 10 Glossary System Programming Procedures that allow you to customize system settings for your business System Programming requires a system display phone and must be done from extension 10 or 11 System Restore See Resiore T Talk Back See Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back Telephone Programming Procedures that allow you to customize extensions to meet the needs of individual users including the assignment of features to programmable buttons Telephone Programming can be done either centrally or from the user s own extension See also Centralized Telephone Programming and U Unique Line Ringing Release 3 0 or later This feature allows a ringing pattern maximum of eight to be assigned on a per line basis for users to differentiate by sound which line is ringing V Verification of Account Codes See Forced Account Code Entry VMS Voice Messaging System See Voice Messaging System VMS VMS Hunt Group Hunt Group 7 reserved by the system to identify extensions that are associated with the voice messaging system hardware See also Group Call Distribution jana Voice Interrupt on Busy A special intercom call that lets a user interrupt and speak t
497. t before lifting the handset See System Password 403 jfor more information 2 After lifting the handset or while already active on an outside call press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on 3 Enter an account code using one of the following methods a Dial it manually using the phone s dialpad 5 8 Account Code Entry F12 5 6 a Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with the account code Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press to indicate the end of the code If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns off Make the call if you are not already on a call To change the account code repeat Steps 2 through 4 To enter or change a forced account code 1 6 7 From a system phone if a password is programmed for the system you must enter it before lifting the handset See System Password 403 for more information Lift the handset or press pk Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press If the Account Code Entry button has lights the green light turns on Enter an account code supplied by your System Manager using one of the following methods a Dial it manually using the phone s dialpad a Dial a System or Personal Speed Dial number programmed with
498. t day you must reschedule the call Wake up calls ring the target extension for approximately 30 seconds or six rings Wake up calls are not placed to extensions assigned as doorphones 1 Assigned to next available button at extension 10 2 Not Assigned v 3 Select button then press a programmable button to assign Wake Up Service to that button 5 295 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones Using 5 296 To program a Wake Up Service button at extension 10 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 2 At this point a lf you want to assign Wake Up Service to the first available button press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 1 Assigned Ext10 f you want to remove the Wake Up Service button assignment press until a display similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 2 Not Assigned f you want to assign Wake Up Service to a specific button press 3 Adisplay similar to the following appears Wake Up Service Button 3 Select a Button Then press a programmable button with lights to assign Wake Up Service to that button 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 4 Label the Wake Up Service button at extension 10 To schedule a wake u
499. t easy for users to handle calls flexibly and efficiently from both system and standard phones For more information about a specific feature refer to the feature name in Chapter 5 3 13 Learning About Telephones Basic Call Handling Features The following features are available from both system and standard phones a Making Calls a Answering Calls m m Par ransferring Calls E Ol SI fol f S o 1 S a onference Calls a Joining Calls Dial Code Features Dial code features are features that you access by dialing a feature code at the telephone dialpad From a system phone you can dial or intercom followed by the two or three digit code or press a programmed Auto Dial button from a standard phone you typically dial followed by the two or three digit code when you have intercom dial tone See Table 5 2 in Chapter 5 for a listing of dial code features 3 14 Using Auxiliary Equipment Overview There are many ways to set up auxiliary equipment the setup you choose depends upon your needs and the number of devices you have This chapter presents some common setups It does not cover how to physically connect the equipment or how to program the features See the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for installation instructions Chapter 5 for programming instructions and the equipment manufacturer s documentation for complete details on the device you connect
500. tage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop used by the device The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100 IC Certification No See the label on the side of the control unit CSA Certification No LR 60486 Load No 7 Renseignements sur la notification du minist re des Industrie Canada et la r paration L tiquette du Minist re des Industrie Canada identifie le mat riel homologu Cette tiquette certifie que le mat riel est conform a certaines normes de protection d exploitation et de s curit des r seaux de t l communications Le Minist re n assure toutefois pas que le mat riel fonctionnera a la satisfaction de l utilisateur Avant d installer ce mat riel l utilisateur doit s assurer qu il est permis de le raccorder aux installations de l entreprise locale de t l communication Le mat riel doit galement tre install en suivant une m thode accept e Dans certains cas les fils int rieurs de l enterprise utilis s pour un service individuel a ligne unique peuvent tre prolong s au moyen d un dispositif homologu de raccordement cordon prolongateur t l phonique interne Labonn ne doit pas oublier qu il est possible que la conformit aux conditions nonc es ci dessus n emp chent pas la d gradation du service dans certaines situations Actuellemen
501. tem features as described in Chapter 5 To erase the current programming from a button press the button then press Mic HFAN 4 To exit programming mode you can press or lift the handset off hook then place it back in the cradle 2 34 a Learning About Telephones This chapter explains how system and standard phones work with the system as well as combination extensions where more than one phone or standard device is installed In addition basic call handling features and dial code features are listed at the end of this chapter See the feature name in Chapter 5 for details about a specific feature System Telephones PARTNER model phones have several buttons and indicators in common The following pages explain where they are and how they work For information about an MLC 6 MLS model or TransTalk 9000 series phone refer to the documentation that came with the phone 3 1 Learning About Telephones Buttons and Indicators PARTNER 34D eraasi Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights oofoo oo oo oo oo Feature Line Programmable Buttons 32 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 7 390 oo oo oo oo oo oo Transfr Message L Message Light Pull Out Tray for Quick Reference Car
502. tem until the line number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 287 Feature Reference Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Description This feature is available only on system phones This System Programming procedure identifies extensions that can receive voice interrupt on busy calls A voice interrupt on busy call is a special intercom call that lets a user the originator interrupt and speak to another user the recipient who is busy on an intercom or outside call with one other party When voice interrupt on busy is initiated the recipient hears two beeps before hearing the originator s voice The originator and the recipient should be aware that the third party to whom the recipient is speaking probably will hear both the beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice This feature typically is used by the receptionist to alert the boss to an important incoming call or event when the boss is already on a call Related Features Considerations 5 288 Making Calls and Transferring Calls provide more instructions for making and transferring voice interrupt on busy calls The recipient can use a Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back button to respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The recipient s response will not be heard by the third party Users cannot receive voice interrupt on busy calls if Do Not Disturb is acti
503. tension a user can use Direct Line Pickup to access the line or dial the pool access code to access a line in the pool Emergency numbers Marked System Speed Dial numbers Allowed Phone numbers and numbers dialed using the System Password override all dialing restrictions if a user has access to an outside line or pool to place the call If Forced Account Code Entry is programmed for an extension the user must enter an account code before accessing an outside line or pool If there are entries in the Forced Account Code List the entered account code must match an entry on that list With Release 3 0 or later Forced Account Code extensions can dial numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List without entering an account code Users can make 911 calls from the Forced Account Code extensions without entering the account code as long as 911 has been entered into the Emergency Phone Number List Controlling Calls on Outside Lines When an extension is allowed access to an outside line or pool you can use the following procedures to control calling a Outgoing Call Restriction 401 defines the type of calls inside only local only or inside local and long distance that users can make from all lines or pools available at an extension Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 allows the receptionist at extension 10 to quickly change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting Disallowed Phone Number Lists 404 creates up
504. tension to be programmed For example to program extension 11 press The current display language displays To change the display language press until the appropriate value displays To change the display language for another extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 119 Feature Reference Distinctive Ring 308 Description This System Programming procedure determines whether calls should ring at a standard device using the system s distinctive ringing patterns different patterns for outside intercom and transferred calls or whether all calls to the standard device should ring like outside calls Considerations a Change the setting to Not Active if a standard device such as a modem or answering machine does not pick up intercom or transferred calls a f distinctive ring is set to Not Active for an extension where both a system phone and a standard device are installed the system phone continues to use the system s distinctive ringing patterns but all calls ring at the standard device using a single ring burst The system does not pass distinctive ringing patterns generated by a PBX or central office through to extensions regardless of the setting for this feature Valid Entries 1 Active outside intercom and transferred calls ring differently using the system s distinctive ringi
505. ter 4 provides information about using auto attendants with the system On system display phones Automated Attendant displays when a call is being transferred from an auto attendant Transfer from AA or Transfer from Auto Att displays when a call transferred by an auto attendant was not answered and is being returned to your extension 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3lon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 4 AA Automated Attendant Extensions 607 To identify an extension where an auto attendant is installed 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program H O at extension 10 or 11 Enter the extension number to which the auto attendant is connected For example to select extension 27 press D To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays To assign or unassign a second auto attendant extension press or until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode 5 5 Feature Reference Abbreviated Ringing 305 Description This feature applies only to system phones This System Programming procedure activates or deactivates Abbreviated Ringing at the system phone at a specific extension When a user is on a call and Abbreviated Ringing is Active
506. ter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 4 At this point you can do one of the following m Press o Press and the number of the originating extension m Press the number of the originating extension and the number of the destination extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To forward calls manually 1 Press o 2 Dial your extension number 3 Dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring 5 53 Feature Reference 5 54 To remove Call Forwarding manually 1 Press 2 Dial your extension number twice To forward calls using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial the extension number at which you want the calls to ring Call Forwarding is activated on a button with lights the green light is on To remove Call Forwarding using the programmed button 1 Press the programmed button If an originating extension and a destination extension were programmed on the button Call Forwarding is deacti
507. tercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Enter the access code for the feature if required To return to your original call press the switchhook or press the Recall or Flash button on a feature phone again 5 225 Feature Reference Recall Timer Duration 107 Description This System Programming procedure lets you change the length of the timed signal or switchhook flash generated by the system Recall feature as well as by the Recall option used in Auto Dial and Speed Dial numbers Recall sends this timed signal over the phone line to the local telephone company or PBX to which the system is connected Typically you use the Recall feature to access a PBX central office or Centrex feature such as Call Waiting Your local phone company can tell you the correct setting for most Centrex systems the correct setting is 800 msec or 32 Considerations You should change the factory setting only under two conditions f using the system Recall feature has no effect lengthen the time lf the system is connected to a PBX or Centrex system and Recall drops calls shorten the time Valid Entries 01 through 80 25 to 2000 msec in 25 msec increments 18 450 msec v Programming 5 226 See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To change the duration of the Recall Timer signal 1 Press feature
508. th this feature A Last Number Redial number can begin with a star code the system automatically inserts a delay based on the Star Code Dial Delay 410 setting A number dialed automatically using the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature can be redialed with this feature This feature interrupts Call Screening F25 This feature redials all digits dialed on the last outside call except account codes You can program a Last Number Redial button on a system phone to redial a number with one touch See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Last Number Redial button 1 ao fF oO DN Press Feature 0 System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode 5 167 Feature Reference Using 5 168 System Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 If you want lift the handset 2 Press the programmed button or press Digits are displayed on system display phones as they are dialed Standard Phone To use Last Number Redial 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press CO Line Access Mode 313 Release 2 0 or Later Line Access Mode 313 Release 2
509. than standard phones Therefore it is strongly recommended that you install system phones where restricting phone use is important Locking an Extension The system offers a Station Lock feature that lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extensions This helps prevent other users from making outside calls at those extensions or from screening calls Restricting Access to Outside Lines or Pools A user can access a line or pool either by lifting the handset pressing the line or pool button on the phone or dialing the Direct Line Pickup feature code or a pool access code If you do not want a user to access a specific outside line or pool you can use Line Access Restriction 302 or Pool Access Restriction 315 to control an extension s access to a certain line or pool whether the line or pool is assigned to the extension or not Table 2 1 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s access to specific outside lines or pools gt NOTE If Forced Account Code Entry 307 is programmed for an extension that extension is required to enter an account code before dialing an outside number even those on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 on all of the lines or pools assigned to that extension If the Forced Account Code List 409 contains entries the system checks the account code against the list If the account code is on the list line or pool access is all
510. the account code Press an Auto Dial button programmed with the account code Press an idle line or pool button f a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is valid or if the Forced Account Code List is empty you hear outside dial tone Go to Step 6 a f a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is not valid you are denied access to the outside line Verify the account code with your System Manager then repeat this procedure starting from Step 1 Make the telephone call To change the account code while on a call a Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press b Enter a different account code c Press the programmed Account Code Entry button or press If a Forced Account Code List exists and the account code is invalid you hear a denial tone Verify the account code then repeat Step 7 making sure to enter a valid account code 5 9 Feature Reference Allowed List Assignments 408 Description This System Programming procedure lets you assign up to eight Allowed Phone Number Lists to a specific extension Related Features You must use Allowed Phone Number Lists 407 to create the lists of allowed telephone numbers before you use this procedure Valid Entries 1 Assigned to extension 2 Not Assigned to extension v Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on
511. the first slot is used and the second is ignored 5 44 Additional PARTNER Remote PC Software required Backup Programming Manual 124 Programming The same Backup Restore PC Card can be used for both automatic and manual backups since the data is recorded in two separate files An automatic backup replaces the AUTO mmddyy file only where mmddyy represents the date of the backup in month day year format anda manual backup replaces the MAN mmadryy file only Restore Programming 125 asks you to specify which backup file you want to use Calls will continue to be handled normally during a manual backup See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To begin a manual backup of system settings 1 Verify that only one Backup Restore Card is in the processor module 2 Press Feature O O System Program System Program O at extension 10 or 11 If there is a problem one of the following messages is displayed Card is Write Protected Insert Valid Card See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for explanations and corrective actions Otherwise the display instructs you to press Enter to begin the backup Press Gnier A status message is displayed indicating that a backup is in progress and within 30 seconds a message displays indicating the result If the backup was successful the
512. the greeting played and the caller waited for someone to answer the call The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed If the PC Card has not been installed see the PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions You should record a message before using Direct Extension Dial since there is no default message You can record only one message for this feature If you do not record a message for Direct Extension Dial callers will not know to enter an extension Hunt Group or Calling Group number when the call is answered You must record the Direct Extension Dial message from the system display phone at extension 10 You cannot record or play a message while Direct Extension Dial or Automatic System Answer is answering a call When you want to record or play a message turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by the system to be completed Direct Extension Dial Record Playback 1892 Release 2 0 or Later Using See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To record a Direct Extension Dial message 1 Turn off Direct Extension Dial and Automatic System Answer at extension 10 and wait for any calls in the process of being answered by these features to be completed Lift the handset of the system displ
513. the new number after selecting the three digit code a To remove a System Speed Dial number enter the number s three digit code and press Wic HFA once 5 Press to exit programming mode Using System Phone You can lift the handset or press before dialing Tk If you want to call on a specific line press the line button or press and the two digit line number If you want to call on a line in a specific pool at a pooled extension press the pool button or press and dial the three digit pool access code 880 881 882 or 883 2 Press eature 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 If you did not specify an outside line or pool the system automatically selects one turns on the speaker if the handset is in the cradle and dials the number The number being dialed shows on a display phone unless it is a Marked System Speed Dial Number Standard Phone qT Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial the three digit System Speed Dial code 600 699 The system automatically selects an outside line and dials the number 5 267 Feature Reference System Time 103 Description This System Programming procedure sets the time that appears on system display phones Related Features Considerations Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 268
514. ther users from picking up your held call and from accessing the Caller ID information associated with the held call a There are two ways to inspect Caller ID lines Ifyou are active on a call you automatically get Caller ID information for that call However If you want to view Caller ID information for a second call without ending the active call or putting it on hold use Caller ID Inspect Ifyou are not active on a call you can press line buttons to view Caller ID information for those lines however keep in mind that if you pick up the handset you will join or answer the call shown on the display n some regions users will have the option to subscribe to the name service for Caller ID This service allows the user to have a name and or number associated with Caller ID information If you want access to the 5 63 Feature Reference Considerations 5 64 name you can program Caller ID Name Display onto a button with lights This allows users to toggle between the Name and Number for an incoming call Caller ID information does not display for extensions active on Conference Calls If users receive a call routed to their extension by Direct Extension Dial a voice messaging system or automated attendant the Caller ID information is passed to their extension when they answer the call If users Transfer a call the Caller ID information is passed to the destination extension If users send calls for Cal
515. ther extensions you can use Copy Settings 399 If a line is set to No Ring Call Screening F25 cannot be used Users automatically receive Caller ID information for calls that audibly alert at the extension For lines or pools set to Immediate Ring Caller ID information is displayed after the first ring For lines or pools set to Delayed Ring Caller ID information is displayed as soon as the call begins audibly alerting For lines or pools set to No Ring no Caller ID information is displayed If the phone is idle users can press the line button to see the Caller ID information If the phone is in use users can press a button programmed with Caller ID Inspect to see the information Program this feature from extension 10 or 11 only using Centralized Telephone Programming Individual users cannot program this feature System phone users see the light patterns for the lines assigned to their extensions even if Line Ringing is set to Delayed Ring or No Ring Light patterns do not appear for incoming calls on pool buttons that are set to No Ring If a line at an extension is set to No Ring a user at that extension has to manually select the line to answer a call 5 179 Feature Reference Valid Entries Immediate Ring v Lines Delayed Ring No Ring v Pools Examples Programming Receptionist Call Routing If you want calls to be answered by the receptionist first set the lines at the receptionists
516. tically so you can speak to the caller You cannot put a joined call on hold 5 165 Feature Reference You can tell when someone has joined a call of yours when the lights next to the line or pool button change to alternately flashing red and green If asystem phone joins a call on a standard phone there is a momentary break in the call on the standard phone How to Join a Call 5 166 System Phone A steady red light next to a line button indicates a call is in progress at another extension To join a call Press the line button next to the steady red light and lift the handset or m Lift the handset and press 6 8 and the two digit line number The red and green lights alternately flash You are now joined with the call Standard Phone 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Dial and the number of the line on which the call is being conducted Last Number Redial F05 Last Number Redial F05 Description This feature redials the last outside number dialed maximum 28 digits It is useful for immediately redialing a busy number Related Features Considerations Programming You can use Save Number Redial F04 to temporarily save the last number dialed The difference between Last Number Redial and Save Number Redial is that Save Number Redial allows you to make other outside calls before redialing the saved number System Speed Dial Numbers cannot be redialed wi
517. tings use Pool Line Assignment 207 and Pool Extension Assignment 314 In Key mode do not use this procedure if you add lines to the system after initial setup because it changes Line Assignment 301 Line Access Restriction 302 Automatic Line Selection and Line Ringing for existing lines back to factory settings To change line assignments without affecting other settings use Line Assignment 301 Considerations 5 202 You can use this feature to tell the system how many lines are actually connected at the control unit For example if some line jacks do not have lines connected use this procedure to indicate the number of jacks that actually have lines connected otherwise the line numbers associated with empty jacks would be assigned to phones as though there were actually lines connected You can use this procedure to limit the number of lines that are automatically assigned to all extensions For example if there are ten lines connected to the control unit you can use this procedure to set the number of lines to eight so that only the first eight lines are assigned to all system extensions You can then use Line Assignment 301 to assign lines 9 and 10 to specific extensions Number of Lines 104 Valid Entries 3 lines for the PARTNER ACS processor module and 308EC module plus 2 lines per 206 or 200 module plus 4 lines per 400 module v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location
518. tline PTI arrange for a replacement a Ifthe replacement phone does not ring properly call the hotline seepage 6 1 System Phone Does Not Work Possible Cause 1 Telephone cord is plugged into wrong jack on bottom of system phone What to do Plug the modular telephone cord into the correct jack see PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for instructions m f the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Phone needs to be reset What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone With the handset hung up plug the cord in again m f the phone works properly the problem is solved m Ifthe problem remains go to Possible Cause 3 Possible Cause 3 The telephone is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the problem phone Then plug the cord into a phone that you know works If the replacement phone works the problem phone is faulty Call the hotline coe cie arrange for a replacement f the replacement phone does not work go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 The telephone cord is defective What to do Unplug the cord from the base of the phone and the wall jack Replace the cord with a cord that you know works m If the phone works the cord is faulty Call the hotline see page 6 1 to arrange for a replacement lf the phone does not work and it is part of a combination extension see
519. tlines Do not assign an external hotline to extension 10 11 or to the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules which are reserved as power failure extensions Any extensions except for 10 11 or the first two extensions of any 206 or 308EC modules 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To identify an external hotline extension 1 5 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 at extension 10 or 11 At the Extension prompt enter the external hotline extension number see Valid Entries above For example to program extension 30 as the external hotline press To assign or unassign the extension press until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev item until the extension number shows on the display Repeat Step 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode To program the external hotline phone number as Personal Speed Dial code 80 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program Dial the extension number of the external hotline 2 3 Press 4 5 Enter the external hotline phone number exactly as you would dial it Continue programming or exit programming mode 5 133 Feature Refere
520. to 3 000 feet 915 meters for standard devices and 1 000 feet 305 meters for system phones IROBs must be installed by a qualified technician Off Premises Range Extender OPRE allows you to connect a standard touch tone phone beyond 3 000 feet 915 meters in another building on the same continuous property It also allows you to use a special circuit from your local phone company to provide off premises station capability a Electromagnetic Interference EMI filters allow you to block noise generated by a nearby radio station as well as most electrical devices a Caller ID devices allow you to store and process Caller ID information Although the system provides functionally integrated multi line Caller ID on system display phones you can connect other devices provided you subscribe to the service from your local phone company and connect the device directly to the Caller ID line You cannot install a Caller ID device directly to a PARTNER extension jack or to a combination extension jack Refer to Caller ID Devices in the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide for installation details a PCMCIA cards allow you to administer your system from your PC either remotely or locally Release 3 0 or later gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card
521. to Dial and Personal Speed Dial numbers can be programmed Personal Speed Dial Numbers Valid Entries Any phone number up to 28 characters consisting of the digits 0 9 and special dialing functions that you can access by pressing Pause Mic HFAl Stop Recall and Touch Tone Enable assigned to codes 80 through 99 No number assigned to any code v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program Personal Speed Dial numbers 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 2 Dial the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Select a two digit code by pressing and dialing two digits between 80 and 99 For example to select code 81 press If a number is assigned already to the code the number appears on the display If no number is assigned to the code the display reads Blank 4 Enter the phone number exactly as you would dial it 5 At this point To program another Personal Speed Dial number start from Step 3 To program over an existing number enter the new number after selecting the two digit code To remove a Personal Speed Dial number enter the number s two digit code and press Wic HFA once 6 Continue programming or exit programming mode Using System Phone You can
522. to eight lists of numbers that cannot be dialed After creating Disallowed Phone Number Lists use Disallowed List Assignments 405 to assign one or more lists to a specific extension 2 14 System Programming Options a Night Service with System Password 403 restricts users at extensions in the Night Service group from dialing outside phone numbers except Emergency numbers and Marked System Speed Dial Numbers unless the password is entered first Table 2 2 provides examples of settings that can be used to restrict an extension s dialing once it gets an outside line or pool Table 2 2 Settings that Restrict an Extension s Dialing Once It Gets an Outside Line or Pool Type of Setting for Line Setting for Line Setting for Restrictionsor Assignment Access Restriction Outgoing Setting for Permissions 301 or Pool 302 or Pool Call Disallowed for the Extension Access Restriction Restriction Phone Number Extension Assignment 314 315 401 Lists 404 Can place Outside line or No restriction Local only Any local intercom and pool may be numbers the local calls assigned extension only and can should not dial answer any call Can place Outside line or No restriction No Any local and intercom pool may be restriction long distance local and assigned numbers the long distance extension calls and can should not dial answer any call
523. to the stand alone PARTNER ACS processor module or to the carrier and the modules it contains since this is the heart of the system Figure 1 1 shows an example of system components Ay WARNING There are no customer serviceable components inside the system modules or carrier There are hazardous voltages within that can cause severe or fatal personal injury DO NOT OPEN THE MODULES System Components CONTROL UNIT Optional Carriers Optional Devices for the control unit 5 Slot 2 Slot Carrier Carrier PARTNER ACS Processor Module Grounding Screw Serial Printer Contact Closure Jack SMDR Jack PC Card Slots 2 L Power LED Paging System PAGE Jack MAIL VS Voice Messaging Outside Line Jacks 3 d System MUSIC ON HOLD Jack y i for RCA phono plug me Bai A 1 0 Extension Jacks 8 Call Accounting Terminal Basic or Plus S SZ d lt Contact Closure Adjunct Magic on Hold deck PC Cards Backup Restore ASA DXD R1 0 or later Software upgrade R2 0 or later PARTNER Voice Messaging Battery Compartment SYSTEM PHONES Optional Modules PARTNER 34D Phone with optional PARTNER CA48 Intercom Autodialer Optional Devices for extension jacks
524. tor s voice be aware that the third party to whom you are speaking probably also will hear the two beeps and the faint sound of the originator s voice 1 Ask the party with whom you are speaking to hold but do not put the call on hold 2 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns on Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is activated 3 Respond to the originator of the voice interrupt on busy call The third party with whom you were originally speaking does not hear your response but you can hear that third party 5 15 Feature Reference 5 16 4 Press the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button again whether or not the originator has hung up to resume the conversation with the third party The green light next to the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button turns off Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back is deactivated The originator hears two beeps if he or she did not hang up previously To answer a coverage call 1 If your phone is a covering extension and it rings check your display to see if the ringing call is a coverage call Also if you have an Auto Dial button for the originating extension the green light next to the button flutters while the coverage call is ringing at your extension and it is the next ringing call you will answer if you lift the handset 2 Lift the handset You are connected to the coverage call
525. ture lets users enter a four digit code on their telephone dialpad to lock their extension Later the user enters the identical code to unlock the extension Station Lock helps to prevent unauthorized people from making outside calls from these extensions You should recommend that users lock their extensions whenever they leave their desks for extended periods of time Related Features Considerations Programming All outside numbers except Marked System Speed Dial Numbers and numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 406 are restricted from locked extensions If a user forgets the code use Station Unlock to unlock the extension Do not lock External Hotline extensions Station Lock returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used You cannot use the Caller ID Call Logging and Dialing feature when your extension is locked For security purposes use this feature to prevent misuse of Call Screening F25 You can program a Station Lock button on a system phone A button with lights is recommended so the user can quickly determine whether or not the extension is locked Users can enter a different code each time they lock their extension A user at a locked extension can make intercom calls and can receive intercom and outside calls See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system p
526. ture that you use while ona call for which the feature access code is 32 This example includes a Recall signal to send a switchhook flash to the Centrex system when you are already on a call You can store a Recall signal by pressing Sekr but only if it is the first character stored It also includes a 1 5 second pause which you insert by pressing o d to allow time to get a new Centrex dial tone Spkr Hold Stop Your local bank by phone service requires that you enter a password before the account number To program a Personal Speed Dial number or an Auto Dial button to call the bank at 555 7898 include a stop for manually entering the password and continue with the account number 679 88 enter OD OOO OWcthrA 00000 Touch Tone Enable Your system is connected to rotary lines but you want to call an answering machine at 555 3454 to retrieve messages Since the machine requires touch tones enter Transir All digits pressed during the rest of the call are sent as touch tones On Off Centrex Feature Button To include both the activation and deactivation codes for a Centrex feature on the same button press Wic HFAN to include a stop between the two codes For instance if the code to activate a Centrex feature is 30 and the code to deactivate the feature is 31 store O Mora W O on the Auto Dial button The first time you press the Auto Dial button only the
527. ual users needs Individual telephones can be programmed either from extension 10 or 11 Centralized Telephone Programming or from a user s extension using a system phone Extension Programming A system display phone is required for System and Centralized Telephone Programming If you have any 34 button phones in the system you must use a 34 button display phone to program since an 18 button phone cannot be used to program a 34 button phone Also if your system has both PARTNER model and MLS model phones it is recommended that you use a PARTNER model display phone at the programming extension The system permits programming from a remote location using a Remote Administration Unit see on page 2 25 2 1 Programming gt NOTE ACS Release 3 0 includes a PARTNER Remote Access PC Card which allows the user to administer the system remotely and perform backup and restore functions The PARTNER Remote Access PC Card is a PCMCIA card which can also be used to upgrade previous versions of PARTNER ACS to Release 3 0 Av WARNING Remove all other PC Cards from the processor before initiating an upgrade This chapter provides general information about programming procedures When a specific feature name is used it is printed in bold type For detailed descriptions and step by step instructions refer to that name in Chapter 5 A Programming Quick Reference is provided at the end of this book Hardware Considerations
528. uch the lights next to the button also show calling activity for the extension See a so Manual Signaling Intercom Call A call that is made to another system extension Internal Call See Intercom Call K Key Extension An extension that has line buttons but not pool buttons See also Key Mode anoa Pooled Extension Key Mode An operating mode in which outside lines are assigned one per line button To access outside lines users press line buttons or enter a Direct Line Pickup code See also Hybrid Mode ana System L Line The transmission path between your control unit and the local phone company s Central Office used for incoming and outgoing calls Line Button A button with status lights on a system phone that represents a specific line for making calls See also Key Extension andjPooled Extension GL 6 Glossary Line Hunting See Group Call Distribution Line Jack The location on a PARTNER ACS processor module and 206 and 400 modules that allows you to connect outside lines to the control unit Line Number The number assigned to each line jack on a PARTNER ACS processor module 308EC module a 206 module or a 400 module Line Pooling See Poo Line Reserve A system feature that lets you reserve a busy line or pool by pressing the busy line or pool button without lifting the handset so your phone beeps when the line or pool becomes free Loudspeaker Paging System Equipment that lets you ma
529. udes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Line Extension module 308E Includes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions Line Extension module 400 200E Includes module two 7 ft line cords and installation instructions 2 Slot Carrier 5 Slot Carrier Cover for 5 slot carrier AC Power Cord Line Cord D2R Connects 206E and 400E modules to network interface clear color Specify length 7 standard length 14 or 25 ft 267F2 bridging adapter Connects two devices to one extension In Range Out of Building IROB protector Required when installing extensions in another building from the control unit two required per PARTNER model telephone one per standard phone or device Lucent Technologies 146G Surge Protector SCL 8 Required when installing a Contact Closure controlled device outside the building to protect the control unit from electrical surges Z300A Electromagnetic Interference EMI Filter Includes filter 7 ft cord and installation instructions 267C line adapter Splits two outside lines from an RJ14 network interface jack so that each line has its own modular plug do not use at extension jacks 355A 355AF adapter Connects call reporting device to primary processor module 1 To locate the nearest Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer check your local telephone directory s Yellow Pages
530. uld take up to eight seconds after a call is answered before the system determines that the incoming call is a fax call The ASA DXD PVM PMVS or PARTNER MAIL message should be at least this long so that the CNG tone can be detected before the message ends and the call can be transferred Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H at extension 10 or 11 2 At the Hunt Group prompt enter 8 3 At the Extension prompt enter the desired extension number For example to select extension 10 press To assign or remove an extension from Hunt Group 8 press or until the appropriate value displays To program another extension press Next item or Prev Item until the extension number shows on the display Then repeat step 4 Program another extension or exit programming mode Fax Machine Extensions 601 Fax Machine Extensions 601 Description This System Programming procedure identifies extensions to which fax machines are connected Related Features Considerations Valid Entries If you want to monitor fax machine status and make one touch transfers to the fax machine see Auto Dialing jon page 5 17 to program a Fax Management button and Using the Fax Management Feature jon page 4 16 to use the button To prevent other extensions from interrupting a fax call program the fax extension for Automatic Extension Privacy 304 Remove voice
531. ultiple Answering Machines To Use Go to the machines to manually play back messages From any system extension make an intercom call to an answering machine extension When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code From outside the system call in on any line assigned to the machine When the machine answers dial its message retrieval code Note however when calling from outside you can retrieve messages only from the first machine that answers To Program 1 If your system is configured for Hybrid mode use Line Access Mode 313 to change extensions X and Y from Pooled to Key Use Line Assignment 301 to assign all the lines to extensions X and Y that you want the machines to cover 3 For extensions X and Y set Line Ringing for all lines to Immediate Ring 4 Make sure extensions X and Y are not assigned as Call Waiting 316 extensions Pickup Group Extensions 501 Calling Group Extensions 502 Night Service Group Extensions 504 or Hunt Group Extensions 505 Answering Machines 5 Adjust both answering machines to answer on a different number of rings so they do not both try to pick up the same call For example set answering machine 1 to 4 rings and answering machine 2 to 6 rings If you cannot adjust the two answering machines to answer on a different number of rings assign some lines to Immediate Ring at extension X and other lines to Immediate Ring at extension Y
532. unction in Transfer Button 5 275 Transfer Return Display Message 5 276 sid Transfer Return Extension 306 Transfer Return Rings 105 273 Transfer Ringing 3 6 3 9 5 276 SS O Transfer One touch Transfer One touch se I Transferring a Call to a calling group 5 Win 7 Unique Line Ringing azoa 5 eo Usage Reports 5 V VMS seq Voice Messaging Systems VMS Cover description 5 177 5 280 aa 5 282 5 283 light patterns 3 5 VMS Cover Rings 117 VMS Cover Rings 321 VMS Hunt Delay 506 Index Voice Interrupt on Busy Call description 5 288 responding to a 5 290 Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk Back overview 4 28 Cs sending calls 5 239 summary of procedures Voice messaging systems reference materials B 5 Cd Voice signaling 3 6 3 7 5 145 5 149 Volume Controls Ww Wake Up Service Button 115 5 294 Warranty information Wildcard Character 5 11 5 114 5 140 Z Z300A see Electromagnetic Interference Filter IN 9 Centralized Telephone Programming Quick Reference Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10 or 11 TO ENTER PROGRAMMING MODE TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO PRESS Feature 0 fa AT THE SAME EXTENSION DIAL BUTTON After you program one feature continue with PRESS the programmed button PRESS system Program system Program Central Tel Prog
533. unt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to a Hunt Group Set Transfer Return Rings 105 to four or greater to ensure that calls continue hunting to other group extensions if the call is not answered Use Do Not Disturb if you are assigned to a Hunt Group and you leave your desk so that a call to your extension moves directly to the next available extension in the group You can use Group Call Distribution 206 to assign outside lines to a Hunt Group Doing so allows outside calls on those lines to route directly into that Hunt Group instead of being transferred by the receptionist Hunt Group calls are not eligible for Call Coverage or VMS Cover When using PARTNER MAIL Release 3 or later a call to a busy Hunt Group can be sent to a Hunt Group mailbox Considerations Extensions can be in more than one Hunt Group Outside calls can be answered and transferred to a Hunt Group The voice messaging system and the auto attendant also can transfer calls to a Hunt Group Calls cannot be transferred to a Hunt Group if all extensions in that group are busy 5 149 Feature Reference Examples If only one extension in a Hunt Group is available and that extension does not answer an incoming call the call returns to the extension that transferred the call or to that extension s transfer return extension after the programmed amount of transfer return rings You can program a Group Hunting button on a
534. unt Groups Doing so allows outside calls to ring directly into a Hunt Group instead of being answered and transferred by the receptionist You can assign lines to Hunt Groups 1 7 Hunt Group 7 is used exclusively for the voice messaging system and Hunt Group 8 is used for fax transfer and detection Related Features Considerations E E You must use Hunt Group Extensions 505 to assign extensions to Hunt Groups If you assign lines to Hunt Group 7 for the voice messaging system s Automated Attendant Service you may want to adjust when the lines should ring in the group See VMS Hunt Delay 506 and VMS Hunt Schedule 507 for more information If you are using a voice messaging system you have two Group Call Distribution options lf you want Automated Attendant Service for some or all lines Assign setting 1 those lines to Hunt Group 7 If you want calls to route directly to the voice mailbox of a specific user after four rings choose VMS Line Cover setting 3 for those lines and assign a line owner in the voice messaging system For more information about voice messaging system options refer to the documentation shipped with the voice messaging system As an alternative to the VMS Line Cover setting you can use Line Coverage Extension 208 with VMS Cover This provides more flexibility because it lets you specify the number of times calls ring using VMS Cover Rings 117 or 321 at the user s exte
535. up Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 To monitor the fax machine use Fax Machine Extensions 601 to identify extension X as a fax extension and program a Fax Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button If you do not use your fax machine enough to justify paying for its own outside line you can put the machine on its own extension With this setup you must transfer calls to it manually If you have programmed a Fax Management button you can transfer a call to the fax machine with a single touch as well as monitor the status of the fax machine eaea ite Fax Management Feature on page 4 16 Figure 4 9 shows the setup A CONTROL UNIT Figure 4 9 Fax Line Saver Setup Fax Machines To Use When a person answers a call and hears a fax machine signaling on the other end the person can transfer the call to extension X the fax machine extension To send a fax transmission simply lift the handset on the fax machine an outside line will be automatically selected To Program 1 If extension X is the key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign all lines to extension X If extension X is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the fax machine to use to extension X Also use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines y
536. ures a Training Co Workers Chapter 3 explains how system and standard phones work with the system To help train co workers on telephone basics you can share this information with them About This Guide a Using Auxiliary Equipment The system supports a wide variety of auxiliary equipment including fax machines modems voice messaging systems and call reporting devices Chapter 4 provides advice on setting up these devices to work effectively with the system a Daily Operation Depending on how your system is set up you may need to oversee some of the system s daily operations For example you may need to turn on Night Service at the end of each day before leaving the office Reference information about all features including descriptions and instructions for using each feature is provided in Chapter 5 Solving Problems Chapter 6 provides information about solving problems if your system or telephones malfunction Once you are experienced with the system use the Table of Contentsjor to locate the information you need Throughout this guide feature names are printed in bold for example System Date 101 Chapter 5 Feature Reference provides comprehensive information about each feature with the features arranged in alphabetical order For example if you see a reference to System Date 101 you can look it up in Chapter 5 for details Product Safety Statements Product safety statements are identi
537. urn the light off You can program a Message Light On button on a system phone to turn the message light on at a specific extension with one touch See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Message Light On button 1 2 3 5 192 Press Feature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button Message Light On FO9XX Using Press Optionally dial the two digit extension number of your most common destination or skip to Step 6 if you want only the feature code on the button Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode System Phone To turn on the message light 1 Press the programmed button or press If you programmed the destination extension number on the button the message light for the destination extension goes on Skip Step 2 If no extension number was programmed on the button dial the extension number of the phone whose message light you want to turn on or use an Auto Dial button or Manual Signaling button Standard Phone To turn on the message light 1 Lift the handset You hear the intercom dial tone 2 Press o0 3 Dial the extension number of the phone whose message li
538. us answering machine m System phone plus fax machine m System phone plus headset m System phone plus an external alert such as a bell or chime The telephones in a combination extension share a single extension in the same way several home telephones share a single line A system telephone works as it always does and a standard telephone works as it always does when connected to the system Only one phone or device can be used at a time unless you want to join the two on a single call the same way two people can pick up the same call on different telephones at home For example Both phones share the same extension number Both phones share the same voice path that is when either phone is busy the extension is busy a Calls ring at both phones Using Telephones A second call can ring at the system phone while the standard phone is busy but do not use the system phone to answer the second call until the standard phone is idle or the first call will be disconnected If you make a voice signaled intercom call to a combination extension with a system phone only the system phone signals Call Waiting 316 does not work on a standard phone in combination with a system phone The lights on the system phone show what the standard telephone is doing as well as what the system phone is doing For an explanation of light patterns see Lights on page 3 4 f Privacy is active at a combination extensi
539. use Line Assignment 301 to assign any individual lines you want the modem to use to extension X 2 If the modem will only dial outside the system set Automatic Line Selection for extension X to select outside lines first If you also use the modem for calls within the system set Automatic Line Selection to select intercom first and include a 9 or a pool access code and a couple of pauses in the modem s dialing sequence for outside calls 3 Set Line Ringing for all lines and pools assigned to extension X to No Ring 4 Set Automatic Extension Privacy 304 for extension X to Assigned 5 Make sure extension Y is not assigned as a Call Waiting 316 extension Pickup Group Extension 501 Calling Group Extension 502 Night Service Group Extension 504 or Hunt Group Extension 505 6 Set the auto answer feature of the modem to Off Modems Send and Receive Modem If you need to place and receive calls with the modem use the setup shown in Figure 4 12 This setup makes line A the primary modem line but keeps the line available for users at other extensions when all other lines are busy Figure 4 12 Send and Receive Modem To Use Calls on the modem line line A ring only at extension X Also line A is the ast line selected by other extensions so the modem line is unavailable for the modem only when all other lines in the system are being used To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use
540. user s response cannot be heard by the third party in this case 3 7 Learning About Telephones Speakerphone Performance Tips The speaker on your system phone has a sensitive sound activated switch Room acoustics and background noise can affect the proper operation of the speakerphone To ensure that your speakerphone works effectively follow these guidelines a Avoid placing your phone in areas with high background noise caused by sources such as motor vehicles manufacturing equipment loud voices radios printers copiers typewriters other noisy office equipment and heater and air conditioning fans a Avoid talking before the other person is finished speaking When you both talk at the same time only one person s voice comes through Do not use your speaker to make announcements over a loudspeaker paging system connected to your phone system a When talking always face your phone and stay within two feet of it a Place your phone at least six inches 15 cm away from the edge of your desk a If you have difficulty hearing the other party try increasing the speaker volume If you have background noise try turning off the microphone when the party at the other end is speaking and turning it on when you speak If the difficulty persists lift your handset to continue the conversation m In conference rooms a separate speakerphone such as the SoundStation from Lucent Technologies is recommended since the bu
541. usy on another call You can use a Manual Signaling button to beep ring or voice signal the user at the target extension Related Features Considerations 5 188 Voice Interrupt on Busy 312 is an alternative feature that lets a user signal then speak to a user who is active on a call You can use the Manual Signaling button instead of dialing the two digit extension number required for these features Call Coverage Call Forwarding Call Follow Me Message Light On Message Light Off Station Lock and Voice Mailbox Transfer To transfer a call to an extension for which you have a Manual Signaling button press before pressing the Manual Signaling button See Transferring Calls A PARTNER or MLS model phone is required at both extensions to use this feature You must program the Manual Signaling feature code and the target extension number on a button Use a button with lights if you want to view the status of the target extension similar to an Auto Dial button You can have only one button per extension either on the system phone or on the Intercom Autodialer for a target extension The button can be programmed as a Manual Signaling button or as an Auto Dial button The lights next to the button show calling activity see Lights on page 3 4 for more information If you signal an extension that has an Auto Dial or Manual Signaling button programmed for your extension the green light next to that button flutter
542. utside line button You can program Call Coverage on a button on a system phone Use a button with lights if you want a visual indication when your calls are being covered When the green light is on your calls are being covered when the green light is off Call Coverage is not active If the Call Coverage feature code and optional originating and covering extensions are programmed on a button with lights you can use the button to turn Call Coverage on and off with one touch The lights show when Call Coverage is on even if calls are covered by a different extension than the one stored on the button and you can still use the button to turn Call Coverage off See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a Call Coverage button 1 Press eature O System Program System Program Central Tel Program 2 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature 3 Press a programmable button preferably a button with lights 4 At this point you can do one of the following m Press m Press Feature 2 and the number of the originating extension m Press Feature 2 the number of the originating extension and the number of the covering extension 5 Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Using System Phone To send calls for coverage manually 1 2 3
543. utton that number is stored in the feature phone This is different from storing a number on a system phone s Auto Dial button When you program a button on a system phone the number is actually stored in the control unit Similarly when you press a hold button on a feature phone the call is held at the phone itself Callers will not hear the system s Music on Hold Other phones in the system cannot see that the call is on hold it appears as a busy line If you want to program an outside number on a feature phone s auto dial button you must add a 9 and one or more pauses if available before each outside number The 9 gets an outside line and each pause allows a few seconds to get an outside dial tone Note that the feature phone s last number redial button may not work for an outside call To redial the last number use the system s Last Number Redial feature by pressing Combination Extensions 3 12 A combination extension is an extension with two devices connected to it either two standard devices or a system phone and a standard device but not two system phones For instructions on how to install a combination extension see the PARTNER Advanced Communications System Installation guide The following are examples of useful combination extensions a System phone plus standard telephone for power failure backup on extensions 10 11 and the first extensions of any 206 or 308EC Module m System phone pl
544. utton labeled Recall or Flash use the button instead of pressing the switchhook If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines your PBX or Centrex documentation may tell you to press the switchhook to access PBX or Centrex features Use the Recall feature instead see Recall F03 Limitations 3 10 Each standard device requires one touch tone receiver to be available in order to dial a call intercom or outside or to activate a feature using a code Each PARTNER ACS processor module has two touch tone receivers each 206 module has one touch tone receiver each 400 module has two touch tone receivers The combination of modules in your system determines the number of standard devices that can dial simultaneously For example if you have one PARTNER ACS processor module two 206 modules and two 400 modules eight standard devices can dial out at the same time If nine standard devices try to dial out simultaneously the ninth device will not get dial tone until one of the other eight finishes dialing PARTNER MAIL VS contains its own touch tone receivers and does not require any from the system Also because standard phones do not have system line or pool buttons feature buttons or dedicated function buttons basic call handling procedures are sometimes different from those for system telephones In addition the following actions cannot be performed at a standard telephone You cannot enter programming mode Sta
545. vacy is Assigned at an extension the green light is lit automatically after programming the Privacy button to indicate that Privacy is currently active If this is the case and the Privacy button is pressed the feature is deactivated To activate Privacy again you must press the button This feature applies only to active calls Any user can retrieve a held call unless Exclusive Hold is used Automatic Extension Privacy must be turned off to use Call Screening F25 for other users to join onto a call If a user bridges onto the call a forward disconnect signal is sent to the voice messaging system causing it to disconnect from the call This causes the screening station to be dropped from the call and the person who bridged onto the call is now talking to the calling party If you want to be able to intercept calls routed to an auxiliary device such as an answering machine a voice messaging system or an auto attendant make sure Automatic Extension Privacy is Not Assigned for the auxiliary equipment extension Standard phones and system phones without a programmed Privacy button cannot override this feature once it is assigned to an extension 5 21 Feature Reference Valid Entries 1 Assigned 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 22 To change the Automatic Extension Privacy sett
546. vated on a button with lights the green light is off Skip Steps 2 and 3 2 If no originating extension was programmed dial your extension number 3 If no destination extension was programmed dial your extension number again Call Forwarding is deactivated on a button with lights the green light is off Standard Phone To forward your calls 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone 2 Press 3 Dial your extension number 4 Dial the number of the extension at which you want your calls to ring To remove Call Forwarding 1 Lift the handset You hear intercom dial tone Press Dial your extension number twice Call Park Call Park Description This feature allows you to park a call or put it on a special type of hold so it can be picked up from any phone in the system Related Features a Use Call Pickup to retrieve parked calls a When acall is parked the caller hears Music on Hold 602 if it is active and an audio source is connected to the processor module regardless of the Ring on Transfer 119 setting a If you frequently park calls and you have a system phone program your extension number on an Auto Dial button so you can park a call simply by pressing the button See Auto Dialing Other ways of placing a call on hold include Hold and Exclusive Hold a Parked calls do not receive Call Waiting Call Coverage Call Forwarding or VMS Cover C
547. ve at their extension They are part of a joined call Joining Calls They are part of a Conference Call They are recording a call using Record a Call F24 They are screening a call using Call Screening F25 The voice interrupt on busy tone two beeps is unique to distinguish it from a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep If a voice interrupt on busy call is made to an idle extension the originator and the recipient hear a voice signaled intercom call tone one beep instead If you receive a voice interrupt on busy call and press Hold the third party is put on hold and the originator hears two beeps that indicate you have ended the voice interrupt on busy call At this point To talk to the originator if the green light next to the button is flashing press intercom You cannot use the Voice Interrupt On Busy Talk Back button once a voice interrupt on busy call has ended Voice Interrupt On Busy 312 Valid Entries 1 Assigned To resume your conversation with the third party press the line or pool button next to the winking green light Any party involved in a voice interrupt on busy call cannot be involved in a second voice interrupt on busy call until the first is finished Cannot be performed on Record a Call 2 Not Assigned v Programming See Figure 2 3 on page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on syst
548. waited for someone to answer the call The Automatic System Answer button returns to the status on off it was in before a power failure occurred or System Reset 728 was used Automatic System Answer Mode should not be set to Hold or Ring if the disconnect signal from the local telephone company is not recognized by Hold Disconnect Time 203 When the Caller ID Log Answered Call 317 feature is active Caller ID calls answered by Automatic System Answer in Disconnect Mode are not logged as answered or unanswered at any extension 5 25 Feature Reference Calls answered by Automatic System Answer in Hold Mode are not logged by the Caller ID Logging and Dialing feature at extension 10 unless extension 10 is programmed to log answered calls using Caller ID Log Answered Calls 317 Direct Extension Dial is an alternative system answering feature that lets outside callers dial an extension or Hunt Group number directly without the aid of the receptionist Considerations a The Automatic System Direct Extension Dial PC card is purchased separately and must be installed see PARTNER PC Card Installation Instructions Use the Automatic System Answer Record Playback feature to record a message before using Automatic System Answer since there is no default message An Automatic System Answer button must be programmed on a button with lights on the system display phone at extension 10 This feature will not work if
549. when Automatic System Answer is turned on the calls will be answered immediately by the system To turn Automatic System Answer off Press the Automatic System Answer button at extension 10 The green light goes off and Automatic System Answer is off Any calls in the process of being answered by the system will continue to hear the recorded message and will be placed on hold 5 27 Feature Reference Automatic System Answer Delay 110 Release 2 0 or Later Description This System Programming procedure specifies the number of times 0 9 an incoming call should ring before it is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature Related Features Considerations 5 28 After a call is answered Automatic System Answer plays a greeting then either places the call on hold provides continuous ringing or disconnects the call depending on the setting of Automatic System Answer Mode 121 Automatic System Answer affects incoming calls only on lines identified using Automatic System Answer Lines 204 You must program a button on the system display phone at extension 10 to turn Automatic System Answer on and off Use Automatic System Answer Button 111 to program the button You must use Automatic System Answer Record Playback to record the greeting callers hear when the system answers an incoming call You can set SMDR Talk Time 611 to Active to include the Talk field on call reports For an incoming outsid
550. whenever you feel that it is necessary It is recommended that a backup be performed after any change to the system or telephone programming Restore Programming 125 copies either the manual or the automatic backup data stored on a PC Card back to the system thereby enabling you to restore settings to their status at the time of the last automatic or manual backup Hospitality Features The following hospitality features are for special applications such as the Bed and Breakfast and Hotel Motel industries With both features the receptionist at extension 10 optionally can use the Intercom Autodialer to specify an extension Outgoing Call Restriction Button 114 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to change an extension s current Outgoing Call Restriction setting without entering System Programming mode For example after a guest s departure a hotel manager can change the No Restriction setting of the guest room phone to Inside Only so outside calls cannot be made from the phone after the guest checks out Wake Up Service Button 115 lets you program a button on the system phone at extension 10 to be used for scheduling wake up or reminder calls for system extensions When a wake up call is scheduled the system makes an intercom call to the target extension at the scheduled time If the first call is not answered or the called extension is busy the system makes a second attempt five minutes later
551. x If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Coverage active calls ring at the covering extension for the specified number of Call Coverage Rings 116 or 320 If the covering extension does not answer the call is routed to the voice mailbox of the extension that activated Call Coverage after the specified number of VMS cover rings If an extension has VMS Cover and Call Forwarding active calls ring at the call forwarding destination extension they are not covered by the voice messaging system This feature must be programmed on a button with lights This feature does not apply to coverage calls forwarded calls group calls parked calls transfer return calls Voice Interrupt on Busy calls or voice signaled calls VMS Cover F15 Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones To program a VMS Cover button 1 Press Feature System Program System Program Central Tel Program at extension 10 or 11 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed with this feature Press a programmable button with lights Press Program another button for this extension or exit programming mode Fh a wo S Using From a system phone press the programmed button to turn VMS Cover on press it again to turn it off Use the button like a switch when the light is on VMS Cover is on and your unanswered
552. x Management button by programming the fax machine extension number on an Auto Dial button There are several ways to use modems with your system as described below gt NOTE Modems can connect directly to an extension jack without an adapter However if you connect a high speed modem through the control unit you may experience some degradation of efficiency and throughput depending on the quality of the central office lines connected to the system To solve the problem either connect modems directly to the network interface jacks or contact your local telephone company for information about upgrading line quality 4 23 Using Auxiliary Equipment Stand alone Modem for Placing Calls Only 4 24 A modem and a terminal allow you to dial out and connect to computer bulletin boards and other data services This setup which lets you dial out but not receive calls is shown in Figure 4 11 Note that the telephone is optional and can be used if you want the terminal to share an extension with a phone Telephone optional Figure 4 11 Stand alone Modem for Placing Calls Only To Use Follow the modem manufacturer s instructions To Program 1 If extension X is a key extension use Line Assignment 301 to assign one or more lines to extension X If extension Y is a pooled extension use Pool Extension Assignment 314 to assign the pools you want the modem to use to extension X Also
553. xtension in the system Feature Press to change programmed settings or use system features Conf Press to add other parties to your call Transfr Press to pass a call to another extension Hold Press to put a call on hold 3 2 System Telephones PARTNER 18D OO 1 O OO 4 PARTNER 6 es i a t a Display Programmable Buttons 4 without lights Line Programmable Buttons 16 with lights Intercom Buttons 2 Cont Transfr mi 5 N L Z l Nl a an n S 3 ey Line Programmable Buttons 4 Intercom Buttons 2 Intercom In Message Ligh Cont PARTNER 18 a OE W O Figure 3 2 PARTNER 6 PARTNER 18 and PARTNER 18D Phones Spkr Press to turn on and off the speaker and microphone if available so you can dial and have a conversation without lifting the handset The light next to this button shows when the speaker is turned on Mic HFAI Press to turn the microphone on and off The light next to this button shows when the microphone is turned on Leave on to use Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature Volume Control Buttons
554. xtensions You can use Pool Line Assignment 207 to assign lines to or remove lines from pools Caller ID information does not display for ringing calls on lines belonging to a pool programmed for Out Only or for No Access Considerations For extension 10 and any extensions for which Line Access Mode 313 is set to Key this procedure is automatically set to No Access Valid Entries 1 No Restriction calls permitted on all lines in that pool v 2 Out Only can only make outside calls not receive them on lines in that pool 3 In Only can only receive calls not make them on lines in that pool 4 No Access cannot receive or make calls but can receive transferred calls on lines in that pool 5 215 Feature Reference Programming See Figure 2 3jon page 2 22 for the location of special programming buttons such as System Program and Enter on system phones 5 216 To restrict an extension from making or receiving calls on all the lines in a specific pool 1 2 Press eature 0 O System Program System Program H 3 Enter the number of the extension to be programmed For example to program extension 23 press 3 A display similar to the following appears Pool Access Rstr 23 Pool Enter the pool number 880 881 882 or 883 to be restricted at this extension For example to restrict pool 881 press The current restriction displays To c
555. y phone the caller s extension number and name if programmed will show on the display A transferred call or an unanswered transferred or parked call that is ringing back at your extension will ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP ring BEEP BEEP Release 3 0 or later see 209 Release 3 0 or Later gt NOTE Dial Tones If you use the system with PBX or Centrex lines the PBX Centrex distinctive ringing patterns are not passed to phones Phones use the ringing patterns described here instead You will encounter two different dial tones when calling with a system phone Outside dial tone is generated by your local phone company to indicate that you are connected with an outside line Intercom dial tone is generated by the system to indicate that you are connected with an inside line You hear this dial tone when you are making an inside or intercom call To hear the difference between the two types of dial tones on a system phone press a line or pool button The dial tone you hear is an outside dial tone To hear an intercom dial tone press intercom Using the Handset Speaker and Microphone Every PARTNER model and MLS model system phone except the MLS 6 has a speaker and a microphone which you can turn on by pressing Gp r In addition you can turn just the microphone on and off by pressing ic HFA When the green light next to Wic HFA is on the microphone is on If you prefer to dial and conduct cal
556. y the two digit code when you hear intercom dial tone Instructions for using these features on standard phones are included in Chapter 5 Feature Reference To use a Speed Dial number press followed by its two or three digit code when you hear intercom dial tone For details see Personal Speed Dial Numbers ial Numbers and System Speed Dial Numbers If Call Waiting 316 is assigned to an extension with a standard phone connected users hear a call waiting tone two beeps when a second call comes in to the extension The call waiting tone is not repeated Use the switchhook on a standard phone to place calls on hold park a call transfer a call answer a call waiting call or set up a conference call For details see Using the Switchhook on page 3 10 or Hold Transferring Conference Calls in Chapter 5 r Calls Answering Calls If the standard phone has a message light use it to notify users of a aaa se Message light On FO end Message gn OF EIDO Tror a list of supported phones see Telephones on page 1 16 Alternatively if you have a voice messaging system the light is used to indicate that a message has been left in your mailbox On a standard phone the message light flashes when the phone is idle to indicate that the extension has received a message Ringing Patterns Standard phones have these ringing patterns An outside call will ring ring
557. y the type of calls to include for call reporting 1 Press Feature 0 O System Program System Program 6 O at extension 10 or 11 2 Press until the appropriate value displays 3 Select another procedure or exit programming mode SMDR Talk Time 611 Release 2 0 or Later SMDR Talk Time 611 Release 2 0 or Later Description Call reporting often referred to as M Station Message Detail Recording or SMDR provides detailed tracking of telephone usage in a printed report This System Programming procedure allows you to indicate whether or not you want to include a Talk field on call reports The Talk field records talk time for all incoming outside calls For Automatic System Answer and Direct Extension Dial calls talk time does not include the time during which the greeting plays or the time that the caller spends waiting for someone to answer the call For all other calls talk time is the same as call duration Related Features Considerations Valid Entries Talk time is most helpful for Automatic System Answer or Direct Extension Dial calls You can use SMDR Record Type 608 to specify the type of calls to be included on call reports You can use SMDR Output Format 610 to identify whether a maximum of 15 digits or 24 digits is printed for dialed numbers on the call report When you change this feature to Active the next call record that prints includes talk time as th

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

    Swordfish Varipoint Pencil Sharpener    Agent for Microsoft Windows User Guide  Omega Engineering HH504 User's Manual  User Manual - Cordland Serviceport.se  iMAX Quattro B6 manual  Total we  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file